Business Ideas

Investment Ideas

Make Money at Home

  • Bitcoin and Xcoins
  • Earn On Social Networking
  • Freelancing
  • Make a Website
  • Money Making Apps
  • Affiliate Marketing
  • Online Surveys
  • Start a Blog
  • Web Hosting

Startup Ideas

  • Your Passion Your Money

Make Money Online

Profitable Street Food Business Ideas with Low Investment

Introduction to profitable street food business ideas with low investment : India’s street food market is growing rapidly. We have compiled a list of the top street food business ideas that are suitable for any city. These businesses also require very low startup costs.

Nowadays, street food is being offered even by organized retail outlets in a designed way. In addition, they offer franchise opportunities to aspiring entrepreneurs. Tea stalls, Pani Puri, and vada pav are some of the most successful franchises.

Region-specific food preferences characterize the Indian population. Indian food varies from city to city. Southern India is known for its dosas and idlis. Alternatively, Punjabi food is called Chhole Bhature.  Food from Delhi NCR is Allu Tikka, while food from Bihar is Litti Chokha. Throughout the United States, you can find a wide variety of tasty, but not so healthy, foods.

People consume street food frequently because of its affordability and deliciousness. It doesn’t matter if it is a short break in the office or a quick evening family outing, most of the population relies on street food every day.

Although this growth continues, new types of foods are still emerging and old classics are being reimagined. This means that new ideas can still be introduced for people just starting out in this industry. We’ve compiled a list of profitable street food business ideas to help you get started.

As a result, starting a street food business today is a highly lucrative endeavor. Despite this, the business requires a lot of hard work, long working hours, and direct interaction with customers.

Here is a list of the topmost profitable street food business ideas;

1. Biryani Stall

In general, biryani is the main dish. Many people enjoy it too. It is available in many flavors and tastes. Take-away Biryani counters are low-cost businesses. The stall can even be opened by outsourcing the biryani. Your stall must be located in an area with a high rate of biryani consumption.

2. Chinese Food Stall

Chow mein, Egg rolls, cutlets, roasted chicken, spring rolls, sandwiches, etc. are favorites among Chinese consumers. Nearly every alternate day, the Indian population eats Chinese food. The food is delicious and tasty. Almost the same ingredients can be used to prepare a lot of foods. We import the majority of our ready-to-eat Chinese foods from the northern and eastern parts of our country.

3. Cold Drinks Stall

People in the country drink cold drinks all year round due to the hot and humid weather. Even with a capital investment of Rs 50,000, you can open a cold drinks stall. While the margin per unit is very low, if you increase the volume, you can earn a satisfactory profit. At the same stall, you can sell chips, chocolates, and other ready-to-eat packaged food items.

  4. Idli, Dosa and Wada Stall

Idli and Dosa Stall

Typical South Indian food includes Idlis, Dosas, Uttapams, Upmas, etc. These food items, however, are popular throughout the country as breakfast and even as a main meal. In metro cities and small towns, a small food stall in a high-traffic area is a highly lucrative business.

5. Momo Stall

Foods like this are highly popular and are frequently consumed by people. Many big companies are now entering this type of business. This has led to a lot of franchise opportunities today. Chicken momos, veg momos, and pan-fried momos are the most popular foods at a momo stall.

6. Pani Puri or Golgappa Stall

Is there anyone who does not love Panipuri? It is also known as Phuchka or Puchka. Pani Puri is available almost everywhere due to its high demand, both in restaurants and on the street. Some of the best ones, however, can be found on the road, and people have their favorite places. It is highly profitable to open a Pani Puri stall in a segment that requires low starting capital.

7. Pav Bhaji Stall

Pav is the soft bread used in Pav Bhaji. A vegetable curry is cooked with a soft bread roll and served with a thick vegetable curry, which is a fast food dish from India. Cheese pav bhaji, paneer pav bhaji, fried pav bhaji, and mushroom pav bhaji are some of the most popular dishes.

A large portion of the country’s population lives in the west and northern regions. Pav bhaji is commonly consumed throughout the country.

8. Popcorn Stall

In case if you miss this: Franchise Business Ideas For Beginners .

Profitable Street Food Business Ideas with Low Investment

A popcorn stall is an excellent option for someone who wants to start a side business. Popcorn is normally consumed in the evenings. Tiffin is a good time for children to eat popcorn. This snack can be prepared with oil or butter. There is an automatic popcorn maker available nowadays.

9. Sweet & Snacks Stall

It is mainly the western part of the country where sweets and snacks stalls originate. These shops are very popular all over the country, despite slight differences in taste between regions. Most of these types of shops sell sweets, Dahi, and snacks like potato chips, Samosas, Namkeen, etc. The food can be prepared at home and sold from the food stall.

10. Tea Stall

The tea stall business is a rewarding and profitable enterprise. It is possible to establish the store in any size according to your investment capacity. Franchises are also available for purchase. Starting a tea stall business is the perfect business venture not only in big cities but also in smaller towns.

You may also like this: Online Part Time Jobs For Students .

11. Burgers

Let’s begin with a classic and street food staple that has never lost its appeal. The public has come to expect gourmet burgers sold at some really good stalls.

While there is a lot of competition depending on where you go, there is still room for new traders.

  12. Vegan alternatives

Street food vendors will have more opportunities as vegan diets grow in popularity. There have been a number of vegan food trucks and stalls over the last few years and this is likely to continue.

Their menu includes everything from vegan burgers and hot dogs to vegan pizza.  We recommend the vegan street food book “vegan Street Food” if you’re looking for some vegan inspiration. You’ll find a wide variety of Asian street food recipes in the book.

Consumer demand for these has remained consistent like that of burgers for a long time. The longest queues I have ever seen were at falafel wrap stalls.

14. Mobile Juice Bar

Fruits and vegetables are becoming a more important part of people’s daily diets these days because they are more health-conscious. Children also really enjoy smoothies.

The juice lovers’ big book has over 425 juice recipes to choose from, so you will not be short of ideas.

15.  Ice cream

How about this: Best Small Home Based Businesses For Housewives .

Ice Cream Shop

It has been years since ice cream carts and stalls were popular. However, people always find new ways to make an old classic interesting. The ice cream industry is experiencing a bit of a renaissance, from dairy-free ice cream to ice cream made with organic milk.

People today seek out good food at a reasonable price. Street food is becoming increasingly popular as a result. In addition to the above list of street food business ideas, you can open any type of street food stall using products that are in demand in the local market. It is possible to generate enough profit at the right location for a street food stall.

If you do it right and choose a product that’s likely to sell, getting into the food truck or street food scene can be exciting and worth it. The food scene is constantly changing, and people are always seeking out new and interesting cuisines.

Street food staples like gourmet burgers and wraps are available, but there are also interesting vegan options starting to emerge. Basically, you should balance a tried-and-true concept with something a little different or modern.

Handicraft Making at Home: A Small Profitable Business Idea

Pet-tech startups: innovations for animal lovers, tech repair services: meeting the demand for gadget maintenance, maximizing rewards: smart credit card habits for cashback and points, ultimate guide to making money from goat milk business, how to start an agricultural value added product business.

  • Value-Added Business Ideas for Greenhouse: The Best Ways to Make Profits with Greenhouse Farming

How to Make Profits with Organic Country Chicken: Best Strategies for Beginners

10 value-added business ideas for millets: low-investment and highly profitable, why cleaning service business becoming more profitable in metro cities in india, 10 best businesses to start in ayodhya for profits, top drone business ideas in india: unlocking aerial innovation & opportunities, top 10 service businesses you can start with no money, ultimate guide to starting a home-based advertising agency business.

  • Starting a Nail Salon Near Your Location: Check List, Business Plan, Licensing, and Opening Instructions

Construction Company Name Ideas: Guide to Create New Construction Company Names

8 best small businesses to start in hyderabad: low-cost and profitable, 10 best small businesses to start in massachusetts: low-cost and profitable, 10 best small businesses to start in maryland: low-investment and profitable, 10 best small businesses to start in delaware: low-investment and profitable.

  • 10 Best Small Businesses to Start in Connecticut: Low-Investment and Profitable
  • Top 10 Best Online Pet Business Ideas: Exploring Cats to Dogs
  • 10 Best Small Businesses to Start in Colorado: Low-Investment and Profitable
  • Top 10 Profitable Small Business Ideas in California: Low-Investment Tips
  • From Little Rock to Fayetteville: Top 10 Profitable Small Business Ideas in Arkansas
  • Top 10 Profitable Small Business Ideas in Alabama: Discover Opportunities in Alabama’s Growing Cities
  • Top 10 Profitable Small Business Ideas in Arizona: Discover Opportunities in Arizona’s Growing Cities
  • Golf Business Ideas: Exploring Golf Course Money Making Ideas
  • Low Capital Profitable Small Farm Ideas: Farming Ideas to Make Money
  • How to Write a Business Plan for Daycare: Exploring from Financial Projections to Risk Management
  • Home Daycare License Requirements: Exploring State-wise In-home Daycare Requirements
  • How Profitable is Day Care Business: How Much Does a Daycare Owner Make a Month or Year?
  • How to Open a Daycare Center in Toronto, Canada: Business Plan, Licenses and Permits
  • How to Start Meal Prep and Delivery Services: A Popular Business Idea
  • How to Start a Milk Chilling Plant Business
  • How to Start Coconut Shell Charcoal Business: Business Plan for Maximizing Profits
  • 10 Value-Added Business Ideas for Fish Farmers: Low-Investment and Highly Profitable
  • 9 Value-added Business Ideas for Poultry Farmers: Low-investment and Highly Profitable
  • 9 Value-added Business Ideas for Pig Farmers: Low-investment and Highly Profitable
  • 10 Value-added Business Ideas for Beekeepers: Low-investment and Highly Profitable
  • 10 Saffron Value-added Business Ideas: Low-investment and High Profit-margin
  • Uncovering the Untapped Potential: 10 Hidden Gems in the Small Business Sector
  • 10 Value-added Business Ideas for Apricots: Low-Investment and Highly Profitable
  • The Complete Guide to Launching a Landscape Design Business
  • 10 Profitable Small Business Ideas in the Real Estate Industry

LEAVE A REPLY Cancel reply

Save my name and email in this browser for the next time I comment.

Value-Added Business Ideas for Greenhouse: The Best Ways to Make Profits with...

Starting a nail salon near your location: check list, business plan, licensing,..., ideas to make money in india – a full guide, mudra yojana loan scheme, eligibility, how to apply, profit in dry fruit business (cost to start), how to make money from rice mill business in india, profitable agriculture business ideas in india, government loans for women entrepreneurs in india.

  • Credit Cards
  • Online Jobs

10 Profitable Street Food Business Ideas with Low Investment

  • October 21, 2022
  • by Rupak Chakrabarty

The street food market is increasing very fast across all cities and towns in the world. Here in this article, we put a list of the most profitable street food business ideas that are suitable in any city as such. Also, you can start these ventures with very small startup investments.

In recent times, you can find even a lot of organized retails that are offering street foods in a designed way. Also, they are offering franchise opportunities to new entrepreneurs. Some of the most successful ventures are tea stalls, Pani Puri, and even vada pav.

The food preference of people is very region-specific. In fact, every city has its own specialty. Dosa, Idli is popular in the southern part of the country. Whereas, Chhole Bhature is Punjabi food.  Allu Tikka is food from Delhi NCR. And Litti Chokha is from Bihar. Simply, you can find a lot of tasty but not-so-healthy food that is popular throughout the country.

Due to the cost-effectiveness and unbeatable taste and flavor, people consume street food very often. Whether it is a work break in the office or a small evening trip with the family, most of the population depends on street food every day.

Hence, we can conclude, starting a street food business is a highly lucrative business these days. However, the business demands hard work, long working hours, and direct customer interaction.

List of the 10 Street Food Business Ideas

#1. biryani stall.

Basically, biryani is the main course of food. It’s highly popular too. Biryani comes in a variety of tastes and flavors. A Take-Away Biryani counter is a low-cost business. And you can open the stall even by outsourcing the biryani. You must set up the stall in a high-traffic area where people like to consume biryani regularly.

#2. Chinese Food Stall

Some of the most popular Chinese foods are chow mein, Egg rolls, cutlets, roasted chicken, spring rolls, sandwiches, etc. People from all over the world consume Chinese food on a regular basis – almost every alternate day. These foods are delicious and tasty. Also, you can prepare a lot of foods with almost the same ingredients.

#3. Cold Drinks Stall

Due to the hot and humid weather of the country, people consume cold drinks throughout the year. You can open a cold drinks stall even with a Rs 50000 capital investment. Though the profit margin is very less per unit sale, you can earn a satisfactory profit if you increase the volume. Also, you can sell chips, chocolates, and other ready-to-eat packaged food items from the same stall.

#4. Idli & Bara Stall

Idli, bara, dosa, uttapam, Upma, etc are typically South Indian food. However, these are popular as breakfast or even a main meal food item throughout the country. A small food stall in a high-traffic area is a highly lucrative venture in metro cities and small towns.

#5. Momo Stall

This is another highly popular food item that people consume frequently. Even big companies are now coming into the stall-type business. Therefore, a lot of franchise opportunities are also available these days. The chicken momo, veg momo, and pan-fried momos are major selling food of a momo stall.

#6. Pani Puri or Golgappa Stall

Who doesn’t love Panipuri? It’s also popular as Phuchka or Puchka. Due to the high demand, you can find Pani Puri almost everywhere – from restaurants to the streets. However, the best ones are often found on the roads, and people have their favorite destinations. Initiating a Pani Puri stall is a highly lucrative business in a low-investment segment.

#7. Pav Bhaji Stall

In Pav Bhaji, Pav refers to soft bread. Basically, it is a fast food dish from India, consisting of a thick vegetable curry, fried, and served with a soft bread roll. Some of the most popular dishes are cheese pav bhaji, paneer pav bhaji, fried pav bhaji, mushroom pav bhaji, etc.

The food is highly popular in the northern and western parts of the country. Currently, people all over the country consume pav bhaji on a regular basis.

#8. Popcorn Stall

If you want to start a part-time street food business, then a popcorn stall is a perfect option for you. Generally, people consume popcorn in the evening time. The children prefer popcorn in tiffin time. Popcorn can be cooked with butter or oil. Nowadays, you can find a popcorn-making machine that produces popcorn automatically.

#9. Sweet & Snacks Stall

Basically, the sweet and snack stalls originated from the western part of the country. Though the taste slightly differs regionally, this type of shop is very popular throughout the country. Most of these types of shops sell different types of sweets, Dahi, and snack items like potato chips, Samosa, Namkeen, etc. You can prepare the food at home and sell those items from the food stall.

#10. Tea Stall

Opening a small tea stall is a profitable and self-rewarding business. Depending on your investment capacity, you can establish the store in any size. Also, you can consider buying a franchise. A tea stall business is perfect to start a venture not only in metro cities but also in small towns.

Nowadays, people search for good food at a reasonable price. Hence, the demand for street food items is increasing very fast. Apart from the above list of street food business ideas, you can open any type of street food stall with products that have local demand. A street food stall in the right location has the ability to generate sufficient profit.

street food stall business plan in india

Hello, I’m Rupak Chakrabarty, a passionate advocate for small and medium enterprises (SMEs) and the driving force behind MUVSI Consulting, where I serve as a dedicated small business coach. With years of experience in the entrepreneurial world and a deep-rooted commitment to helping SMEs thrive, I bring a wealth of knowledge, expertise, and guidance to aspiring and established business owners alike.

Share this:

Business Small Business

Just Credible

  • Entrepreneurship
  • Home Business
  • Productivity
  • Small Business

How to Start a Small Street Food Outlet in India

Fast Food Business: How to Start a Small Street Food Outlet in India

Planning on Starting a Street Food Outlet in India, check this out…

Street food business in India is a booming one with plenty of lip-smacking street foods sold by hawkers and vendors in a portable stall. If you are considering starting a street food outlet in India, here are some top tips for starting a fast food joint in an Indian city.

Street food refers to snacks and beverages that are sold in portable stalls or carts by hawkers and vendors. Indian street foods are made with a mix of tasty spices that make it one of a kind.

Not only Indians, even foreigners drool over these roadside delights that can tantalise the taste buds and make you crave for more.

How to Start a Small Street Food Outlet in India

Food to serve when you wish to start a small fast food business in india.

So your first concern should be what you would like to serve in your street food outlet.

Start a Small Street Food Outlet in India

  • Consider the kind of food you want to sell in your street food outlet .
  • Decide on the details of handling the food, how to store it, thaw and cook it etc. before you open fast food shop.
  • Focus on local specialities as well as something exciting and novel for the taste buds. The market is very competitive, so it is important to be innovative in food and taste.

Read: 10 High Profit Food Business Ideas with Small Investment

Location for Starting a QSR in India (Quick Service Restaurant)

Where are you going to set up your street food outlet? Finding the right location can make a huge difference to the success of your business.

  • Park in a location that is legally permitted when starting a small food joint in India.
  • Choose a location where your target customers are usually available.
  • Check out the competition at the location while selecting the best places to open a street food outlet.
  • Check out the prime hours of the location.

While selecting locations, opt for places near shopping malls, a tourist location, park, a beach, college campus, bus or railway stations etc. Tip: You can also park your outlet at places where festivals and events are staged!

Restaurant Format (Street Food Outlet)

After deciding on what food you’d like to sell, you have to decide your on your street food business plan.

  • You could opt for a food cart, a kiosk, a trailer or a food truck while considering a quick service restaurant in India.

Start a Small Fast Food Business in India

  • Food trucks are useful, as you can use it in multiple locations and stops. You can also navigate more easily through the city streets. Typically, kiosks are used indoors in mall spaces, hotels and airports, whereas a larger one can also be used in an amusement park.
  • They are also ideal to use in events and temporary locations.
  • Your vehicle choice for your food stall business would depend on the food you are planning to serve, the number of areas of operation and the amount you are planning to invest.

See: How to Start a Spice Processing and Packaging Business in India

Industry Research

In general, the street food industry is a competitive one, so you must do proper research on the most profitable street food business ideas in India, with very low investment.

  • If you are aware of any other street food outlets in the same area, check out what works for them and what fails, so that you can do things differently.
  • Identify niche opportunities, local needs and identify the risk factors.
  • Check out the industry trends in order to see which format, such as kiosks or food trucks, is on the rise and inspect the future market projections and scenario.

Target Customers (Street Food Joint)

This is one of the important questions to answer when creating your marketing strategy.

  • Define the demographics that is likely to be your customer and buy your products. Examine, the gender, the age, the income group to get a clear picture of whom you are marketing to.
Remember : For instance, if you have a noisy atmosphere, don’t expect senior citizens to frequent your place.

Street Food Outlet

  • List out the types of people who will enjoy your street food and see whether these people live within a few miles of the location, so that your street food outlet will be financially viable.
  • Use a medium of marketing communication that your demographic understands.
  • Your target customers is the focus of your market research and analysis. All your decisions will be made based on who you are going to serve. This includes the interiors, the menu, your suppliers and even your location of the outlet.
Example : For instance, if your target customers are corporate employees or businessmen, then your location will be in areas where there are many offices and companies. You will also have to go in for more expensive suppliers, as such customers care more about quality and do not mind paying a little more.

Read: Planning to Open a Restaurant? Here’s How to Hire a Cook for Your Restaurant

Infrastructure and Materials

  • You need to work out the size and the type of equipment that will serve as your street food vehicle.
  • Equipment required for holding fresh water and waste water.
  • Getting your mobile kitchen installed is not very expensive. You can get it installed by local manufacturers or just get a ready made truck. You can also get one built specifically for your needs.
  • Purchasing materials budget for inventory, labor, rent and utilities, storage appliances, freezers, work surfaces, frying pans, tongs ladles, knives etc.

open fast food shop

Marketing Strategies

Quick service restaurants are becoming increasingly popular, so you need to step up your marketing strategies.

  • Venture into both offline and online marketing for your street food outlet. Create a website and have a social media presence.

According to the National Restaurant Association, about 83% adults use their mobile phones for checking out restaurants and menus, location etc. So align your marketing strategy in tune with this factor.

  • Send out flyers and pamphlets to target customers as part of your offline marketing strategy. Target local clients living within 5 kms of your outlet.
  • Integrate with online platforms like Swiggy and Zomato for delivery to doorstep.

License and Certificates Registration

Most locations will need permits and agreements, so check out with the local authorities beforehand.

Tip: check out for registration requirements of street food vendors in India.

  • It is important to get the FSSAI license if you are manufacturing and trading in food connected businesses.
  • Other licenses might include the Eating House License, the NOC from the Municipal Corporation and the RTO, a license from Fire Department for ensuring safety of equipment kept inside the truck.
  • Keep all vehicle papers updated and get a commercial vehicle license from the RTO.
  • You have to also comply with the Food Safety and Standards Act of 2006, as you are legally responsible for preparing food that is safe and free from contamination.

Check Out: How to Franchise Your Restaurant Business for Growth?

Hygiene Policies (Street Food Business)

Today’s customers want fresh and hygienic food and also quick service. Street food is cheap and tasty and is wildly popular, so it is capable of affecting the health of millions of people. Safety and quality should be the primary goals.

small food joint in india

  • Maintenance of proper health standards by using food grade materials for storage and preparation.
  • Check out the water and cooking system, so that they meet the hygiene and safety standards of the area.
  • Other safety practises, like washing hands before handling food, using gloves and personal hygiene are also important
Remember : By following the safety and hygiene standards, you can operate legally and avoid a fine. You will also help improve public perception about street food business.

Financing/Pricing

If you are starting small, you may not need any external financing.

  • However, you can get financing and get started faster.
  • Use your business plan for loans. Be realistic and practical about the money you might need
Tip : Use local produce to keep costs low.

When deciding on pricing, Indian customers are very price sensitive, so keep the pricing in accordance with the market condition and the competition.

Last Word on Starting a Street Food Outlet

According to the NRAI (National Restaurant Association India), casual dining industry is estimated at around 6000 crores and is expected to grow to 17,000 crores by 2021.

Starting a small street food outlet in India is one of the cheapest ways to enter the food industry, as the risks and investment are comparatively low. The startup costs are low and it is less risky than opening up a full fledged restaurant.

You May Like: Honey Bee Farming – How to Start Honey Processing Business

You can be your own boss and the work is flexible, as you can select when to work and where to work. You don’t need much restaurant experience too.

The biggest advantage is that the street food trend is growing in popularity. If you are passionate about food and have a well researched plan, take a look at the above checklist and start setting up your street food outlet start up !

Here’s to a roaring and successful street food business in India ! 👍

Best Cement Companies in India

Related Content

Ways to Make Money Without a Job

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Read Our Newsletter

Get the latest in just credible delivered to your inbox..

Hadala Kitchen Equipment

  • Display Counters
  • Commercial Ovens
  • Ice Cream Machine
  • Bakery Equipments
  • Commercial Freezer
  • Restaurant Equipments
  • Cloud Kitchen Equipment
  • Commercial Cooking Equipment
  • Commercial Storage Equipments
  • Hotel Kitchen Setup in Delhi
  • Commercial Kitchen Consultants

Top Tips for Starting a Profitable Roadside Food Stall Business in India

  • Anjali Kapoor
  • April 30, 2023
  • No Comments

Table of Contents

A food cart business is a popular and affordable way to enter the food industry, offering lower risks and low investments compared to other restaurant formats.

To succeed in this business, you must offer a high-demand product and find a crowded location for long-term viability in the market. In recent years, the food cart business has experienced significant growth, attracting street food enthusiasts from far and wide. A food cart business is more manageable regarding costs and resources than starting a traditional restaurant.

Starting a roadside food stall business in India offers several advantages, such as low startup costs, flexibility, and high demand for street food in the country.

This blog post will provide a step-by-step guide on how to start a successful roadside food stall business in India, covering essential aspects such as understanding the market, legal requirements, location, equipment and supplies, menu planning, marketing, and promotion, managing the business, etc.

1. Understanding The Market of Your Food Stall

A. Identifying the target audience

  • Define the demographic of your ideal customer
  • Understand their food preferences, dietary restrictions, and buying habits
  • Determine the locations where they’re likely to be found.

B. Researching the competition

  • Identify the existing food stalls and restaurants in your area
  • Analyze their menus, pricing, and customer reviews
  • Determine their strengths and weaknesses to differentiate your business

C. Identifying the popular cuisines

  • Research the trending cuisines and popular dishes in your area
  • Determine the ingredients and cooking methods required to make them
  • Consider incorporating unique twists or regional flavors to stand out from the competition.

2. Check Legal Requirements Before Opening Food Stall

A. Registration and licenses required

  • Register your business with the appropriate authorities, such as the Registrar of Firms or the Registrar of Companies, depending on the type of entity you’re operating.
  • Obtain licenses from the local Municipal Corporation or Panchayat to operate a food stall on public property.
  • Register your business with the Shops and Establishments Act to comply with labor laws and obtain a trade license.

B. FSSAI registration

  • The Food Safety and Standards Authority of India (FSSAI) registration is mandatory for all food businesses in India, including roadside food stalls.
  • Apply for an FSSAI license or Registration online based on the scale and nature of your food business.
  • Comply with the food safety and hygiene regulations specified by FSSAI to maintain food quality and safety standards.

C. GST registration

  • If your annual turnover exceeds the GST threshold limit, you must register for Goods and Services Tax (GST) to comply with tax regulations.
  • Apply for GST registration online and obtain a GST number to collect and remit taxes.

D. Health and safety regulations

  • Comply with the local health and safety regulations, such as the Food Safety and Standards Act, 2006, and the Municipal Corporation Act, to maintain food safety and hygiene.
  • Follow the standard operating procedures for food preparation, storage, and serving to prevent contamination and foodborne illnesses.
  • Ensure that your food stall has basic facilities like clean water supply, proper drainage, and garbage disposal to maintain cleanliness and hygiene standards.

3. Location is Very Important For Roadside Food Stall Business in India

A. Choosing the right location

  • Identify the high-traffic areas in your city, such as markets, commercial areas, and tourist spots, to attract customers.
  • Consider factors like accessibility, parking availability, and foot traffic while choosing a location.
  • Look for spaces that offer visibility and exposure, such as busy intersections or areas with high footfall.

4. Cart And Kitchen Equipment

A. Basic equipment required

  • A food cart or food truck to set up your food stall
  • Utensils and cutlery for food preparation, serving, and eating
  • Disposable plates, cups, and napkins for customer convenience
  • Storage containers for food ingredients and supplies
  • Cleaning supplies such as detergents, sponges, and trash bags.
  • Cooking appliances such as gas stoves, grills, or deep fryers depending on your menu.

B. Quality and cost of equipment

  • Invest in good-quality kitchen equipment that is durable and efficient to ensure smooth operation of your food stall.
  • Research and compare the cost and quality of equipment from different vendors and suppliers to find the best deals.
  • Consider renting or leasing equipment if you have a limited budget to reduce the initial investment cost.
  • Ensure that the equipment you use meets the safety and hygiene standards specified by the authorities to avoid any legal or health issues.

5. Menu Planning

When starting a roadside food stall business, menu planning is one of the most important aspects to consider. You need to decide on the cuisine, design the menu, and price the menu items strategically to attract customers and generate profits.

Deciding on the cuisine: – The first step in menu planning is deciding on the cuisine you want to offer. You can choose to specialize in a particular cuisine or offer a variety of dishes from different regions. Consider the availability of ingredients, your expertise, and the demand for different cuisines in your target market while making this decision.

6. Marketing And Promotion

Marketing and promotion are essential for the success of any business, including a roadside food stall. Here are some effective ways to promote your food stall:

A. Developing a brand name and logo

Creating a brand name and logo for your food stall is a great way to establish a unique identity in the market. Your brand name and logo should reflect your cuisine, your target audience, and your personality. Make sure they are memorable, catchy, and easy to recognize. Use them on your food cart, packaging, and social media platforms to create a consistent brand image.

B. Social media promotion

Social media platforms like Facebook, Instagram, and Twitter are great tools to promote your roadside food stall. Post high-quality pictures and videos of your food and engage with your followers regularly. Use relevant hashtags, geotags, and location-based targeting to attract local customers. Offer exclusive deals and discounts to your social media followers to encourage repeat business.

C. Word-of-mouth promotion

Word-of-mouth promotion is a powerful tool that can make or break your roadside food stall business. Encourage your satisfied customers to leave positive reviews on your social media platforms or google reviews. Offer referral discounts to your customers to bring in their friends and family. Host food events or collaborate with other local businesses to expand your customer base.

Also Read: Complete Guide For Choosing The Best Bakery Equipment

In conclusion, starting a roadside food stall business in India can be a great way to enter the food industry with low risk and investment. This business has gained popularity in a few years, attracting street food lovers from all over. With the proper research, planning, and execution, you can create a successful and profitable business.

For those who are passionate about food and want to start their own business, a roadside food stall could be the perfect opportunity. Following the guidelines outlined in this blog post, you can create a unique brand and menu that stands out from the competition. Moreover, by prioritizing health and safety regulations and obtaining the necessary licenses and permits, you can ensure the long-term viability of your business.

Finally, effective marketing and promotion strategies such as social media and word-of-mouth promotion can help you establish a loyal customer base and grow your business. So, don’t be afraid to take the plunge and start your roadside food stall business in India. With determination, hard work, and a passion for food, you can create a successful and profitable business that will leave a lasting impression on your customers.

street food stall business plan in india

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

The freshest and most exctings news

modern kitchen design

Ultimate Guide To Modern Kitchen Design: Maximize Functionality And Style

The kitchen is the busiest and most active place at home. Imagine spending most of your time in the well-designed kitchen making your cooking easy and fun. It sounds very good, rig

best kitchen chimney

Choose the Best Kitchen Chimney for Indian Kitchens: A Complete Guide

Cooking in the kitchen has become much more enjoyable thanks to kitchen chimneys. Because of the kitchen chimneys, you can now have a smokeless and modern kitchen making your cooki

fssai license for home cloud kitchen

How To Get FSSAI License for Your Home Cloud Kitchen – Complete Guide

The trend of cloud kitchens is rising tremendously in India and the food delivery business is evolving rapidly. Moreover, after the pandemic, there has been an exponential increase

pos systems for grocery stores

Best POS Systems For Grocery Stores: Streamline Your Operations and Enhance Customer Experience

Why Your Grocery Store Needs a Reliable POS System If you own a grocery store or a supermarket, running the business through traditional methods may be inconvenient and difficult.

How To Open A Good Chinese Restaurant In India

How To Open A Good Chinese Restaurant In India

Chinese food cuisine is trendy worldwide, and the Chinese restaurant business in India is rising exponentially. Moreover, it is expected that the Chinese restaurant market will inc

pos systems for retail

Comparing the Best POS Systems for Retail: Choose the Right Fit for Your Business

POS Systems For Retail Business Gone are the days when calculations in business were done through pen and paper. In today’s competitive business world, knowing your earnings

ice cream machines for small business

Best Ice Cream Machines for Small Businesses in 2024: Enhance Your Dessert Offerings

Best Ice Cream Machines For Small Businesses In 2024 – Powerful Machine List Ice Creams are the most loved and popular dessert for every age group whether they are kids, adul

top commercial refrigerators

Top Commercial Refrigerators: Find the Best Fit For Your Food Business

If you are running a cafe, restaurant, or any food business, equipping your kitchen with essential equipment is important. Moreover, commercial refrigerators are the most essential

benefits of sugarcane juice for men

Unlocking the Health Benefits of Sugarcane Juice For Men: A Complete Guide

As summer starts in India, you must have seen sugarcane juice stalls around the road. Almost every person in India loves sugarcane juice as it refreshes your body and soul in the s

  • Visi Cooler
  • Commercial Refrigerator
  • Sugarcane Juice Machine
  • Combination Ovens
  • Commercial Pizza Oven
  • Roti Maker Machine
  • Commercial Fryer
  • Commercial Four Burner Gas Range
  • Fried Ice Cream Machine
  • Shawarma Machine
  • Food Mixer Machine
  • Commercial Single Burner Gas Range
  • Commercial Burner Range
  • Vegetable Cutting Machine
  • Planetary Mixer Machine
  • Commercial Two Burner Gas Range
  • Food Display Counter
  • Dishwashing Equipment
  • Cake Mixer Machine
  • Commercial Chinese Burner Range
  • Thai Roll Ice Cream Machine
  • Coffee Shop Equipment
  • Dough Kneader Machine
  • Deep Fat Fryer
  • Gelato Ice Cream Machine
  • Bar Equipments
  • Bakery Mixers
  • Popsicle Ice Cream Machine
  • Home Oil Press Machine
  • Commercial Mixer Grinders
  • Deep Fryers
  • Turkish Ice Cream Machine
  • Commercial Oil Press Machine
  • Commercial Stainless Steel Shelving
  • Stainless Steel Table
  • Food Warmer
  • Commercial Convection Ovens
  • Western Deep Freezer
  • Softy Ice Cream Machine
  • Commercial Griller
  • Commercial Bakery Ovens

Let us know how we can help

  • 0 Shopping Cart 0,00  € -->

Bizz On Wheels

How to Start a Food Cart Business: a Step-by-Step Guide for Beginners & Entrepreneurs

How to start a street food cart business by BizzOnWheels

Wondering how to start a food cart business?

The timing couldn’t be better: it seems that the street food craze is sweeping the world.

From bustling cities to small towns, food on wheels is a growing trend. And it’s not just drawing street food fans, it’s bringing in big bucks too: according to Intuit , the street-food business, including food trucks and mobile food carts, is a $2.7 billion industry that has seen a 12.4% growth in the last 5 years alone!

Traders are encouraged by the growing number of urban street markets, private events and street food festivals, while the entire trend is supported by the global rise of the “foodie” culture, making the public increasingly open to new taste experiences and quality cuisine.

Which begs the question:

What Makes Street Food So Popular?

street food stall business plan in india

From the entrepreneur’s perspective , street food comes with important benefits such as low start-up costs and mobility. Kiosks, food carts , trailers, and food trucks have a lower overhead than restaurants and can be moved if one location does not generate enough business.

For customers , street food is convenient and cost-friendly, which makes it attractive for basically everyone: locals and tourists, students and busy professionals, frugal singles and large families.

The most popular street foods?

There are the classics: hot dogs, hamburgers, ice cream and doughnuts.

Then there are those inspired by ethnic cuisines such as tacos, empanadas, sushi and crepes. The possibilities are endless and it’s up to you, the entrepreneur, to find the dishes and recipes that will set you apart from the rest and, most importantly, that will help you build a good reputation and a loyal customer base.

But, before you decide what foods you’re going to sell, you’ll have to consider:

The PROs and CONs of a Food Cart Business

There are many advantages to starting your own food cart business, which is why a lot of people choose to do just that. The PROs include:

  • Low start-up costs
  • Less risky than opening up a restaurant
  • The ability to be your own boss
  • The flexibility to work when and where you want
  • Little restaurant experience required
  • The growing popularity of the street food trend

But, as with all business endeavours, there are also CONs to examine. A food cart business is no walk in the park: there’s a lot of hard work to be done and you’ll only see significant profits after your business picks up.

The biggest CONs are:

  • Being self-employed can be testing for some
  • Long hours, early mornings and night shifts required
  • Fierce competition
  • There are many regulations and laws to comply with
  • Seasonal reliance
  • Finding a suitable location that you’re allowed to trade in
  • Customer service can be challenging if you’re a solo-preneur

From our experience as food carts manufacturers , people are attracted by affordable start-up costs and by flexibility; at the same time, the most common complaints – at least in the initial phase – are long working hours and industry volatility in terms of trends and business opportunities.

However, if you are passionate about good food and you start with solid and well-researched plan, there is every chance you could make a roaring success of your food cart start-up.

How to Start a Mobile Food Cart Business? A Step-by-Step Guide

First step: market research.

Market research involves finding out the “who, what, where, why and when” of your business, and while it’s not the most exciting part of your endeavour, it’s certainly an essential one.

It can be risky and even silly to assume that you already know the answers to these questions and then get caught out later on.

Here’s what you need to address at this stage:

Operational

  • Where will you set up your food cart business?
  • When will you open to ensure the best business?
  • How will the weather affect your trade?

Target Market

  • Who are your customers? What is their demographic?
  • Competition
  • Is there any competition? What do they offer?

Locations & Business Opportunities

Finding a couple of great locations will play a major factor in your success and it depends on several key factors:

  • Where you’re allowed to park by law
  • Where the customers are
  • The prime hours for each location

Some great places and opportunities to consider for trading are:

  • Office parks
  • The business district
  • Shopping districts or malls
  • Popular tourist locations
  • Sports venues
  • Parks and beaches
  • Bus and train stations
  • College campuses
  • Festivals and events
  • Conferences and conventions
  • Private events (weddings, birthdays, etc)
  • Corporate events

Most of these locations will require permits and/or owner agreements, so make sure to check with your local authorities & institutions beforehand.

When it comes to festivals, events, conferences and conventions the best thing to do is to get in touch with organizers and lease your space well in advance.

Determining Your Food Cart Business Legal Requirements

You’ve probably noticed that most How-To guides on this subject place sorting out the legal requirements at the bottom of their To-Do list.

And here’s why: the permits and licensing requirements for food cart businesses vary from country to country, state to state, and even city to city, so making a definitive list with everything you need is close to impossible.

Only your local Health Department can provide you with the information that applies in your case.

At this stage, you’ll address issues such as:

  • The street food vending regulations in your city
  • Licenses and permits required
  • The types of food you’ll be selling and how they’re handled, stored, thawed, and cooked
  • Commissary requirements (the requirement to operate from a licensed commercial kitchen)*
  • The size, make and the equipment of your street food vehicle
  • The vehicle’s fresh water and waste water holding capacity
  • Safe food handling course requirement
  • Hygiene policies
  • Pre-approval inspection of the equipment

* Most municipalities don’t allow food vendors to operate a food cart business from a residential kitchen and they require the use of a commissary – a licensed and inspected commercial kitchen.

Vendors have to report to the commissary each day of operation to prepare the food that will be served from the cart and to clean the vehicle’s equipment at the end of the day.

If you are selling prepackaged foods, you are not considered a food handler and may have less stringent requirements than if you are actually preparing foods or even scooping ice cream.

But as long as food is unwrapped, you are typically considered to be a food handler and must meet specific regulations.

While your cart or truck manufacturer will not know the nuances of each city’s requirements, they can usually help you meet specific health standards.

For example, all of our food carts are manufactured using food-grade materials for countertops and other parts/areas where food may be stored and prepared.

In addition, we work closely with each of our clients to adapt the carts’ cooking & water systems so they will meet all the health and safety standards specific to the vendor’s area.

Getting all the trading, health and safety qualifications in order will not only allow you to operate legally (and avoid hefty fines), but it will also help enforce the public’s hard earned perception that that those running a street food business are doing their utmost to meet and surpass sanitary requirements.

Basically, your legal status and reputation are on the line.

In addition to the food service permits and health requirements, you may also need to apply for:

  • Business license
  • State sales tax permit
  • Truck/cart registration

To sort these out, the city hall or the county clerk’s office will usually point you in the right direction.

Keep in mind that before you can hit the road, health inspectors will check your vehicle. Usually, they look for:

  • Proof of ownership, proper identification and license (of the vehicle)
  • Proof of District-issued Food Manager Identification Card
  • Food-purchase record storage and record keeping
  • That your depot, commissary or service support facility meets your vending unit operation needs
  • Copy of license for the service support facility and/or a recent inspection report

Food vehicles are typically inspected at least once a year by a health department inspector, sometimes randomly.

The inspector checks to see how food is stored so that it does not spoil and that it is kept at the proper temperature. All food equipment as well as sinks and water supplies are checked.

Commercial kitchens and garages in which food vehicles are kept are also inspected frequently and can be given high fines if they do not meet health and fire codes.

Some have been shut down because of too many violations. Likewise, trucks and carts have lost their licenses over repeated violations.

Editor’s Note: if you want to learn more about what it takes to launch a business, from a more general perspective, here’s a great resource to get you started: How To Start A Business: A Complete Playbook

Choosing Your Street Food Business Platform/Vehicle

Mobile street food businesses come in a variety of shapes and sizes, and deciding which is the right one for you depends on your:

  • Start-up budget
  • Time commitment
  • Vision and the ability to fulfill it
  • Experience at running a business
  • Target demographic

Your options are: food stands, food carts , concession trailers and food trucks. Each of them has its own unique benefits as well as some disadvantages:

Food Stands

Food stands are essentially booths or stalls that are either temporary or mobile, and are used to sell everything from quick snacks such as bagels, pretzels and ice cream, to more elaborate meals.

Most food stands are usually operated indoors and they are an excellent choice in areas where outdoor selling is limited by cold or unpleasant weather.

Pros: low start-up and running costs, flexibility. Cons:  limited trading areas, limited inventory.

Mobile Food Carts

Street food cart by Bizz On Wheels

Pros: affordable, easy to customize, easy to move between locations (they can be pulled by a bicycle/car or pushed by hand), easy to park, easy to maintain, suitable for both indoor and outdoor use, may require less licensing than a food truck. Cons: not too much space for preparing elaborate dishes.

Concession Trailers

Same as food carts, concession trailers have been around for a long time and are often found at fairs, carnivals and sporting events.

Pros: low overhead costs compared to food trucks, more space for cooking. Cons: more difficult to move between locations, require bigger parking space both on/off-duty, involve higher operating costs.

Food Trucks

street food truck

We believe food carts are the best choice, especially for first-time entrepreneurs. Their size, mobility and low running costs make them ideal for starting a profitable food cart business with the potential to grow and expand at a rapid pace.

Are Food Carts Profitable?

A food cart business can be very lucrative right from the start; however, this depends on many factors such as location, footfall, weather, product type etc.

According to our customers, if you can secure a good location for your business, you can expect between 100 to 400 customers per day (during weekends, festivals and public events), bringing in anywhere from $500 to $3,000 daily.

Choosing Your Concept, Menu & Suppliers

street food stall business plan in india

Whether they’re food carts , concession trailers or food trucks, most successful street food businesses out there have themes or concepts that are consistently reflected in all their elements: exterior design, branding, menus and recipes.

Your concept should be a means of distinguishing you from your competition and building your niche market. And, if you get it right, it can even draw media attention to your business.

This brings us to menu planning. Choosing what kind of food you’ll prepare and sell can be a fun task, and if you look at the carts, trailers and trucks operating on the streets, you’ll find that almost anything edible can be served as street food.

But there are a lot of factors to consider when it comes to menu planning, such as:

  • What foods do you know how to cook?
  • What foods do you enjoy cooking?
  • What are the most popular foods in your area?
  • What foods can you prepare relatively fast, repeatedly and without difficulty?
  • What foods could your customers take with them easily?
  • What foods have a good profit margin?
  • What times of day will you be open for business?
  • What are you going to specialize in?
  • How many items will your menu have?
  • Where are you going to get the ingredients from?

After deciding on the type of food you’re going to sell, it’s time to start working on recipes and experiment with various ingredients.

Once you’ve found a few favourites, test them on your friends and family first. Don’t be afraid or dismissive of criticism: it’s better to receive it from them.

The bottom line is, don’t start out with foods you have not thoroughly tested. This means you need to perfect each recipe to be sure it has the following qualities:

  • It tastes consistently good
  • It’s easy to make repeatedly in large quantities.
  • It’s easy to serve
  • It’s easy to store & carry

Next in line is figuring out your sourcing – where will you buy your ingredients from?

Sourcing your food can be an important factor in planning your purchases, schedule and menu items.

Common sources include wholesale food distributors, food manufacturers, local and regional suppliers, green markets and farmers markets.

Determining the right quantities is another matter that you’ll need to deal with, initially by trial and error. If you have the time, spend a couple of hours observing the street food vendors in your area. How many customers do they have per hour? When’s their busiest period? This will help you estimate a potential sales volume, which you can use to draft your shopping list.

Pay special attention to foods and ingredients that lose their freshness quickly; learn which are the items you can safely keep throughout the day and how many of them you can sell before they go bad.

Creating Your Food Cart Business Plan

Despite the low start-up costs involved, jumping in to street food without any kind of plan is a sure-fire recipe for disaster. The space is extremely competitive, and you need to have a very clear idea of the niche you plan to fill before taking the plunge.

Writing a business plan isn’t a complicated job and it doesn’t have to be very long. Keep it concise, to the point and ensure that you cover each of the following topics:

  • Your business’s name
  • Business management: who’s going to be in charge?
  • Your mission statement: in one sentence, summarize the aim of your street food business.
  • Your vehicle: are you going to use a stall, a cart, a trailer or a truck?
  • Start-up costs: what do you need to buy to get started? What fees to you need to pay in advance?
  • The daily operational costs: how much will you spend on ingredients and what are the overhead costs on a weekly or monthly basis?
  • Funding and financial projections; where do you plan to get the money from to start the business and what are your projected profits/losses for the next month, year, 2 years etc? How will you maintain the cash-flow?
  • Your schedule: will you work on the business full-time or alongside your day job?
  • What’s your main competition and how will you differentiate yourself from it?
  • What is your marketing strategy?
  • Do you have the logistics in place to deal with delivery and customer service?

If you plan to focus on events, your food cart business plan should include a clear targeting strategy. Pitch fees will vary widely, and there are a whole host of other variables to take into account including total attendance, other traders present, and the demographic of customer that will attend.

A good idea would be to create a spreadsheet with all the events and street food opportunities in your area. The amount of options available could seem daunting in the beginning, so start by thinking about what kind of event or environment you would expect to see a street food business similar to yours.

The next step would be to attend a few events yourself, taking note of the businesses that appear to be doing well and why.

As a general guide, generic fast-food businesses that focus on sales volume fare well at large music festivals and other events where the food is incidental to the main experience, whilst high-end street food traders perform better at events in which the customer will be searching for a new taste experience.

However, all the preparation in the world can’t account for the unexpected, and you will find some events simply fail to produce the expected revenue.

Your business plan should account for this, and you should always have enough spare cash in reserve to act as a safety net when you run up against the worst case scenario

Your approach to branding and marketing is a vital part of your business plan. A strong brand will help you stand out from the crowd, which is important for attracting customers as well as for securing spots at venues.

Remember: you are often selling a lifestyle with street food, so your brand should have a good slogan and a clear identity which reflects this.

Social media should obviously be central to your marketing plan and a strong Facebook and Instagram presence will help you raise your profile and create an army of online followers who you can spread your message to.

Regularly update your profiles with good quality photos as they generate a lot of interest and always display your social media handles so your customers /potential customers can connect with you

Estimating Costs: How Much Does It Cost to Start and Run a Food Cart Business?

There’s no set formula for determining how much starting a street food business is going to cost you since the niche is very broad and there are too many possibilities.

But even so, if you were to estimate, here’s a general expense breakdown:

Food Cart Business

  • $3,000 – $5000 on a fully equipped food cart
  • $500 – $700 on your ingredients & initial food stock,
  • $400 – $ 600 on permits and registrations,
  • $500 – upwards on marketing,
  • $500 for the first month to park and clean the cart
  • $500 in other miscellaneous costs

For comparison purposes, here are the estimates for a food truck business:

  • $50,000 – $75,000 on a retrofitted food truck
  • $1,000 – $1,500on initial ingredients
  • $2,000 on permits and licenses,
  • $2,000 for the first month of a commercial kitchen rental
  • $500 for the first month of parking and maintaining the truck
  • $1,800 on kitchen supplies
  • $3,000 on marketing and promotion
  • $2,000 on packaging
  • $500 in miscellaneous costs

Huge difference, right? Regardless of your choice, you need to do the math before spending any money so that you do not run out before you get started.

Final Words of Advice

Speaking with our customers about their businesses, we’ve learnt that a background in catering or hospitality isn’t necessary to succeed – indeed, a lot of successful food cart businesses were founded by people with no prior experience of serving food.

Their biggest allies? Great food, flexibility – the ability to pivot according to the market’s trends and demands, marketing – a well-thought strategy for promoting their business across multiple channels, and outstanding customer service.

Do you have any questions concerning our food carts ? Contact us and we’ll do our best to help you out!

Get a Food Cart Quote!

Invalid value

BUSINESS GUIDES

Mobile coffee bar for catering manufactured by Bizz On Wheels

WhatsApp us

Indian Retailer

  • Restaurant News
  • Brand X Collab
  • Food & Hospitality
  • Paid Reports
  • Unpaid Reports

Retail & Business

  • Consumer Trends
  • Retail Trends
  • Retail Meaning
  • What is Retail?
  • Retail Employees Day
  • Retail Business Ideas
  • Retail Stores Guide
  • Future Retail
  • Retail Glossary
  • Retail Acronyms
  • Happy New Year 2024

Tech & E-Commerce

  • Omni Channel
  • Digital Trends

Fashion & Beauty

  • Collaboration
  • Sustanability

D2C & New Commerce

  • Perspective
  • Brand X Brand

Facebook

  • Subscription

Magazine

SoulGappa, a Food Startup Revolutionizing the Billion-dollar Indian Street Food Market

Indian Retailer

The Quick Service Restaurant (QSR) market in India is estimated to be worth $35.5 billion. It is expected to grow at a CAGR of 18 percent during 2021 – 2025 (India Quick Service Restaurants Market Report, February 2020). 

About 10 million vendors in India make up a thriving street vendor market estimated to be at around Rs 8000 crore daily. A 2019 RedSeer Consulting report pegged that the unorganized, street food market contributes about $41 billion daily. The top concern for local street food remains hygiene and quality. And the pandemic further precipitated the need for more quality control hygiene as abstinence and cutting down on street food isn’t a practical solution in a food-loving country like India.

Gol gappas – one of the most popular Indian street foods and essential to many Indian regions and cultures – has now taken the spotlight. Soulgappa, a food startup is hyper-focused on innovation and R&D in Golgappas to overcome the various issues facing the popular food item. SoulGappa is the brainchild of Yukta Rajpal, a 23-year-old MBA student from Indore. The idea that emerged as part of her startup challenge at Masters’ Union School of Business, is slowly developing into her passion to (in her own words) ‘build a multi-million dollar Golgappa empire’.

Soulgappa

SoulGappa has been built on extensive research and a commitment to providing safe and hygienic street food options. Through diligent market research, Yukta discovered that there was a significant demand for a brand that could provide hygienic and varied golgappas to customers. With a local vendor every 1 km selling 200-500 plates of the popular street food every day, she saw an opportunity to bring a fresh perspective to the industry. By opening a chain of stores with hygiene as a core value, Soul Gappa aims to solve the safety concerns associated with street food and provide customers with a stress-free and enjoyable experience.

“ Traditionally, golgappas are hollow, crispy fried balls filled with a tangy and spicy mixture of potatoes, chickpeas, and chutney, topped off with refreshing and minty water. But SoulGappa intends to serve delicious, healthy, and innovative street food that is sure to appeal to all and would have regional flavors as Dilli wale Gol Gappe, Mumbai wale Pani Puri, Hyderabad wala Gupchup and Kolkata wala Puchhka, and fusion flavors as Pizza Soul Gappa, Spicy Guava Soul Gappa, Aam Panna Soul Gappa, and Kiwi Soul Gappa, ” said Yukta.

Yukta said, “ In a world where we are constantly bombarded by the latest technology and gadgets, it's easy to forget that some of the most successful businesses come from addressing the simplest of problems. I moved to Gurgaon to pursue MBA from Masters’ Union, and everything was going great until one day, I decided to indulge in some golgappas from a street vendor. Big mistake. I got sick and ended up unwell for days. The problem was the lack of hygiene. I noticed that while almost every other food had a national brand, golgappas were being overlooked. This realization led to Soul Gappa, a business dedicated to providing hygienic and innovative golgappas to the masses. After all, they're the ultimate street food, loved by everyone. ”

Yukta differentiates Soul Gappafrom the existing Indian street food brands such as Haldiram’s based on her niche and focus on innovation. While Haldiram’s has a wider range of products, including snacks, sweets, and ready-to-eat meals, SoulGappa takes the industry ahead with its hyper-focus on Golgappas and offers flavors such as Pizza Golgappa, Spicy Guava Soul Gappa, Aam Panna Soul Gappa, among others.

“ I began by perfecting my recipe in my hostel room and getting it tasted by my hostel mates. Their validation gave me the confidence to put up a Diwali stall in my college. After that, I had the chance to get the product tasted and validated by people such as podcaster Ranveer Allahbadia, Tanmay Bhatt, everyone's favorite Shark Aman Gupta and Pratham Mittal, the founder of Masters' Union. Their validation and direction gave me further confidence to make this college project into my own multi-million enterprise, ” said Yukta.

From having a pop-up store at Worldmark Gurgaon to gauge customer response and launching the first permanent outlet in Sector 56, GurgaonYukta is now busy solidifying her expansion plans. She focuses on expanding her retail footprint, and menu options and creating a solid and scalable supply chain to meet the anticipated customer demand. SoulGappa secured pre-seed funding from Masters’ Union as part of the college’s Venture Initiation Program (VIP).

  • Brand Launch
  • Business Strategies
  • retail india

Indina Retailer

Cantabil Retail India Ltd., a leading apparel manufacturer, has announced its financial performance for the quarter ending June 30, 2024, showcasing impressive growth figures. The company reported a revenue of Rs 127.9 crore, with Earnings Before Interest, Taxes, Depreciation, and Amortization (EBITDA) reaching Rs 39.4 crore and a net profit of Rs 11.4 crore for the period.

The company achieved a notable year-on-year (YoY) revenue growth of 14.4 percent, coupled with an EBITDA increase of 14.5 percent. However, the growth in profit after tax (PAT) was slightly lower, standing at 8.9 percent YoY.

As part of its strategic expansion, Cantabil added 11 new exclusive retail stores across various states during the quarter, elevating its total store count to 545 . This expansion is a key component of the company’s ongoing efforts to strengthen its market presence and increase its footprint across the country.

“ FY25 has started on a positive note with the Company delivering a double-digit volume growth of 18 percent in total and achieving a positive SSG (same store growth). This was achieved despite a lower wedding season demand and heat wave conditions specifically in north India impacting consumption. The above normal monsoon prediction and its progress so far are likely to translate into improvement in discretionary spending ,” stated Vijay Bansal, CMD, Cantabil Retail India Ltd.

Founded in 2000, Cantabil Retail India Ltd. specializes in designing, manufacturing, branding, and retailing apparel under the CANTABIL brand. The company has established a strong online presence, with its products available on major e-commerce platforms including Myntra, Ajio, Flipkart, Amazon, and its own website, Cantabilshop.com. This multi-channel approach continues to drive growth and expand the reach of Cantabil’s offerings in the competitive apparel market.

  • company revenue
  • Business Growth
  • Apparel brand
  • india retail

Retail India News: AC Makers Report Surging Revenues and Profits Amid Intense Summer Demand

Air conditioner manufacturers have recorded robust double-digit revenue growth, with several companies experiencing more than a two-fold increase in profits during the April-June quarter, driven by soaring demand due to the intense summer heat.

Leading companies like Voltas, Blue Star, Whirlpool of India, Johnson Controls-Hitachi, and Havells, which owns the Lloyd brand, have reported strong growth in both their top-line and bottom-line figures, thanks to record sales during the April-June period.

Tata Group's Voltas, a major player in the room air conditioner segment, reported a more than two-fold increase in consolidated net profit, reaching Rs 335 crore. The company's revenue from operations also saw a significant rise, increasing by 46.46 percent to Rs 4,921 crore.

Voltas highlighted that it achieved the "milestone" of selling one million units of air conditioners in the first quarter of FY25, with total income surpassing the Rs 5,000 crore mark during this period.

In the first quarter of the current financial year, Voltas’ revenue from "unitary cooling products for comfort and commercial use," which includes its room AC business, surged by 51.24 percent to Rs 3,802.17 crore. The company also reported a 67 percent increase in overall volume in the AC segment during the April-June period.

"The unitary cooling products business continued to outperform the market and maintained its growth momentum," the company stated, adding that "Voltas continues to be a market leader in both split and window air conditioners, with an exit market share of 21.2 percent as of June 2024."

Similarly, Blue Star reported a two-fold increase in consolidated net profit, amounting to Rs 168.76 crore, while its revenue from operations grew by 28.72 percent to Rs 2,865.37 crore in the June quarter.

The company's revenue from its unitary products business, which includes room air conditioner sales, rose by 44.3 percent to Rs 1,729.52 crore during the period.

"With most parts of the country witnessing extremely high temperatures and an overall harsh summer, the increase in demand led to unprecedented growth in the room air conditioners business," Blue Star stated.

The company also noted that demand during the quarter exceeded inventory plans, and while increased production met most of the excess requirements, some opportunities to cater to the entire demand were missed.

Havells also reported significant gains, with a profit of Rs 67.39 crore from its Lloyd business, which focuses on room air conditioners. This marks a sharp turnaround from the Rs 61.48 crore loss reported in the same period last year.

Revenue from the Lloyd business, a brand acquired by Havells in 2017, jumped by 47.43 percent to Rs 1,924 crore.

During an earnings call, Havells' management emphasized that the air conditioner business played a crucial role in driving growth, noting that many first-time buyers entered the market.

"We feel that this may trigger an inflection point for the under-penetrated AC industry," Havells management stated.

Whirlpool of India also reported a strong performance, with consolidated profit surging by 89.4 percent to Rs 145.3 crore, and revenue from operations increasing by 22.5 percent to Rs 2,496.9 crore.

The company attributed its revenue growth to the industry's expansion in refrigerators and air conditioners, as highlighted in its earnings statement.

Johnson Controls-Hitachi Air Conditioning India, which markets residential air conditioners under the Hitachi brand, reported a 76 percent growth in revenue, reaching Rs 982.29 crore in the June quarter from its "cooling products for comfort and commercial use" segment.

Earlier, Sunil Vachani, President of the Consumer Electronics and Appliances Manufacturers Association (CEAMA), had projected that annual sales volumes of room air conditioners would reach around 14 million units, reflecting the strong market demand during this period.

  • Air Conditioners
  • whirlpool AC's

Retail India News: Dyson Enters Ingredient Science with New Chitosan Styling Range

Dyson, known for its innovative approach to hair care, is expanding its presence in India’s retail beauty market with the launch of its first wet line styling products—the Dyson Chitosan formulations range. This new line, powered by chitosan, a macromolecule derived from oyster mushrooms, reflects Dyson’s commitment to ingredient science, following over a decade of investment in hair health.

The Dyson Chitosan range builds on the company's research into hair science, which has already fueled the development of Dyson’s well-known hair care devices. These new styling products are engineered to deliver high-performance results, offering flexible all-day hold with movement and shine, without the stiffness associated with traditional polymers. The formulations are designed to work seamlessly with Dyson’s hair tools, enhancing the longevity of the styles they create.

James Dyson, Founder and Chief Engineer said, “ While some other styling products use simple polymers that stick the strands of hair together like glue, Dyson’s formulas work differently. When used in Dyson Chitosan formulas, the complex macromolecule helps create flexible bonds that support hair strand by strand, for twice the hold, with movement and shine. ”

Dyson first entered the beauty industry eight years ago with the launch of the Dyson Supersonic hair dryer, which introduced a new standard in fast drying without extreme heat. The company later launched the Dyson Airwrap multi-styler, which pioneered a method to curl hair from wet while maintaining volume and bounce. Dyson has continued to innovate, adding features such as the scalp protect mode on the Dyson Supersonic Nural hair dryer and introducing entirely new tools like the Dyson Airstrait wet-to-dry straightener.

The new Chitosan range represents a significant step into ingredient research for Dyson. As one of Britain’s largest farmers with over 350,000 acres of working land, Dyson’s innovation in technology now extends to the world of nutritious ingredients, promising more developments in its beauty pipeline.

Kathleen Pierce, President of Dyson Beauty said, “ Dyson products have changed the way we style, forever. Working with the engineers now, it’s inspiring to see that they set no boundaries and leave no stone unturned when it comes to innovating solutions to our common problems. It’s what gets us up every morning. ”

Chitosan, the key ingredient in Dyson’s new range, is sourced from oyster mushrooms. This complex macromolecule, found in the cell walls of the mushroom, provides the flexibility and strength that characterizes Dyson’s Chitosan formulations. Justina Mejia Montane, Product Development Director of New Ventures at Dyson, noted, “ Each bottle harnesses the power of up to eight oyster mushrooms. ”

Dyson’s new Chitosan range, engineered with Dyson Triodetic technology, offers flexible all-day hold without the stickiness, brittleness, or crunch often found in other products. These formulations are designed to maintain soft, shiny, and smoother styles with less frizz, even in high humidity, marking Dyson’s continued commitment to advancing the retail beauty sector in India.

  • Product Launch

Retail India News: India's Textiles and Apparel Exports Surge by 4.73 Pc in July

India's textiles and apparel exports experienced a significant uptick in July 2024, with a 4.73 Percent increase, bringing the total to $2,937.56 million compared to the same month in the previous year, according to the Confederation of Indian Textile Industry (CITI). This growth is largely fueled by a surge in demand for Indian-made apparel in key global markets, reflecting the resilience and expanding reach of India's textile sector.

In July 2023, the combined exports of textiles and apparel were recorded at $2,805.01 million, showing a year-on-year improvement. While textile exports remained relatively steady at $1,660.36 million, almost unchanged from $1,663.06 million in July 2023, the apparel segment saw a substantial rise. Apparel exports grew by 11.84 percent, reaching $1,277.20 million, up from $1,141.95 million in the same month last year, indicating a robust demand for Indian garments on the international stage.

“This year has shown promising progress for India’s T&A exports, particularly when compared to last year. The growth in exports is largely attributed to the expanding share of Indian apparel in key markets such as the US, alongside increased exports to the European Union and the UK ,” said Rakesh Mehra, CITI Chairman.

Mehra further emphasized the industry's optimism regarding export orders in the coming months, highlighting the potential benefits of recently concluded Free Trade Agreements (FTAs) such as the India-Australia Economic Cooperation and Trade Agreement (ECTA) and the India-UAE Comprehensive Economic Partnership Agreement (CEPA).

“ These agreements are expected to provide additional momentum to our exports. The industry anticipates continued growth and is strategically positioning itself to capitalize on these opportunities, ensuring that India remains a key player in the global textiles and apparel market, ” he added.
  • fashion and lifestyle

Warburg Pincus Invests in Ebco to Expand India's Retail Hardware Industry

Ebco Private Limited has announced that Warburg Pincus, a global growth investor, has acquired a majority equity stake in the company. The founding promoters will retain a significant minority stake and continue to play an active role in the company's future growth.

Established in 1963 and headquartered in Mumbai, Ebco is one of India’s oldest and most reputable brands in the retail hardware sector. The company offers over 4,500 SKUs across various product categories, including bed and wardrobe fittings, kitchen systems, office furniture fittings, window and door hardware, and furniture lights. Ebco has built a strong retail presence in India, with more than 5,500 retail touchpoints nationwide. The company also operates three advanced manufacturing plants in Maharashtra, backed by robust R&D and design capabilities.

Geoffrey Nagpal, MD of Ebco said, “ Ebco’s leadership position today is a testament to its wide and high-quality product basket, deep manufacturing capabilities, and extensive distribution network. I have been fortunate enough to witness the Company’s transformation over the last 60 years alongside Ashley Nagpal, Rajesh Nair, and Nishant Nagpal, who have been pivotal in the journey of Ebco’s evolution into one of India’s most trusted brands in this space. The Company is at an exciting phase of growth, and we are thrilled to partner with Warburg Pincus at this stage. This partnership will enable the Company to capitalize on the strong industry growth prospects, deepen its presence in every part of the country, and grow as a manufacturing powerhouse supporting the Government’s ‘Make in India’ initiative. ”
Anish Saraf, MD of Warburg Pincus India said, “ We believe that the Indian furniture fittings and architectural hardware industry is poised for significant growth over the next several years, underpinned by tailwinds from favourable demographics fuelling real estate demand, rising furniture modularization, and increasing home renovations. Ebco has been a pioneer in this industry with its innovative, functional, and high-quality products. We are highly impressed with the Company’s journey so far and believe it is well-positioned to capitalize on these tailwinds. We look forward to partnering with Ebco as it embarks on its next phase of growth. ”

Ebco was advised by Avendus Capital, serving as the exclusive financial advisor for this transaction.

  • Capital Investment
  • collaboration

Swiss Military Reports Strong Q1 Financial Growth, Enhances Operational Capabilities

Swiss Military, a renowned global brand recognized for precision and quality, has announced substantial financial growth for Q1 FY 24-25, reflecting its strong position in the retail market in India. The company reported consolidated revenue of Rs 4638.86 lacs and a profit before tax of Rs 232.43 lacs, marking a significant increase compared to the same period in FY 23-24. On a standalone basis, Swiss Military recorded revenue of Rs 4532.22 lacs and a profit before tax of Rs 307.45 lacs for the quarter.

During Q1 FY 24-25, Swiss Military advanced its operational plans with the development of a state-of-the-art manufacturing facility focused on producing high-quality luggage. This new facility is equipped with advanced production technology and stringent quality control processes, designed to enhance customization capabilities and support scalability for future growth. This strategic investment is expected to drive innovation and provide greater value to customers and shareholders.

Anuj Sawhney, MD of Swiss Military said, “ We have had a steady start to FY25 with balanced performance, consolidating our position from a record year gone by. Our renovation and innovation offerings are rolling out progressively with an encouraging response. Our strategic initiatives are driving tangible results, and we remain on track to meet our annual goals. Looking ahead, we are excited about the opportunities to build on this momentum and continue delivering value for our shareholders. With a visionary approach and a dedicated team, we’re not just anticipating the future—we’re shaping it. Thank you for your continued support and confidence in our vision. We are thrilled to announce exceptional financial performance this quarter, reflecting the strength of our business model and the dedication of our team. Despite ongoing economic challenges, we have achieved impressive revenue growth and strong profitability. Our focus on operational excellence, cost management, and strategic investment positions us well for continued success. We are committed to navigating market dynamics with agility and delivering lasting value to our stakeholders. ”

Swiss Military operates debt-free, headquartered in New Delhi, India, and follows an asset-light operational strategy. The company collaborates with over 15 manufacturing partners and distributes through a network of 1,000 dealers, reaching customers through physical stores and over 15 e-commerce platforms across 180+ cities. The brand remains committed to innovation, sustainability, and delivering lasting value to its stakeholders, maintaining its esteemed legacy in the global market.

  • Swiss Military

Retail India News: Acer's New Laptop Now Comes with AI!

Acer has introduced its latest Chromebook Plus models, the Chromebook Plus 14 and Chromebook Plus 15, targeting the retail and education sectors in India. These new laptops are designed to meet the increasing demand for high-performance devices in professional and educational environments. With the integration of Google Gemini AI features, Acer aims to enhance users' productivity and efficiency.

The Chromebook Plus 14 has a 14-inch Full HD IPS display, offering options for Acer ComfyView LED-backlit TFT LCD or a multi-touch version. Meanwhile, the Chromebook Plus 15 features a 15.6-inch Full HD IPS display with ComfyView technology, available in both standard and high-brightness touch variants. Both models are equipped with Google apps and AI capabilities, including features like Google Photos Magic Eraser, AI-created video backgrounds, and Adobe Photoshop on the web, aimed at boosting productivity and creativity.

Powered by a variety of Intel and AMD processors, the Chromebook Plus models ensure reliable performance for multitasking and running demanding applications. The Chromebook Plus 14 is available with either an Intel Core i3-N305 processor or an AMD Ryzen 7000 Series Processor, while the Chromebook Plus 15 is powered by up to Intel 13th Gen Core i7-1355U processor. These laptops support up to 16GB LPDDR5X SDRAM and offer storage options up to 512 GB PCIe NVMe SSD, providing fast data access and sufficient space for essential files and applications.

Sudhir Goel, Chief Business Officer at Acer India said, " We are excited to launch the new Chromebook Plus laptops in India. These models represent our commitment to providing cutting-edge technology and reliable performance. With powerful Intel and AMD processors, vibrant displays, Powerful AI capabilities, and robust security features, we believe these Chromebooks will significantly enhance productivity and learning experiences. Our goal is to offer solutions that empower professionals and students to achieve more, and the Chromebook Plus 14 and 15 embody this vision perfectly. "

The Chromebook Plus models also feature dual DTS speakers, high-definition Full HD webcams, and AI-powered writing assistance. Connectivity options include the latest Wi-Fi 6E and Bluetooth 5.3, ensuring fast and stable connections. Additionally, all models come with built-in security features such as H1 Trusted Platform Module (TPM) solutions, camera shutters, and Kensington lock slots.

Designed for durability, these Chromebooks have undergone military-grade reliability tests, ensuring they can withstand various environmental conditions. The Chromebook Plus 14 offers up to 11 hours of battery life, while the Chromebook Plus 15 provides up to 10 hours, making them suitable for all-day use.

Acer’s latest launch aims to provide a comprehensive solution for professionals and students in India, combining robust performance with advanced features tailored to enhance productivity in the retail and education sectors.

Humanscale Introduces ‘Perfect Workstation’ in India to Meet Growing Demand for Ergonomic Solutions

New York-based Humanscale, a leading designer and manufacturer of ergonomic products, has launched its ‘Perfect Workstation’ in India, targeting the country’s growing demand for ergonomic office and home workstations. This move aligns with the retail and corporate sectors in India, where there is a rising focus on enhancing employee health and productivity.

The ‘Perfect Workstation’ from Humanscale features a combination of an H-Frame Linear Workstation, Height Adjustable Desk, Ergonomic Chair, Monitor Arm, Docking Station, and a Keyboard System. Known for its innovative approach to office ergonomics, Humanscale’s products are designed to adapt to users, enhancing comfort and supporting various work styles.

Humanscale’s range of ergonomic products is distributed in India through S Cube Ergonomics Private Limited (S Cube). S Cube operates exclusive showrooms and Ergonomics Experience Centres in Bengaluru, Hyderabad, and Pune, catering to the all-India market, particularly targeting architects, designers, building project managers, corporate heads, and MSMEs.

Sathish Nandagopal, Founder and Director at S Cube said, “ Humanscale’s ‘Perfect Workstation’ is fully displayed in our showrooms. The India launch aligns with the company's mission to enhance worker productivity and comfort by offering a complete range of ergonomic products. We invite guests to experience our ‘Perfect Workstation’ firsthand to understand the difference it can make in health and productivity. ”
Alastair Stubbs, Country Director India at Humanscale, emphasized the growing trend in India where companies prefer to procure complete workstations from a single supplier. He noted, “ With a bundled solution like the ‘Perfect Workstation,’ Humanscale can effectively cater to this market preference. Our approach ensures that all aspects of the workspace are designed to promote health, comfort, and productivity. ”

Mark Consolla, Vice President of Product Management at Humanscale, remarked on the company’s long-standing presence in India since 2009. He explained, “India’s rapid economic growth and expanding corporate sector have increased the demand for ergonomic office solutions. The India launch of the ‘Perfect Workstation’ allows Humanscale to diversify its product portfolio and solidify its position as a leader in ergonomic office solutions.”

In addition to the ‘Perfect Workstation,’ Humanscale announced the expansion of its ergonomic product range in India, introducing several innovative products such as the ‘Smart Conference Chair,’ designed for long meetings; the ‘Active Pony,’ aimed at promoting movement and better posture throughout the day; and the ‘Float Mini,’ a compact height-adjustable desk suitable for smaller workspaces.

These product launches reflect Humanscale’s commitment to providing holistic ergonomic solutions that meet the evolving needs of the Indian retail and corporate markets.

  • Expansion news

Allied Blenders and Distillers Reports Strong Profitability Growth in Q1FY25

Allied Blenders and Distillers Limited (ABDL), India's third-largest spirits company, has released its financial results for the first quarter of fiscal year 2025 (Q1FY25). Despite a challenging retail environment in India, the company reported a significant improvement in profitability, reflecting strategic brand decisions and cost-saving measures.

Financial Performance Overview:

  • Total Income: Rs 1,769 crore, up by 0.5 percent from Rs 1,760 crore in Q4FY24, but down 7.3 percent from Rs 1,909 crore in Q1FY24.
  • Income from Operations: Rs 759 crore, a decrease of 1.4 percent compared to Rs 770 crore in Q4FY24 and down 6.8 percent from Rs 815 crore in Q1FY24.
  • EBITDA: Rs 76 crore, showing a growth of 22.0 percent over Rs 62 crore in Q4FY24 and a 44.0 percent increase compared to Rs 53 crore in Q1FY24.
  • Profit After Tax (PAT): Rs 11 crore, a recovery from a loss of Rs 2 crore in Q4FY24 and Rs 3 crore in Q1FY24.
Alok Gupta, MD of ABDL said, " We delivered strong growth in profitability this quarter, driven by a strategic brand mix and cost-saving initiatives, despite facing short-term demand servicing challenges. With the successful IPO in July 2024 behind us, we are more confident in our ability to deliver sustained growth and enhance shareholder value creation. We remain dedicated to advancing excellence and achieving new accomplishments. ”

Performance Analysis:

ABDL's Q1FY25 Income from Operations stood at Rs 759 crore, a decline from previous quarters due to ongoing challenges with delayed receivables from a key market since the second half of FY24. This issue, which has affected the broader industry, impacted the company's short-term volume growth.

The company delivered 7.3 million cases in Q1FY25, reflecting a 2.7 percent increase from 7.1 million cases in Q4FY24 but an 11.8 percent decrease from 8.2 million cases in Q1FY24. However, premiumization efforts continued to gain traction, with the Prestige and Above segment increasing to 36.9 percent of volume in Q1FY25, up from 33.5 percent in Q1FY24. In terms of value, this segment grew to 46.1 percent in Q1FY25 from 43.2 percent in Q1FY24.

The company's EBITDA reached Rs 76 crore, driven by a focus on optimizing the state brand mix and cost control, marking a strong improvement over previous quarters.

Business Developments:

  • Zoya Premium Gin: Following a successful launch in Haryana, ABDL expanded its premium gin, Zoya, into Maharashtra, covering major markets such as Mumbai, Thane, Pune, Nashik, and Nagpur.
  • ICONiQ White Expansion: The world’s fastest-growing spirits brand of 2023, ICONiQ White, expanded into Madhya Pradesh, Meghalaya, and Chandigarh, bringing its presence to 17 states and union territories, with plans to be available pan-India by Q3FY25.

Global Rankings: According to The Millionaires’ Club Global Rankings 2024:

  • ICONiQ White is the fastest-growing spirits and whisky brand globally.
  • Officer’s Choice ranks as the 6th largest spirits brand and the 3rd largest whisky brand worldwide.
  • Sterling Reserve is the 36th largest spirits brand and the 14th largest whisky brand globally.

Following its successful IPO in July 2024, ABDL is well-positioned to meet demand and continue its growth trajectory in both the Indian and global retail markets.

Nykaa Increases Stake in Dot and Key to 90 Pc, Strengthens Retail Portfolio in India

Nykaa has announced an increase in its majority stake in Dot and Key, raising it from 51 percent to 90 percent. This strategic acquisition, valued at Rs 265 crore, underscores Nykaa's commitment to expanding its presence in India’s beauty and skincare retail sector.

Suyash and Anisha Saraf, the founders of Dot and Key, will continue to manage the business, retaining an ownership stake. Nykaa's deeper investment in Dot and Key highlights the brand's strong performance and long-term potential within Nykaa's growing portfolio of owned brands. Dot and Key, known for its fruit-based skincare products, has served over 5 million Indian customers with over 75 clinically tested formulations.

Since Nykaa’s initial investment in 2021, Dot and Key has seen substantial growth, achieving profitability by early 2023. The brand now operates at an annualized GMV run rate of over Rs 750 crore as of Q1 FY25, marking it as one of the leading success stories in the Indian beauty industry over the past decade.

Dot and Key’s success has been driven by its appeal to Millennials and Gen-Z consumers, with a focus on unique formulations and continuous innovation. The brand’s growth has been bolstered by Nykaa’s expertise in marketing and distribution, leading to a strong market presence.

Adwaita Nayar, Co-Founder of Nykaa and CEO of Nykaa Fashion and Beauty Brands said, “ We are thrilled to expand our partnership with Dot and Key. The Dot and Key success story is a testament to the collective strength of our partnership – driving excellence in unique formulations, constant innovation, energized marketing, and holistic distribution. Entering this new phase, we plan to continue to invest deeply in the brand – across people and processes. ”
Suyash Saraf, Co-Founder and CEO of Dot and Key added, “ Dot and Key has seen exponential growth over the last 2 years, and the Indian beauty scenario looks bright for us to continue the robust growth momentum. We are excited to harness the power of the strong online and offline distribution capabilities of Nykaa to expedite our growth journey. ”

This increased ownership in Dot and Key is expected to drive further synergies with Nykaa’s strengths, accelerating the brand’s growth in the competitive Indian beauty market.

  • acquisition deal

TELEFUNKEN Teams Up with Bradford to Revolutionize Retail in India

The heritage German consumer electronics and industrial goods brand, TELEFUNKEN, is excited to announce its strategic licensing representation partnership for the Indian market with Bradford License India, a premier licensing agency.

Built on a brand legacy of 120 years, and being part of the Gordon Brothers Group since2023, the brand is further poised to make a significant impact with  high-quality, user-friendly products across the global market. India’s Consumer Electronics Market was valued at $80.8 bn in 2024, and is expected to reach $149.1 bn by 2033, at a CAGR of 6.10 percent during the forecast period 2024 – 2033. It is therefore the correct time for TELEFUNKEN to plant its roots in the dynamic market.  

Bradford License India will act as TELEFUNKEN’s official licensing agency for expanding the brand in relevant product categories in India. Renowned for connecting global brands with lucrative opportunities in India, Bradford is responsible for identifying and securing suitable licensing partners for TELEFUNKEN in the Indian market. The partnership between the two esteemed leaders aims to leverage TELEFUNKEN’s rich history and Bradford’s market expertise to make its diverse product categories readily available to Indian consumers.

"Partnering with Bradford License India is a significant milestone for TELEFUNKEN as we expand into the Indian market. We believe this collaboration will help us to select strategic partnerships that are able to introduce cutting-edge products to a new audience throughout India, continuing our trademark’s legacy of innovation and quality," said Philippe Maugeais, Managing Director, TELEFUNKEN Licenses GmbH.

PR image

Bradford License India’s role is to ensure that the brand’s iconic German engineering ethos resonates with local partners and distribution channels, facilitating TELEFUNKEN’s licensing business expansion. This initiative is designed to introduce a wide range of products in the categories including consumer electronics, televisions, kitchen appliances, major domestic appliances, personal care devices, ironing equipment, small domestic appliances, e-mobility solutions, and lighting products, tailored to meet the diverse needs of Indian consumers.

"TELEFUNKEN's expansion into the Indian market marks a significant opportunity for us to bring a brand renowned for its technological excellence to local consumers. We are thrilled to facilitate this partnership and are confident that products under the brand TELEFUNKEN will be well received in India," said Mr. Gaurav Marya, Chairman, Bradford License India.

TELEFUNKEN’s historic brand image, serves as a unique selling point in the competitive Indian marketplace. They are now poised to replicate their global success in India, a market ripe with opportunities for innovation and growth. With Bradford License India as their official licensing agency , TELEFUNKEN aims to establish a strong foothold in the Indian market.

For more information,

Visit: www.bradfordlicenseindia.com or Follow us on: https://www.instagram.com/bradfordlicenseindia/

About Bradford License India

Bradford License India, in affiliation with Bradford Licensing LLC is a leading global licensing agency specializing in brand licensing, retail merchandising, and market expansion strategies. Since its inception in 2010, Bradford has stood as India's pioneering end-to-end licensing solution provider, strategically designed to elevate brand awareness and catalyze the growth of licensing across the nation. With a portfolio of prestigious brands across diverse sectors, Bradford License India leverages its expertise and industry insights to create successful licensing partnerships and drive brand growth in the Indian market.

About TELEFUNKEN Licenses GmbH

Since its creation in 1903, the TELEFUNKEN brand has stood for the basic principles of German engineering, namely high quality and innovation.  Today, the rights to the trademark are held by TELEFUNKEN Licenses GmbH, Frankfurt/Main, a group company of the Gordon Brothers Group that operates a successful international brand licensing business.  The globally active licensees of  TELEFUNKEN develop, produce, and distribute a wide range of products reflecting the traditional brand values in fields such as video, audio, IT and telecommunication, small & large household appliances, lighting, or e-mobility. For more information, visit www.telefunken.com

About Gordon Brothers

Since 1903, Gordon Brothers has maximized liquidity through realizable asset value by providing the people, expertise and capital to solve business challenges. Our firm’s integrated solutions across asset services, lending, financing and trading give clients the insights, strategies and time to optimize asset values throughout the business cycle. We work across the full spectrum of assets globally with deep expertise in retail, commercial, industrial, brands and real estate. We are headquartered in Boston with over 30 offices across five continents. For more information, visit www.gordonbrothers.com .

  • consumer electronics

{IPO Launch} India’s Baby Retail Titan FirstCry Goes Public with a Bang

FirstCry, the dominant omnichannel player in baby and maternity products retail, has taken a significant step forward by announcing its public listing, marking a major milestone in its 14-year history. The debut on the stock market was nothing short of spectacular, with FirstCry’s shares opening at a 40 percent premium, reflecting the company’s solid foundation and investor confidence.

A Stellar Market Debut

On a historic Tuesday, FirstCry’s shares, initially priced at ₹465, opened at ₹651 on the NSE and ₹625 on the BSE. This strong market debut not only highlighted the company’s robust growth trajectory but also underscored the trust it has built among its consumers and stakeholders over the years.

Supam Maheshwari, the visionary Founder and CEO, FirstCry, expressed his pride and gratitude on this momentous occasion. Reflecting on the company’s journey, Maheshwari said, "From the very beginning, our mission has been to serve millions of mothers with the best products and services. This public listing stands as a testament to the dedication and hard work of our entire team. Sudhir has been a trusted partner from the start, and he, along with Team Chiratae, has gone above and beyond in supporting us. I am deeply grateful to Sudhir and Chiratae for backing us early on and walking with us every step of the way, providing unwavering support throughout our journey."

A Journey of Vision and Resilience

FirstCry’s journey has been marked by significant milestones that set it apart in a competitive market. From vertical integration into manufacturing to its successful expansion into international markets, even amidst the challenges of the COVID-19 pandemic, FirstCry has showcased resilience and strategic acumen. These moves have not only solidified its market position but have also prepared the company for its next phase of growth.

At the listing ceremony, Anand Mahindra, Chairman of Mahindra & Mahindra, lauded the company’s achievements and the strategic foresight that led to its success. "I want to congratulate Supam, and your entire team that is here, and I want to express our gratitude for creating value for yourself and your team. I want to congratulate you and express my gratitude for creating immense value for Mahindra. And I want to thank you in particular for creating enormous value for this country."

Mahindra’s connection with FirstCry goes beyond a simple investment. It was part of an experimental strategy by Mahindra Partners, a division established in 2010 to incubate and nurture new-age companies. Mahindra’s investment in FirstCry was a calculated risk, a testament to the Group’s belief in the potential of emerging businesses. As Mahindra himself highlighted, "I'm here because of the story behind the stake, which was an experiment."

A Strategic Vision for Future Growth

The proceeds from the IPO are earmarked for significant expansion plans, which include enhancing FirstCry’s store presence under the BabyHug and FirstCry brands, as well as expanding into international markets. This strategy aligns with the company’s broader vision of tapping into a total addressable market of $120 billion, a figure Supam Maheshwari cited as part of the company’s future goals.

"We will now create stronger value in a much more accelerated environment," Maheshwari said, reflecting on the company’s ambitious plans for the future.

Chiratae Ventures: A Partnership Built on Trust and Success

For Chiratae Ventures, one of the early backers of FirstCry, the journey has been equally rewarding. The venture capital firm has been a steadfast supporter, evolving from early venture investors to growth investors, backing the company through every phase of its remarkable journey.

"Supam's founding vision has been the bedrock of FirstCry's triumph. His foresight, unwavering determination, and relentless pursuit of excellence have steered the company’s growth trajectory, transforming FirstCry into a household name synonymous with trust, innovation, and customer-centricity," said Sudhir Sethi, Founder and Chairman, Chiratae Ventures.

FirstCry is a unique entity within Chiratae’s portfolio, representing the only company in which both VC and Growth Funds have been invested for over 12 years. This long-term commitment underscores Chiratae’s deep belief in FirstCry’s potential and confidence in the leadership of Supam Maheshwari.

A New Chapter Begins

As FirstCry transitions into its new role as a publicly listed company, the road ahead appears promising. Chiratae Ventures, having been a part of this journey from the start, remains a proud and supportive partner. "We have no doubt that Supam and Team FirstCry will excel in this new chapter, just as they have throughout their journey," added Sethi. "They have built a company that India can truly be proud of, and we will continue to cheer them on."

FirstCry’s journey from a startup to a publicly listed company is a story of vision, resilience, and strategic growth. It’s a story that not only inspires but also sets a benchmark for what can be achieved with dedication, foresight, and unwavering support from partners who believe in your potential. As FirstCry embarks on this new chapter, it does so with the confidence of its accomplishments and the anticipation of what lies ahead.

Retail India News: KAI India Expands Manufacturing Capacity at Neemrana Plant

KAI India has announced a major expansion of its manufacturing operations at its Neemrana plant, aimed at significantly increasing its production capacity for women's razors. This move reflects KAI’s broader strategy to enhance its retail presence in India by boosting local manufacturing capabilities.

The expansion, set to be completed within five months and operational by December 2024, will increase production by over 5 million razors annually. The company plans to invest an additional 300 million yen to support this growth, demonstrating its commitment to enhancing its manufacturing infrastructure.

This development aligns with the “Make in India” initiative, supporting local manufacturing and contributing to economic growth by creating new job opportunities in the region. Rajesh U. Pandya, Managing Director of KAI India, emphasized, “ This is an important step for KAI India. Our enhanced manufacturing capacity is a testament to our commitment to providing high-quality products to our valued customers. We are deeply grateful to our local and international customers for their trust and support. This expansion also reflects our dedication to the 'Make in India' initiative, showcasing our resolve to manufacture, sell, and skill in India. ”

To ensure the integration of advanced technology and manufacturing practices, KAI has stationed eight technical engineers from its Japan operations at the Neemrana plant. Their expertise will help maintain the high standards of precision and quality associated with KAI products.

This expansion supports KAI India's strategic goals of growth and market presence, both domestically and internationally. The company's vision includes a focus on “Make in India,” “Sell in India and Overseas,” and “Skill in India,” as well as women empowerment. By expanding the Neemrana facility, KAI India reinforces its commitment to high-quality production within India and aims to enhance the local workforce's skills.

The rising demand for personal grooming products is driving this expansion, with KAI India poised to meet this demand efficiently. The company’s diverse product range, including kitchen equipment, personal care items, and shavers, is distributed through general trade, modern trade, and e-commerce channels, supported by an extensive network of over 50,000 touchpoints.

Since entering the Indian market in 2016, KAI has established a state-of-the-art manufacturing facility in Neemrana, Rajasthan, covering over 30,000 square meters. This facility plays a crucial role in the company's mission to become a leading name in India’s retail market, offering products that combine precision with exceptional value.

The Neemrana plant expansion is a significant step in KAI India’s growth trajectory, reflecting its commitment to continuous improvement and innovation in the retail sector.

Retail India News: Wholsum Foods Expands Reach with Integration into ONDC Network

Wholsum Foods, the parent company behind popular brands Slurrp Farm and Mille, has officially joined the Open Network for Digital Commerce (ONDC) Network. This strategic move represents a significant advancement in Wholsum Foods' mission to deliver healthy, tasty, and convenient food options to families across India.

Dedicated to the belief that wholesome eating should be an integral part of daily life, Wholsum Foods offers products without compromising on taste or convenience. Slurrp Farm, known for its range of child-friendly items, uses ancient grains and natural ingredients to create cereals, dosas, pancakes, noodles, and pasta. This ensures that parents can provide their children with both nutritious and delicious meals, fostering a positive relationship with food from an early age.

On the other hand, Mille caters to adults seeking gourmet-style nutrition that fits into a busy lifestyle. Mille’s product line offers a modern take on traditional nutrition, combining rich flavors with essential nutrients, thus helping adults maintain a balanced diet while enjoying their meals.

The integration into the ONDC Network will enhance the accessibility of Wholsum Foods’ products, especially in Tier II and rural markets where the demand for convenient, healthy food options is growing. Through this network, consumers will be able to find Slurrp Farm and Mille products across various shopping apps, making it easier to enjoy nutritious and convenient food options.

Meghana Narayan and Shauravi Malik, Co-Founders, Wholsum Foods commented , “ Our vision has always been to make nutritious food that everyone in the family can relish. By joining the ONDC Network, we’re able to bring our passion for tasty and healthy eating to more households, whether it’s through Slurrp Farm for children or Mille for adults. We’re excited to reach new customers across the country and make it easier for them to choose wholesome meals that fit their lifestyle .”
T Koshy, MD & CEO, ONDC said , “ We are pleased to have Wholsum Foods on board the ONDC Network. As they expand their reach, we are confident that this integration will make it easier for families across India to access high-quality, nutritious food. We look forward to supporting their journey as they bring their distinctive offerings to a broader audience .”

As ONDC Network continues to transform digital commerce in India, Wholsum Foods is poised to expand its market presence and solidify its leadership in the health food sector. This integration will ensure that Wholsum Foods' offerings are not only more accessible but also easier for consumers to discover, paving the way for healthier eating nationwide.

  • Healthy food

Retail India News: BBLUNT Celebrates Milestone with Rs. 100 Crore Revenue

BBLUNT, the innovative hair care brand from Honasa Consumer Ltd., renowned for bringing salon-quality experiences into homes, has announced a remarkable milestone: achieving an annual revenue rate of Rs. 100 crore and has experienced a fourfold growth since its acquisition. This achievement highlights Honasa Consumer’s prowess in nurturing and scaling new-age brands through strategic innovations, delivering exceptional haircare solutions across India.

Honasa Consumer’s data-driven and trend-focused innovation strategy has been pivotal in BBLUNT’s success. By leveraging data for product innovation and rapidly adapting to emerging trends, BBLUNT has solidified its position as a leader in the online hair styling market. The brand has addressed specific consumer needs with innovative hair care and styling products tailored to Indian hair types and conditions.

BBLUNT’s product lineup includes solutions for hair colors, shampoos, conditioners, styling products, and hair appliances. The brand's success is attributed to its unique product development process, which integrates insights from stylists, consumer feedback, and extensive salon testing. Honasa Consumer Ltd. has demonstrated its expertise in understanding millennial behavior and successfully launching brands that resonate with this demographic. Notable products include the Intense Moisture Heat Spa Mask, Intense Shine Hair Serum, Hot Shot Styling Range, and various hair appliances.

This growth is further evidenced by a sixfold increase in brand-related Google searches over the past two years, underscoring BBLUNT's dominant online presence in the styling space.

Varun Alagh, Co-Founder, Chairman & Chief Executive Officer, Honasa Consumer Limited, said , “ We are extremely thrilled with BBlunt’s achievement of reaching an Rs. 100 crore annual run rate and growing the brand 4x since the acquisition. From the outset, we were confident in the brand’s potential and knew that our strategic playbooks could drive its expansion. These playbooks have enabled us to broaden the brand's reach and scale it significantly. This milestone highlights our deep understanding of the Indian haircare market. We’ve developed products tailored to the specific needs of Indian consumers, tackling issues like hard water damage and pollution while delivering salon-quality experiences at home. Our success is rooted in a strategic approach that nurtures brands resonating with modern consumers who value both affordability and the freedom to experiment. As we continue to leverage data-driven insights and prioritize digital-first strategies, we remain committed to setting new benchmarks in the beauty and personal care industry."

In addition to its commercial success, BBLUNT is committed to social impact through its BBLUNT Shine Academy. This initiative aims to empower women by providing vocational training in hair styling, promoting skill development and financial independence. The Shine Academy offers a fully sponsored program that has already trained and certified over 10,000 women across 11 states in the ‘Foundation Course for Hair Styling,’ in collaboration with the Sambhav Foundation.

BBLUNT’s impressive growth reaffirms Honasa Consumer’s commitment to nurturing and scaling brands with a focus on consumer-centric strategies, setting new standards in the beauty and personal care sector.

  • Haircare brand
  • Revenue growth

India Introduces Diamond Imprest Licence to Support MSME Gem and Jewellery Exporters

At the 40th edition of the India International Jewellery Show (IIJS) 2024, held at the Bombay Exhibition Centre in Goregaon, Shri Piyush Goyal, Minister of Commerce and Industry, Government of India, announced the introduction of the Diamond Imprest Licence. This initiative is set to benefit MSME exporters, who represent a significant portion of India's gem and jewellery retail sector, strengthening India's position in the global market.

The Diamond Imprest Licence allows Indian diamond exporters, meeting a specified export turnover threshold, to import a minimum of 5% of their average export turnover from the preceding three years. This policy aims to create a level playing field for smaller exporters in India’s gem and jewellery industry and prevent the outflow of investment by Indian diamantaires to foreign diamond mining hubs. Additionally, it is expected to generate more employment opportunities in diamond assorting and processing within India.

Addressing the audience, Shri Goyal also discussed plans to expand the exhibition space for future IIJS events, acknowledging the current shortage faced by exhibitors. He emphasized the Union Budget’s reduction in duty rates for gold, silver, and platinum, aimed at bolstering the gem and jewellery industry and job creation in India. 

" Gold and jewellery will increasingly come through official channels, leading to more job orders for our workforce. India’s domestic market is resilient and growing rapidly, which will offset the loss in exports due to the global recession. I encourage gem and jewellery exporters to maintain a positive outlook, ” Shri Goyal said.

He also highlighted ongoing negotiations with the G7 and the European Union on issues like transparency, data protection, and costs, marking India’s strong negotiating position. Additionally, Shri Goyal mentioned potential plans for establishing a diamond center in Mumbai or Surat, similar to Antwerp, and ongoing discussions with De Beers regarding the Kimberley Process to ensure diamond traceability.

Regarding Free Trade Agreements (FTAs), Shri Goyal noted that the government follows a consultative process, emphasizing the need for a fair and balanced approach. He cited the India-Australia FTA, which eliminated double taxation for the Indian IT sector, and Europe’s EFTA, which promises $100 billion in investments and 1 million jobs for India.

" Indian exporters need to focus on value addition due to the recession in developed countries. The global market is not looking for high-cost products but values intricate craftsmanship and bespoke jewellery, " Shri Goyal added.

GJEPC Chairman, Vipul Shah, praised Shri Goyal’s leadership in securing FTAs like India-UAE CEPA and India-Australia ECTA, which have significantly boosted gem and jewellery exports. He expressed optimism for the signing of future FTAs with the UK, EU, and Canada under Shri Goyal's leadership, which would further enhance India's export potential.

IIJS Premiere 2024, showcasing the "Brilliant Bharat" theme, runs from 8-12 August at JIO World Convention Centre, Mumbai, and from 9-13 August at the Bombay Exhibition Centre, NESCO Goregaon, Mumbai. The event features over 3,600 stalls, 2,100 exhibitors, and is expected to attract more than 50,000 buyers from India and over 2,000 buyers from 60 countries. This year, IIJS welcomes 15 international delegations from 13 countries, highlighting its global impact.

Shah concluded, " IIJS plays a vital role in positioning India as a major player in the global gem and jewellery market, contributing to the vision of a prosperous and self-reliant India by 2047. "
  • Diamond business

Hy-Vee Expands India Operations with New Bengaluru Office

Hy-Vee, Inc., a prominent retail grocery conglomerate based in West Des Moines, Iowa, has announced the expansion of its operations in India with a move to a new office in Bangalore. This relocation is part of the company's broader strategy to enhance its retail business and strengthen its presence in India. With over 550 retail units across the United States and annual sales nearing $14 billion, Hy-Vee is leveraging India's talent pool to support a range of technical and non-technical roles, ensuring continuous project development around the clock.

The new 54,000-square-foot facility, located in Karle Tech Park on the Outer Ring Road, comes under a 10-year lease and is designed to drive innovation and operational efficiency. This move follows the establishment of Hy-Vee's Global Capability Center (GCC) in April 2023 at Manyata Tech Park, which spans approximately 25,000 square feet. The new office, situated in a Special Economic Zone (SEZ) that houses multiple GCCs, represents a significant expansion. The center's IT teams, covering Data, Digital, and Core IT products and services, alongside non-IT teams in store development and accounting, are set to benefit from the increased space and resources.

Currently, Hy-Vee's technology arm, Helpful Smiles Technology (HST) Global, employs around 200 people. The new office is equipped to accommodate up to 350 employees and features a garden city theme, 17 meeting rooms, collaboration spaces, and phone pods. A standout feature is the Lalbagh-themed glasshouse, providing a unique and motivating environment for the team.

The new office was inaugurated by Travis Hoover, Chief Data Officer at Hy-Vee said, " We are excited to see the HST Global team's growth over the last year and a half and look forward to this new space supporting them as they continue to help move Hy-Vee forward as a retail leader. "

The office launch also included a community engagement event with children from the Cholanayakanhalli Government School, a group that Hy-Vee has supported over the past year, adding a meaningful element to the celebration.

Retail India News: Kay Beauty's Hydra Crème Lipsticks Break Sales Records in Debut Launch

Kay Beauty, the acclaimed beauty brand co-founded by Katrina Kaif in collaboration with Nykaa, has announced the exceptional success of its newest launch: the Hydra Crème Lipsticks. Since their debut, these lipsticks have been flying off the virtual shelves, with one unit sold every minute on Nykaa’s platforms. This remarkable demand highlights the product's appeal and signifies a new milestone in the brand's evolution within the beauty industry.

The Hydra Crème Lipstick range, known for its luxurious hydration and vibrant color payoff, has particularly stood out with its top-selling shade, ‘Panache’. This shade has quickly gone viral, resulting in an immediate sell-out both online and in stores on the very first day of launch.

Customer feedback has been overwhelmingly positive, with 92 percent of reviews rating the product at 4 or 5 stars. The success of the Hydra Crème Lipsticks underscores Kay Beauty’s dedication to high-quality, trend-setting formulations. The lipsticks address the common discomfort associated with matte formulas by offering a shine-enhancing, hydrating alternative. Enriched with Hyaluronic Acid and antioxidant-rich Lychee Extracts, the Hydra Crème Lipsticks deliver long-lasting moisture and a rich, intense pigment that provides a luminous finish.

Katrina Kaif, Co-founder, Kay Beauty expressed , “ I am thrilled for the response we have received on our Hydra Cremè Lipsticks. This product has been in the works for over 1.5 years, as I wanted to perfect a hydrating formula that delivers rich, luxurious color and exceptional performance. The fact that we sold out within a day of the launch speaks volumes about the love and appreciation from our consumers and for that, I will always be grateful .”

The brand’s comprehensive marketing strategy has significantly contributed to the Hydra Crème Lipstick’s buzz, including a viral social media campaign featuring Vicky Kaushal and Katrina Kaif. T he campaign, which aligns with the brand’s motto #ItsKayToBeYou, has garnered over 15 million views within a day across various digital platforms.

Adwaita Nayar, Co-founder, Nykaa commented , “ Kay Beauty’s unwavering dedication to high-performance makeup of the utmost quality that aligns with evolving consumer needs has solidified our trust with beauty enthusiasts all over the country. The response from our community has been overwhelming and we are thrilled with the results of this launch. Our much-loved Hydra Creme lipsticks have been meticulously designed in Italy to deliver exceptional color intensity, and hydrate lips with powerful ingredients and are available in a diverse range of shades designed to suit Indian skin tones. This collection exemplifies our commitment to both innovation and unparalleled quality in the beauty industry.”

With its focus on inclusivity and diversity, Kay Beauty is on track to achieve a GMV run rate of Rs. 2 billion for FY 24-25. The Hydra Crème Lipstick launch marks a significant achievement, breaking sales records and reaffirming the brand’s leadership in the beauty sector with products that truly resonate with consumers.

The Kay Beauty Hydra Crème Lipsticks are available exclusively on the Nykaa website/app, in over 150 Nykaa stores, and select beauty retail outlets across India.

  • Beauty and Cosmetics
  • Katrina Kaif

Retail India News: VAHDAM India Welcomes Akanksha Srivastava Byrnes as New Senior VP of Marketing

VAHDAM India, a leading global wellness brand renowned for bringing India's finest teas and spices to the world, has announced the appointment of Akanksha Srivastava Byrnes as the Senior Vice President of Marketing. Based in New York, Akanksha will play a pivotal role in driving the company's brand-building efforts, global marketing strategies, and growth initiatives as VAHDAM India embarks on its next phase of expansion.

Akanksha brings over 12 years of extensive experience in global and regional marketing, having held key roles in innovation, activation, and performance for renowned brands under major CPG conglomerates, including MARS (with Tasty Bite), PIM Brands (with Sun-Maid Chocolate Raisins, Welch’s Fruit Snacks), and Godiva Chocolates. Her expertise in the US and international markets is expected to be instrumental as VAHDAM India continues to solidify its presence in the global wellness market.

Bala Sarda, Founder and CEO, VAHDAM India said , “ As VAHDAM India continues to strengthen its position in the global market, Akanksha’s expertise in the US and international markets will be invaluable. She has a proven track record in working with global teams that can adapt to the ever-changing marketing landscape. Akanksha’s leadership will help us connect with consumers and enhance our brand relevance even further .”

Akanksha Srivastava Byrnes holds a Master of Business Administration from Yale School of Management.

Akansha commented on her appointment, “ I am honored to join VAHDAM India at this pivotal moment in the thriving global wellness market. Our exceptional portfolio of products and loyalty from our customers worldwide provide a robust foundation for growth. I am excited to collaborate with Bala and the talented team to not only expand our reach but also to innovate and excel in delivering wellness solutions. Together, we will explore new avenues and harness our strengths to unlock the full potential of the brand, bringing the best of VAHDAM India to even more wellness enthusiasts around the world.”

This appointment comes at a significant time for VAHDAM India, as the brand recently launched its range of wellness teas and spices at Walmart, the world’s largest retailer, expanding its reach across the United States.

  • New Appointment

Retail India News: KIKO Milano Launches on Tira as Reliance Retail Expands Beauty Portfolio

Reliance Retail, led by Mukesh Ambani and Isha Ambani, has solidified its position in the Indian beauty sector through the strategic acquisition of KIKO Milano, a prominent Italian cosmetics brand. This move marks a significant expansion in Reliance Retail's beauty offerings, aligning with its mission to bring international beauty standards to the Indian market.

" As part of Reliance Retail's strategic expansion in the beauty sector, the acquisition of KIKO Milano earlier this year has brought Italy's most beloved cosmetics brands to Indian shores, " the company stated in a press release.

KIKO Milano, renowned for its innovative beauty solutions and high-pigment products, previously operated in India via a joint venture between Italy's Percassi Group and New Delhi-based DLF Brands Ltd. Now wholly integrated into Reliance Retail, KIKO Milano offers approximately 1,200 makeup, skincare, and accessory products.

The brand has made its exclusive online debut on Tira.com, Reliance Retail's premium beauty platform launched last year. This strategic online launch is complemented by the availability of KIKO Milano products at exclusive brand stores in six cities, including Delhi, Mumbai, Pune, and Lucknow. These physical outlets provide consumers the opportunity to experience the full range of KIKO Milano products firsthand.

KIKO Milano's philosophy of " democratizing high-quality beauty " resonates with Tira's mission of empowering individuals through accessible luxury. By offering a diverse range of products—from bold lipsticks and vibrant eyeshadows to effective skincare and essential beauty accessories—KIKO Milano enables beauty enthusiasts to explore their creativity and express their unique styles.

The integration of KIKO Milano into Reliance Retail's portfolio enhances its presence in the premium beauty segment, positioning it alongside ventures like Blushlace, which focuses on tier ll and lll cities with value-focused beauty and innerwear products. This strategic acquisition and launch underscore the growing appeal of the Indian market for global beauty brands and reflect Reliance Retail's ambition to lead the beauty industry by making global standards of beauty accessible to everyone.

This partnership is more than a product launch; it's a strategic collaboration aimed at reshaping how beauty is perceived and experienced in India. As KIKO Milano expands its footprint, it is poised to become a go-to brand for beauty enthusiasts seeking high-quality, affordable products.

  • Reliance Retail

Retail India News: DOMS Industries Reports Robust Growth in Q1 FY25 Financial Results

DOMS Industries Limited, a leading Indian stationery and art materials company, has reported its financial results for the first quarter of FY25, ending June 30, 2024. The company showcased impressive year-on-year and quarter-on-quarter growth, underscoring its strong market position and effective strategic initiatives.

For Q1 FY25, DOMS Industries achieved a revenue of Rs. 445.0 crores, reflecting a 17.3 percent increase from Rs. 379.4 crores in Q1 FY24 and a 10.2 percent rise from Rs. 403.7 crores in Q4 FY24. The company's gross profit reached Rs. 191.8 crores, with a margin of 43.1 percent, up from 38.4 percent in the previous year. EBITDA also saw substantial growth, rising by 38.9 percent year-on-year to Rs.86.4 crores, with the EBITDA margin improving to 19.4 percent. Additionally, the profit after tax (PAT) for the quarter grew by 49.5 percent to Rs. 54.3 crores, with the PAT margin increasing to 12.2 percent from 9.6 percent in Q1 FY24.

Santosh Raveshia, Managing Director, DOMS Industries Limited expressed , “ The start to the financial year 2025 has been positive, despite the challenges on account of extreme weather conditions, especially in North India during the quarter ended June 30, 2024. We continue to see momentum in sales growth and improvement in our margin profile reflecting our unwavering commitment to delivering exceptional value to our targeted consumers. Our brand's growing acceptance in the market is due to its inherent advantages spanning across innovation, design, product engineering and market engagement, ensuring that we remain ahead of the curve despite competition and evolving consumer preferences. We continue to focus on further enhancing our integration across our robust manufacturing infrastructure and designing capabilities. Along with our manufacturing prowess, we continue to prioritize strengthening our reach in the Indian markets as well as globally with focused distribution network expansion .”
He further added , “ In a move to accelerate growth and solidify our position for the future, we continue to pursue inorganic opportunities with a view to widen our targetable addressable market and to expand our presence in the product lines which are associated through the growing year of kids, children, and young adults. Our proposed acquisition of a majority stake in Unilcan Healthcare Private Limited, a company engaged in the manufacturing and marketing of baby diapers & wet wipes is our first step in broadening our addressable market. With a strong foundation laid out and with the guiding principles aimed towards sustainable growth, we are confident that our strategic initiatives in terms of product and capacity expansion and dedication to excellence will continue to propel us forward .”

DOMS Industries' robust financial performance and strategic growth plans underscore its commitment to maintaining its leadership position in the stationery and art materials industry.

  • Financial Results
  • Annual Profit

Retail India News: White Hanger Opens Shop at Omaxe Chowk

Omaxe Chowk, a leading retail destination in Chandni Chowk, Delhi, has further expanded its portfolio with the launch of White Hanger, a well-known clothing store specializing in party and wedding attire. The store spans 20,000 sq. ft. across the ground and first floors, offering a wide range of elegant clothing options for all ages and sizes. 

White Hanger recently gained attention when Bollywood actor Tiger Shroff wore its designs at the Ambani Wedding, reinforcing its reputation for high-end fashion. The addition of White Hanger to Omaxe Chowk’s retail lineup marks a significant expansion, enhancing the location's appeal as a prime shopping hub in India.

In recent months, Omaxe Chowk has also welcomed other prominent retailers, including Tanishq, a leading jewellery brand, and Ghoomar Restaurant, known for its authentic Rajasthani cuisine. These new stores reflect Omaxe Chowk’s ongoing commitment to providing a diverse and premium shopping experience for its visitors in India.

The launch of the White Hanger store, along with other key additions, continues to position Omaxe Chowk as a top retail destination, offering shoppers a curated selection of fashion, jewellery, and dining options.

  • Store launch

[Funding Alert] Zepto's Valuation Surges to $5 Bn Following $310 Mn Fundraise

Zepto is set to raise an additional $310 million, bringing the company's valuation to $5 billion, a significant 40 percent increase from its last funding round, which closed just over a month ago. This round will push the total funds raised by the three-year-old firm to nearly $1 billion over two consecutive funding rounds.

In late June, Zepto secured $665 million from a group of investors, more than doubling its valuation to $3.6 billion from $1.4 billion in August last year. This rapid increase in valuation is attributed to the rising demand for quick-commerce services across India.

The latest funding round will include participation from Mars Growth Capital, co-run by Mitsubishi UFJ Financial Group Inc. and Israel’s Liquidity Group, alongside US-based General Catalyst and other existing investors. Mars Growth Capital is expected to invest approximately $50 million, with General Catalyst contributing around $200 million. The total size of this round could reach $350 million, with additional funds coming from existing investors and other participants.

As per the terms of the funding, Zepto cannot raise more than $350 million within 90 days of the previous round to protect existing investors from stake dilution. Once this round is completed, Zepto's total fundraising will stand at $1.5 billion, led by its founders, Aadit Palicha and Kaivalya Vohra.

Zepto, domiciled in Singapore, plans to relocate to India with an initial public offering (IPO) in sight. The company is focusing on expanding its store network and product assortment in the competitive quick-commerce market, taking on larger rivals like Blinkit, Swiggy Instamart, and Flipkart Minutes. Zepto aims to set up 700 dark stores by March 2025, each with an expanded product range of 10,000 SKUs.

The quick-commerce sector in India continues to witness significant growth, with companies diversifying into new categories such as electronics, beauty, personal care, and more, challenging traditional e-commerce giants like Flipkart and Amazon.

  • Funding Round

Retail India News: Varun Dhawan Becomes the Face of Walkaroo

Walkaroo, India’s one of leading footwear brand has announced Bollywood actor Varun Dhawan as its new brand ambassador and is set to launch an ambitious integrated marketing campaign to highlight its extensive range of products. This development marks a significant step in Walkaroo’s strategy to enhance its brand presence and connect more effectively with consumers across India.

The decision to appoint Dhawan as the face of Walkaroo aims to strengthen the brand's appeal among younger and fashion-conscious audiences. Dhawan’s dynamic personality and modern style are expected to resonate with the younger generation, reinforcing Walkaroo’s commitment to staying relevant in a competitive market.

“We are very happy to have Varun Dhawan join us in our commitment towards promoting a healthier and active lifestyle through walking. His youthful energy and stylish persona resonate perfectly with our brand image,” said V Noushad, Managing Director, Walkaroo International Pvt Ltd.
“This brand resonates with individuals across all age groups and is a renowned household name. With its campaign, ‘Walk, Walk, Walk; Walk with Walkaroo’, the brand encourages people to adopt walking as a simple remedy to stay active and healthy,” Dhawan commented on his appointment.

In the fiscal year 2023-24, Walkaroo reported a remarkable turnover of Rs 2,140 crore. The company has built a robust distribution network with 700 dealers and over 100,000 retail outlets across India, showcasing its extensive market reach and operational strength. This new partnership with Dhawan is expected to further bolster Walkaroo’s market presence and drive continued growth.

  • Footwear brand
  • Varun Dhawan

Retail India News: Honasa Consumer’s Q1 Profit Surges 63 Pc to Rs 40.25 Cr; Sales Rise 19 Pc to Rs 554 Cr

Honasa Consumer Ltd, renowned for its popular FMCG brands such as Mamaearth and The Derma Co, has reported a robust financial performance for the first quarter of the fiscal year ending June 2024. According to a regulatory filing released on Friday, the company h as achieved a significant 62.9 percent increase in its consolidated profit after tax (PAT), which now stands at Rs 40.25 crore. This marks a substantial improvement from the PAT of Rs 24.71 crore reported in the same quarter of the previous fiscal year, highlighting a strong upward trend in profitability.

In addition to the impressive growth in PAT, Honasa Consumer also demonstrated a notable increase in revenue. For the quarter ending June 2024, the company’s revenue from operations grew by 19.28 percent, reaching Rs 554.05 crore. This increase is substantial compared to the revenue of Rs 464.48 crore recorded during the same period last year. This revenue growth underscores the company's effective market strategies and the growing popularity of its brands, contributing to its overall financial success.

Despite these positive financial indicators, the company’s total expenses for the quarter saw an increase as well. The total expenses rose by 17.42 percent, reaching Rs 520.38 crore. This rise in expenses reflects the company's ongoing investment in its operations and expansion strategies, which are essential for sustaining growth and enhancing market presence.

Moreover, Honasa Consumer’s total income for the June quarter witnessed a 20 percent increase, amounting to Rs 572.77 crore. This growth in total income further reinforces the company's strong financial performance and its ability to effectively manage its revenue streams despite rising costs.

On the stock market front, however, Honasa Consumer’s shares experienced a decline. On Friday, the company's stock closed at Rs 473.60 on the Bombay Stock Exchange (BSE), marking a decrease of 4.58 percent from the previous day’s closing price. This drop in share price, despite the positive financial results, reflects broader market trends and investor sentiment that may be influencing the company's stock performance.

  • FMCG brands

Retail India News: FirstCry Parent Brainbees IPO Oversubscribed by 12.22x on Final Day

The initial public offering (IPO) of Brainbees Solutions, the parent company of e-commerce platform FirstCry, was oversubscribed 12.22 times on the final day of bidding, Thursday.

The IPO, which aimed to raise Rs 4,194 crore, received bids for 60,64,29,472 shares against the 4,96,39,004 shares available, according to data from the NSE.

The portion reserved for Qualified Institutional Buyers (QIBs) was subscribed 19.30 times, while the non-institutional investors' quota saw a 4.68 times subscription. Retail Individual Investors (RIIs) subscribed 2.31 times the shares allocated to them.

Earlier on Monday, Brainbees Solutions announced that it had secured Rs 1,886 crore from anchor investors.

The IPO was offered at a price band of Rs 440-465 per share.

The public issue of the Pune-based Brainbees Solutions includes a fresh equity share issue worth Rs 1,666 crore and an offer for sale (OFS) component of up to 5.44 crore shares, valued at Rs 2,528 crore, by existing shareholders, bringing the total issue size to Rs 4,194 crore.

Under the OFS, SVF Frog, a Cayman Islands-based entity of Softbank, sold 2.03 crore equity shares of Brainbees Solutions, while Mahindra & Mahindra (M&M) offloaded 28.06 lakh shares.

In addition to Softbank and M&M, other shareholders participating in the OFS include PI Opportunities Fund, TPG, NewQuest Asia Investments, Apricot Investments, and Schroders Capital. Veteran industrialist Ratan Tata is also among the individual shareholders selling shares.

The net proceeds from the fresh issue will be utilized for establishing stores under the ‘BabyHug’ brand, investing in subsidiaries, expanding overseas, and supporting sales and marketing efforts. A portion will also be allocated for general corporate purposes.

Brokerages estimate that the company’s market capitalization post-issue will be around Rs 24,142 crore.

Founded in 2010, FirstCry has grown into India’s largest multi-channel, multi-brand retail platform for mothers’, babies’, and kids’ products, providing a comprehensive solution for parenting needs. The company expanded its presence to the UAE in 2019 and Saudi Arabia in 2022.

Kotak Mahindra Capital Company, Morgan Stanley India Company, BofA Securities India, JM Financial, and Avendus Capital are the book-running lead managers for the issue.

Retail India News: Heads Up For Tails Launches 'Hearty': A Revolutionary Dry Pet Food Line

In response to the rapidly growing demand for high-quality pet food in India, Heads Up For Tails (HUFT), a renowned brand in the pet care industry, has launched "Hearty," an innovative dry food product poised to capture a significant share of the $800 million Indian pet nutrition market. This launch marks HUFT's ambitious move to revolutionize pet nutrition and secure its position as a category leader in the expanding market.

With the Indian pet food market projected to reach between $1.8 billion and $2 billion by 2030, reflecting a Compound Annual Growth Rate (CAGR) of 10.5 percent, the introduction of Hearty is timely. The product's launch aligns with a broader trend of increasing awareness among Indian pet parents about the importance of health and nutrition for their pets. Hearty's introduction is expected to tap into this growing demand, particularly in metropolitan Tier I and Tier II cities where pet ownership is on the rise.

HUFT has strategically positioned Hearty as a premium product, yet priced it competitively to expand its market reach. The brand's growth trajectory is already impressive, having expanded nearly 2.5 times faster than the market in the last fiscal year. HUFT aims to capture a 10 percent share of the Indian pet food market by FY25, with a target to become a Rs. 500 crore brand within the first three years of Hearty's launch.

The Hearty line is distinguished by its incorporation of Indian super herbs such as Ashwagandha, Tulsi, Moringa, Giloy, and Turmeric, known for their health benefits. This unique blend, along with a high content of real meat (60 percent) and fresh ingredients (up to 40 percent), sets Hearty apart from other products in the market, which often rely on by-products and contain less than 10 percent fresh content. The formula focuses on four key components essential for canine health: premium proteins and Omega fatty acids, fiber from high-quality vegetables and grains, and a diverse blend of vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants.

Samarth Narang, CEO, HUFT stated , “ The pet food market in India is growing at a CAGR of 10.5 percent every year. Currently, it stands at 800 million Dollars. This has been largely dominated by age-old foreign brands and at Heads Up For Tails we realised the need to have an Indian brand that can be a market disruptor in a large sense. It took us many years to perfect the hearty recipe. Prioritizing health and nutrition for pets Heads Up For Tails aims to capture 10 percent share of the Indian market by FY25. There haven't been any major innovations in the past decade in the Dry food industry and we feel there is a greater need to change that. With Hearty, Heads Up For Tails has manufactured the machinery to change the way how kibble has been made over the past many decades. This allows us to deliver a much better product that does not compromise on quality and also since it is manufactured and packed in India, it helps us deliver the freshest batch to the end customer. Heads Up For Tails aims to be a 500 CR brand in the first 3 years of its launch. ”
Rashi Narang, Founder, HUFT added , “ India has been experiencing double-digit growth year after year with increasing demand for affordable yet specialized pet food products. Hearty is not just another dry food brand; it represents our pledge to provide pets with the nutrition they deserve. Our meticulous research, careful ingredient selection, and thoughtful packaging all reflect our dedication. Hearty is a testament to our promise to deliver excellence to our pets. Heads Up for Tails has grown in Food sales by over 46 percent compared to last year. Last FY Heads Up For Tails crossed the highest-ever Food Sales in this respective category closing the year at 650 Million Food Sales. This year, it is already on track to cross this figure and is positively aiming to cross the 1000+ Million Mark in Revenue for Food Sales through Heads Up For Tails. ”

Since its launch in June, Hearty has seen over 50 percent month-on-month growth and is expected to continue this trend as HUFT aims for significant market share growth. The brand's focus on pet food, which currently contributes to about 43 percent of HUFT's overall business (60 percent including treats), underscores its strategic importance in the company’s growth plans.

With Hearty, HUFT is not just meeting the evolving needs of Indian pet parents but is also setting new industry standards, reaffirming its leadership in the pet care industry.

Honasa Consumer Ltd Reports Strong Growth and Strategic Developments

Honasa Consumer Ltd has announced its financial performance for the quarter ending June 30, 2024. The company achieved a 20.3 percent increase in product business growth, accompanied by a 25.2 percent rise in underlying volume growth (UVG). The EBITDA margin expanded by 201 basis points year-on-year to 8.3 percent, resulting in an EBITDA of Rs 46 crore. This growth is attributed to improved gross profit margins and scale-led efficiencies, reflecting Honasa’s continued progress in the beauty and personal care sector.

Financial Overview

  • Q1FY25 consolidated revenue: Rs 554 crore
  • Product business growth: 20.3 percent
  • Q1FY25 consolidated EBITDA: Rs 46 crore, an improvement of 201 basis points, driven by higher gross margins and operational efficiencies.
  • Q1FY25 consolidated PAT: Rs 40 crore, a 62.9 percent increase year-over-year
  • Working capital cycle: Negative 12 days, indicating capital efficiency

Business Overview

  • Volume-led growth: 25.2 percent UVG, showing increasing consumer demand
  • Mamaearth’s market presence: Became the fourth largest face wash brand in modern trade
  • Retail expansion: Mamaearth reached nearly 200,000 FMCG retail outlets in India by June 2024, a 30 percent increase year-over-year
  • Online and offline market share: Strong performance in the face wash category with approximately Rs 800 crore GMV ARR
  • New product revenue contribution: Approximately 9 percent
  • Recent innovations: Includes Mamaearth Rice Water Dewy Sunscreen, The Derma Co Snail Peptide 96 Hydrating Serum, and Bblunt Refresh Dry Shampoo
  • Premium offerings: Introduction of ‘Skin Renew by Dr. V’ range through a partnership with Dr. Vanita Rattan
Varun Alagh, Chairman and CEO of Honasa Consumer Limited said, “ Reflecting on the highlights of Q1 FY25, we are delighted to report that Honasa has demonstrated remarkable resilience and growth this quarter, underscored by a strong operating performance and improved profitability. Mamaearth continues to win consumer love, driving offtakes and securing a position as the fourth largest face wash brand in modern trade according to Nielsen. Honasa has also captured a strong market share in the face wash category online while steadily gaining ground offline, driven by its House of Brands strategy and innovation capabilities. Our focus on a data-driven, consumer-centric strategy has led to a remarkable 9% contribution from new products to our revenue, while our partnerships, like with Dr. Vanita Rattan to launch ‘Skin Renew by Dr. V’ range in The Derma Co, are enhancing our premium positioning in the actives category. As we transition to a more direct distribution model, we are well-positioned to sustain and accelerate our growth trajectory. By leveraging our unique House of Brands strategy, purpose-driven approach, and strong emphasis on R&D and innovation, we are determined to solidify our leadership in the ever-evolving BPC FMCG segment. ”

Honasa’s innovation strategy remains data-driven, with new product lines such as Mamaearth Beetroot Face Wash and Aqualogica Glow+ Infused Tinted Sunscreen contributing significantly to revenue. BBlunt has strengthened its position in the hairstyling category with new additions like the Hot Shot Heat Protection Mist.

The company's distribution strategy focuses on scaling both online and offline operations. Mamaearth's success is evident with its expansion to nearly 200,000 FMCG outlets and the addition of 1,000 new consumer touchpoints in partnership with Reliance Retail. Honasa is also optimizing its direct distribution model, capturing over 90% of secondary sales through DMS and reducing reliance on super-distributors.

Honasa’s commitment to sustainability is demonstrated through initiatives such as planting over 700,000 trees and improving access to clean drinking water for over 700 rural households. The company also emphasizes corporate governance with a board comprising 50 percent independent members and robust internal auditing practices.  

Honasa Consumer Limited’s continued focus on growth and profitability aligns with its mission to drive value creation and positive impact, maintaining its position as a leader in the Indian FMCG/BPC sector.

The Chapter Expands Luxury Real Estate Portfolio in Goa with New Aldona Project

Blending aesthetics and lifestyle, The Chapter, a luxury real estate brand in India, continues to shape the retail and residential market with its unique approach to high-end living spaces. The brand has recently unveiled its second project, The Chapter: Volume 002, in Aldona, North Goa, featuring 27 fully furnished homes. This launch follows the successful sell-out of their first project, The Chapter: Volume 001, which comprised 22 homes in the village of Moira, Goa, and sold out within four months.

The Chapter: Volume 001, located on a 2.24-acre site adjacent to the Moira River, offers homes designed for convenience and well-being. These residences come with private swimming pools, furnished interiors, and a personalized concierge service. The community is strategically situated 25 minutes from Manohar International Airport in Mopa and 12-15 minutes from Assagaon, connecting residents to Goa’s best lifestyle offerings, including restaurants, clubs, flea markets, casinos, and beaches.

Building on this success, The Chapter has launched Volume 002, a 2.5-acre project in Aldona, North Goa. This new development, inspired by Portuguese architecture, features homes available in 3 BHK configurations across three phases. Each home includes a private pool, a semi-covered area, and access to world-class amenities. The gated community offers privacy, luxury, and easy connectivity to nearby attractions, including Assagaon, the Manohar International Airport, and National Highway 66.

The Chapter was founded by a group of prominent figures in the luxury real estate sector, including Nadir Godrej, Madhavan Menon, Mohit Gujral, Darshan Shah, Vera Tata Choksey, Symphony International Holdings Ltd., Nibhrant Shah, Dhimaan Shah, and Rohan Lamba. These leaders bring a wealth of experience to the brand, which co-creates homes with homeowners to offer a personalized design experience.

The Chapter provides various design identities to suit different lifestyles and aesthetic preferences. These include the Eclectic Design for maximalists, the Japanese design for functionalists, the Modern Tropical Design for nature enthusiasts, and the Modern Farmhouse Design for those with rustic tastes. Other options include the Santorini Design for stylish travelers, the Modern Minimal Design for minimalists, the Transitional Design for creative individuals, and the Modern Mid-Century Design for those who appreciate new-age classics.

Darshini Thanawala, Vice President of Business Growth and Strategy at The Chapter commented, " At The Chapter, we sought to address the untapped potential in the luxury real estate market in the most sought-after non-urban location. Our extensive research and understanding of the market led us to identify a desire for high-end and technologically advanced homes that offer a lifestyle of exquisite living. Our goal was to provide a new perspective in the industry, granting our homeowners a level of creative control often lacking in the home buying and design process. "

The Chapter’s strategic vision and commitment to quality have positioned it as a key player in the Indian real estate market. With a focus on customer-centricity, trust, and timely delivery, the brand is set to redefine industry standards and establish new benchmarks in luxury real estate.

Retail India News: Timex Celebrates 170 Years of Watchmaking Excellence

Timex, a renowned watchmaking brand, is marking its 170th anniversary by celebrating a legacy of crafting durable and beloved timepieces designed to last a lifetime. Since its establishment in 1854, Timex has proudly embodied the spirit of American ingenuity, revolutionizing the centuries-old watchmaking industry by creating quality, accessible watches, and establishing a legacy of innovation.

The brand's history is rich with moments of challenging the status quo, from making timekeeping accessible to the masses with innovations like brass movements and mass assembly lines, to moving watches from the pocket to the wrist with the introduction of the “watch that made the dollar famous.” Timex continued to break new ground by transforming women’s timepieces into fashionable accessories rather than just heirlooms. The brand’s innovative spirit was evident when they tested their watches live on television, invented the first NASA-certified smartwatch, launched it into space, and introduced the first sports watch—a tradition that continues today as Timex remains a prominent player in the sports watch category. The introduction of INDIGLO also revolutionized how the world reads time in the dark.

In India, Timex made its entry nearly 35 years ago in 1988, launching its acclaimed watch franchises such as Marlin, Waterbury, and Q Timex. The brand later introduced Fria, a collection designed for fashion-conscious modern Indian women, which seamlessly blends classic designs with modern interpretations.

Deepak Chhabra, Managing Director of Timex India expressed , “ It’s an absolute moment of pride for us to be a part of this iconic heritage and celebrate this milestone of 170 years of global excellence. From the launch of Timex's iconic franchise Marlin, the brand has continued to build a legacy through technological innovation and contemporary designs. A Timex does more than just tell time; it tells your story. Our 35-year-old journey in India aligns with current fashion trends, solidifying our relevance and deepening our connection with Indian consumers .”

Throughout its history, Timex has introduced and nurtured iconic franchises such as Marlin, Waterbury, Q Timex, and Expedition North, each of which encapsulates the brand’s rich heritage and commitment to innovation. The Fria collection, designed specifically for the Indian market, embodies versatility with its vibrant colors, playful patterns, and geometric shapes, making each piece a unique story and a perfect accessory for any occasion.

What truly defines Timex extends beyond its storied heritage—it’s the way its watches have evolved from being simple tools to cherished companions, worn and loved by generations across the globe.

  • anniversary
  • watch brand

Page Industries Sees Revenue Increase in Q1 FY25 as E-Commerce Expands

Page Industries Limited, India's leading apparel manufacturer, announced its financial results for the first quarter ending June 30th, 2024. The company's performance highlights a steady growth trajectory, driven by retail expansion and ongoing investments in digital and e-commerce platforms across India.

Key financial results for Q1 FY25 include a 2.6 percent year-on-year increase in sales volume, totaling 57.4 million pieces. Revenue rose by 3.9 percent YoY to Rs 12,775 million, while EBITDA stood at Rs 2,433 million with a margin of 19 percent, marking a sequential growth of 2.5 percent. The company achieved a Profit After Tax (PAT) of Rs 1,652 million, reflecting a 4.3 percent increase YoY.

V.S. Ganesh, Managing Director of Page Industries Limited said, " Our dedicated efforts to enhance the inventory health of our distributors have significantly boosted the overall efficiency of our business. We have successfully maintained strong operating margins while simultaneously advancing several digital transformation initiatives, enhancing consumer engagement, and investing in technology. "

The quarter also saw the company making substantial strides in the e-commerce space, a key driver of growth in the Indian retail market. With consumer confidence on the rise, there has been an uptick in spending on clothing and accessories. The expansion of e-commerce and digital platforms has allowed brands to connect more effectively with a broader consumer base.

As the Indian retail industry continues to evolve, Page Industries remains optimistic about the resurgence of demand in the coming quarters. The company is well-prepared to capitalize on this growth, supported by rising disposable incomes, rapid urbanization, and a young consumer base with a growing preference for branded products.

India's E-lifestyle Market to Triple by 2028, Reach $45 Bn!

India is rapidly becoming a key market for global lifestyle brands, with 90 percent of the top 50 international brands now operating in the country. This trend is being driven by the strong growth of online retail and a rapidly expanding e-lifestyle market, according to a study released by Bain and Company in collaboration with Myntra.

The study, which draws on Bain’s analysis, market research, and industry interviews, highlights India as a significant retail destination for global brands. " India is also a key lifestyle destination for global brands—90 percent of the top 50 global brands are active in India and half of them already have India revenue greater than $30 million ," the report states. The study reveals that scaled global fashion brands in India have seen a steady 20 percent annual growth from 2018 to 2023.

Approximately 50 percent of these global brands generate over $30 million in revenue in India. Moreover, in the past year alone, over 60 lifestyle brands were either launched or announced plans to enter the Indian market. These brands range from large-scale ($1 billion+ global revenue) to mid-scale and include luxury, new-age, and specialized East Asian brands.

The study emphasizes that the online retail channel is the preferred entry point for global brands in India. Online platforms offer access to a large customer base, detailed market insights, and comprehensive operational support, which has enabled these brands to expand profitably in the Indian market. Brands like H&M and Mango have successfully used online platforms to reach customers in tier-ll cities and overcome operational challenges typically faced in a new market.

Shyam Unnikrishnan, a partner at Bain and Company, commented on the evolving landscape: “ India’s e-lifestyle market has come of age in the last few years, with a diverse shopper base—ll in lll online shoppers are from beyond top 50 cities, l in ll are from non-affluent segments, and l in lll are Gen-Z. There still exists massive penetration headroom. 1 in 5 dollars spent on lifestyle will be online. ”

India’s lifestyle market, currently valued at $130 billion—with fashion contributing nearly 80 percent and the remainder coming from beauty and personal care—is expected to grow at a compound annual growth rate (CAGR) of 10–12 percent, reaching $210 billion over the next five years. This growth will be supported by easing inflationary pressures and favorable shifts in demand, including rising incomes, a growing Gen-Z shopper base, and increased demand for branded products. 

As India continues to evolve as a retail hub, global lifestyle brands are set to play a significant role in shaping the future of the country’s e-lifestyle market.

  • apparel business

New Era Cap Partners with Metro Brands to Expand Retail Footprint in India

New Era Cap, the New York-based headwear brand, has entered into a long-term licensing agreement with Metro Brands Limited (MBL), one of India’s largest footwear and accessories retailers. This partnership is set to expand New Era’s retail presence across India and further Metro Brands’ retail expansion into the athleisure market.

Under the agreement, Metro Brands Limited will have exclusive rights to distribute and sell New Era products, including headwear, apparel, and accessories, through retail stores and shopping kiosks in India. Additionally, MBL will manage online sales through its websites, New Era's site, and other online marketplaces. New Era products will also feature in upcoming Foot Locker stores in India.

New Era, known for its iconic headwear, such as the 59FIFTY fitted cap, the 9FIFTY snapback, and the adjustable 9FORTY, has built a reputation for authenticity and individuality. The brand is the official on-field cap for Major League Baseball and the National Football League, appealing to sports fans and fashion-conscious consumers.

The Indian headwear market has seen significant growth through e-commerce, and Metro Brands plans to strategically tap into this potential by integrating sports culture into the cap industry with New Era. This move aligns with Metro Brands' broader retail strategy in India.

Paul Gils, VP of New Era said, " We are thrilled to be partnering with Metro Brands to create a robust growth plan for both headwear and apparel in India. Metro Brands has a deep understanding of the Indian consumer and expertise in retail and distribution. We look forward to significant brand expansion over the coming years. "
Nissan Joseph, CEO of Metro Brands Limited said, " At Metro Brands Ltd, our vision is to introduce the finest global brands to India and fulfill our customers' complete athleisure wardrobe needs. This partnership marks a major milestone in that journey. It will allow us to revolutionize the cap market, elevate the retail experience, and address the evolving preferences of our customers. "

With over 800 stores across India, Metro Brands Ltd is also preparing to open the first Foot Locker store in the country, further strengthening its retail portfolio, which includes brands like Metro Shoes, Mochi, Crocs, FitFlop, and Fila.

  • Partnership

Retail India News: Filatex Fashions Lands Rs. 293 Cr Export Deal

Hyderabad-based Filatex Fashions, a prominent exporter of socks and cotton products, announced a major development recently. The company revealed that its subsidiary, Filatex Mines and Minerals Pvt Ltd, has secured a substantial export order worth USD 35 million (approximately Rs. 293 crore) for the supply of white marble. This significant order comes from Bloomflora Ventures Ltd, a company specializing in hospital development, and is intended for use in the construction of 54 hospitals across Africa.

The order for supplying white marble over a period of seven years is estimated to be USD 35 million (around Rs.300 crore) . This deal represents the first major export contract for Filatex Mines and Minerals Pvt Ltd, marking a notable expansion into the mining sector for the company.

In addition to this milestone, Filatex Fashions has also made headlines with its corporate governance decisions. The company’s shareholders recently approved a 5:1 stock split during an extraordinary meeting held on July 15. This stock split will result in the issuance of five new equity shares for every share currently held, a move designed to enhance liquidity in the capital markets and broaden the shareholder base. The board’s decision to proceed with the stock split was initially made on June 7.

Moreover, Filatex Fashions has announced the appointment of Sunil Agarwal as an Additional Director and CEO in the Executive Director category. This appointment was approved by the Board of Directors during their meeting on July 26, 2024. This leadership change is expected to drive further growth and strategic direction for the company as it continues to expand its business operations and market presence.

Retail India News: RBI Increases UPI Tax Payment Limit to Rs 5 Lakh

In a significant move impacting retail and financial transactions in India, the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) has raised the tax payment limit via UPI from Rs 1 lakh to Rs 5 lakh, as announced by RBI Governor Shaktikanta Das during the latest monetary policy review.

" Currently, the transaction limit for UPI is Rs 1 lakh, except for certain categories of payment which have higher transaction limits. It has now been decided to enhance the limit for tax payment through UPI from Rs 1 lakh to Rs 5 lakh per transaction, " Das stated. He emphasized that this adjustment will simplify and facilitate easier payments for consumers using UPI.

Additionally, the RBI has maintained the policy rate unchanged for the ninth consecutive time, citing persistent food inflation. The rate increase cycle was paused in April last year following six consecutive rate hikes, totaling 250 basis points since May 2022.

In the third bi-monthly monetary policy for the financial year 2024-25, Governor Das announced that the Monetary Policy Committee (MPC) has decided to keep the repo rate steady at 6.5 percent, with a close watch on elevated food inflation. The RBI also retained the growth projection at 7.2 percent for the current fiscal year.

Retail India News: ITC Sunfeast Expands Product Portfolio to Address Nutritional Gaps

ITC Sunfeast, known for its innovative consumer experiences, recently hosted a unique event featuring a lively discussion between hen and cow representatives. They humorously addressed the challenges of making milk and eggs more appealing to children while emphasizing their nutritional benefits.  

Following this, a panel discussion took place with notable figures including Madan Mohan Maiti, Chairman of NECC West Bengal, Dr. Dulal Chandra Sen, Vice-Chairman of IDA East Zone, Dr. Ananya Bhowmik, Clinical Nutritionist and Lifestyle Consultant, celebrity mom Koneenica Banerjee, and Archana Sinha, Co-Founder and CEO of Nourishing Schools. The panel highlighted the importance of eggs and milk during a child's developmental years due to their high protein content and other essential nutrients like Vitamins A, D, E, and iron. They discussed innovative ways to make milk and egg consumption more appealing to children.

Understanding the retail industry's gap in providing convenient nutrition options for children, ITC Sunfeast introduced the Sunfeast Super Egg & Milk Biscuit, featuring the 'Goodness of Protein'. The biscuit is crafted to offer children both nutrition and a delicious, crunchy texture. The tagline, "Super Combo, Super Tasty," underscores the brand’s commitment to delivering nutritious products.

Ali Harris Shere, COO of Biscuits and Cakes Cluster, ITC Foods said, " Our consumer research highlighted that mothers consider egg and milk essential for children, but these ingredients are not convenient for out-of-home consumption. Mothers want to provide these nutrients, but existing products do not combine both. This led us to develop a biscuit that includes both essential food components, making it convenient for everyday consumption. We are the first to introduce a biscuit with egg and milk at various accessible price points in India. "

ITC aims to offer value-added food products to consumers, considering changing lifestyles and preferences. Under its nutrition strategy ‘Help India Eat Better’ framework, ITC leverages its strengths in science-based, consumer-led product development and agriculture to meet consumer needs and help them make informed choices.

Retail India News: ABFRL Reports Increased Post-Tax Loss of Rs 214.92 Cr in Q1

Aditya Birla Fashion and Retail Ltd (ABFRL) announced that its consolidated loss after tax widened to Rs 214.92 crore for the first quarter ending June 30, 2024. This increase in loss was primarily due to higher expenses amid a sluggish consumption environment.

In the same quarter last fiscal year, the company had reported a consolidated net loss after tax of Rs 161.62 crore, according to ABFRL's regulatory filing.

The company's consolidated revenue from operations for the first quarter rose to Rs 3,427.82 crore, compared to Rs 3,196.06 crore in the corresponding period of the previous year.

Total expenses for the quarter increased to Rs 3,724.89 crore, up from Rs 3,458.02 crore in the previous year.

"Businesses continued to navigate through a subdued consumption environment, further exacerbated by a prolonged heat wave and a weak wedding season," the company stated.

The consolidated net profit was impacted by ongoing investments in digital-first fashion brands TMRW and losses in premium ethnic wear brands TCNS, the company added.

The growth for the quarter was predominantly driven by newer businesses operating in emerging consumer segments.

Throughout the quarter, all business units focused on margin expansion rather than revenue growth in the challenging environment, ABFRL noted.

Looking ahead, the company remarked, "Our performance over the last few quarters validates the strategy of expanding our portfolio into new high-growth segments. As the market navigates through current headwinds, we remain steadfast with our focus on driving profitable growth."

  • Aditya Birla Fashion & Retail
  • Annual financial report

Godrej Consumers Products Limited India Delivers Double-digit Volume Growth as Consolidated EBITDA Grows 13 Pc

Godrej Consumer Products Limited (GCPL), a leading FMCG company in emerging markets, released its financial results for the quarter ending June 30, 2024. The results highlight the company's performance across various regions, with significant growth in key markets and the announcement of a strategic move into the pet care sector in India.

Q1 FY 2025 Performance Summary:

  • India Business: Organic volume grew by 8 percent, reported volume increased by 10 percent, and sales rose by 9 percent year-on-year.
  • Indonesia: Volumes grew by 7 percent, and sales increased by 11 percent in constant currency terms year-on-year.
  • Africa, USA, and Middle East: Sales declined by 25  percent in Rs terms and 10 percent in constant currency terms year-on-year.
  • Latin America and SAARC: Sales grew by 7 percent in Rs terms and surged by 147 percent in constant currency terms year-on-year.
  • Consolidated EBITDA: Increased by 13  percent year-on-year.
  • Consolidated Net Profit: Grew by 14 percent year-on-year (excluding exceptional items and one-offs).

GCPL Enters Pet Care Market in India

GCPL announced its entry into the pet care market in India through its subsidiary, Godrej Pet Care (GPC). The pet care industry in India is valued at approximately Rs 5,000 crore and is expected to experience strong double-digit growth in the coming decades. GCPL plans to invest Rs 500 crore in GPC over five years, with Godrej Agrovet Limited (GAVL) serving as the manufacturing and R&D partner. Operations are expected to commence in the second half of FY 2026.

Sudhir Sitapati, MD and CEO of GCPL said, “ We started the year with healthy volume growth in our key geographies of India and Indonesia. In India, we delivered an organic volume growth of 8 percent and reported volume growth of 10 percent. The performance was broad-based across Home Care and Personal Care. In Indonesia, we continue to deliver robust performance with 7 percent volume growth. In organic terms, Africa, USA, and the Middle East sales declined by 10 percent in constant currency terms while 25 percent in Rs terms due to depreciating Naira. However, offtakes continue to remain strong. This translated in organic consolidated revenue declining by 1 percent while in constant currency terms sales was up by 11 percent. Our quality of profits has been improving consistently over the last few quarters with reported consolidated gross margin improving by 230 bps year-on-year. Our EBITDA margin, too, improved by 310 bps year-on-year. "
Sitapati added, " Today, we are announcing the formation of Godrej Pet Care (GPC), a subsidiary of GCPL. Pet foods is already a Rs 5,000 crore category with many decades of late teens growth ahead. To give a perspective, only ~10 percent of Indians own a pet of which only 10 percent feed packaged food and that too only 40 percent of the time. Calorie conversion in India is only 4 percent. China, which was remarkably similar to India 15 years ago, has 20 percent pet ownership with a calorie conversion of 25 percent. While the opportunity is clear, we believe that our right to win as a group is high. GAVL, our group company, is the market leader in animal feed and has a good understanding of pet foods R&D, with competitive advantages in supply chain. GCPL will invest the entire capital of Rs 500 crore in GPC over a period of 5 years, post which we see GPC becoming cash flow positive. GAVL will be our manufacturing and R&D partner. Lead times to set up capex are long, and we hope to commence manufacturing in the second half of next year. "

Business Update – India

  • Performance Highlights: Q1 FY 2025 India organic sales grew by 6 percent, volume grew by 8 percent, EBITDA grew by 8 percent, and net profit without exceptions and one-offs grew by 5 percent.
  • Home Care: Grew by 8 percent with stable low-single-digit growth in Household Insecticides, double-digit volume growth in Air Fresheners, and strong double-digit volume growth in Fabric Care.
  • Personal Care: Grew by 6 percent with stable volume growth in Personal Wash, strong double-digit growth in Magic Handwash, and double-digit growth in Shampoo Hair Colour.

Business Update – Indonesia

Sales grew by 11 percent in constant currency terms and 3 percent in Rs terms. Volumes grew by 7 percent. EBITDA margins improved by ~400 bps year-on-year to 23.3 percent. 

Business Update – Africa, USA, and Middle East

Organic sales declined by 10 percent in constant currency terms, further impacted by the devaluation of Naira. EBITDA margin increased to 14.4 percent, up ~660 bps year-on-year.

GCPL's Q1 FY 2025 results reflect the company's robust performance in key markets and strategic initiatives aimed at driving growth and profitability. The entry into the pet care market signifies GCPL's commitment to expanding its portfolio and leveraging growth opportunities in emerging sectors.

  • Godrej Consumer

Retail India News: Bata India Reports Q1FY25 Results with Strong Profit and Growth in Digital Sales

Bata India Limited has announced its financial results for the quarter ending June 30, 2024. The company's revenue from operations for the quarter was Rs. 9,446 million, a slight decrease from Rs. 9,581 million reported for Q1FY24. Net Profit for the quarter stood at Rs. 1,744 million. These results reflect Bata's disciplined execution of strategies centered on premiumization, investment in marketing and technology, and enhancing customer experience while maintaining gross margins despite a challenging consumption environment.

In addition to its operational results, Bata reported a one-time gain of Rs. 1,340 million from the sale of property. The quarter also included a one-time expenditure of Rs. 147 million on technology investments. The company declared an interim dividend of Rs. 10 per share, totaling Rs. 1,285.28 million.

Gunjan Shah, MD and CEO, Bata India Limited stated, “ Bata India navigated well through the slugging consumption environment further accentuated due to the elections and extreme heat wave in the last quarter. We sustained our gross margin with our premiumization strategy while continuing investments in marketing and technology platforms. We added 33 Franchise Stores in the quarter, primarily in Tier III – IV towns to cater to the demand for branded products and achieve better returns on capital. Bata also launched its 2nd Power EBO in Delhi. Along with cautious control on costs and focus on efficiency and productivity, we continued to manage our inventory while having strong in-store availability of fresh merchandise in anticipation of festive season-driven consumption uptick .”

Bata continued to broaden its reach with a network of 1,916 stores, including both company-operated and franchise locations. The company's e-commerce segment performed robustly, showing significant growth in digital sales compared to the previous quarter. Bata's strategy of casualizing its portfolio proved successful, particularly with the Sneaker category, which saw strong results from the Power brand. The expansion of Sneaker Studios and Floatz Kiosks further underscored this success. Additionally, 37 stores were renovated during the quarter, focusing on introducing new styles and integrating technological advancements. Bata also launched a groundbreaking promotion, the “Try and Fly” campaign, aimed at increasing foot traffic to its stores.

Urban Square Mall Continues to Attract Leading Brands, Expands Retail Dominance in Rajasthan

Urban Square Mall, recognized as Rajasthan's premier shopping, food, and entertainment destination, continues to strengthen its position as a top retail choice in India. The mall's success has attracted a slew of national and international brands eager to open their outlets.

Leading brands set to open at Urban Square Mall include Burger Singh, a popular fast-food chain; Yeh Hai Mumbai Meri Jaan, offering Mumbai's flavors; and Chatkaz, known for traditional snacks and street food. Additionally, Wooden Street, known for stylish and quality furniture, will be opening its store this week.

" We are focused on establishing Urban Square Mall as a premier one-stop destination for both shoppers and travelers. Since its inception, the mall has rapidly become Udaipur's most sought-after commercial hub. To maintain this position, we are curating a diverse range of activities and experiences, ensuring that Urban Square Mall provides top-of-the-line shopping, leisure, and dining options. Our goal is to create an exceptional environment that caters to a wide array of interests and preferences, " said Uddhav Poddar, MD of Bhumika Group.

In addition to these store openings, several new kiosks are being added to enhance the in-mall experience. These kiosks will feature fashion accessories, kids' toys, fish spas, tattoos, and mehndi services, adding a unique and diverse range of offerings for visitors.

This year, Urban Square Mall has already welcomed brands such as PVR Inox, Lemon Tree Hotels, Jusjumpin, Baggit, Vishal Mega Mart, Silver Pearl, Wooden Street, OMG Accessories, and Unicorn Dream.

Looking ahead, the mall has plans to introduce more brands, including Manbhawan Thali, Vinod Cafe, and Octave Apparels, along with kiosks like Tattoo Art, Lassi Mart, Amul Ice Cream, and Fish Spa. A new Sports Arena will also be launched, further diversifying the range of activities available to visitors. Additionally, Urban Square Mall has signed an agreement with IHG to develop a 195-key Holiday Inn, which is currently under construction.

With its ongoing expansion and commitment to offering a comprehensive shopping and leisure experience, Urban Square Mall continues to consolidate its position as the leading choice for shoppers and travelers in the region.

Lotte Wellfood Merges Indian Subsidiaries to Strengthen Presence in Retail Market

Lotte Wellfood, a South Korean confectionery giant, announced the merger of its Indian subsidiaries, Lotte India and Havmor Ice Cream, to create an integrated entity in India. This strategic move, part of Lotte’s One India initiative, aims to enhance the company’s brand presence and secure growth momentum in India’s retail confectionery and ice cream market. The combined entity targets annual sales of 1 trillion KRW (approx. Rs 6000 crore) through a series of investments.

As the first step under the One India initiative, Lotte Wellfood revealed plans to establish a new ice cream production facility for Havmor in Pune, Maharashtra, with an investment of Rs 400 crore. This expansion will extend the company's reach from western to south-central India.

Chang-Yeop Lee, CEO of Lotte Wellfood stated, “ With the launch of One India, we aim to solidify Lotte's brand presence and secure growth momentum in the Indian market. Our long-term vision includes substantial investments in India, a key emerging market with the world's largest population and robust economic growth. The merger of our Indian subsidiaries is a strategic move to enhance management efficiency and maximize synergy. Beyond strategic growth, our focus is on strengthening the local Lotte brand through diversified product portfolios and the integration of logistics and production bases. The merger will play a crucial role in achieving greater market share and increasing sales. This union will enable us to offer a more comprehensive range of products to our consumers, meeting their diverse preferences and needs. ”

On July 29, the Boards of Directors of Lotte India and Havmor approved the merger plan, with Havmor Ice Cream integrating into Lotte India. Both brands will retain their identities for seamless operations. The merger is expected to be completed by the second half of this year, with the integrated entity launching early next year. As part of its localization strategy, Lotte India had previously invested over Rs 210 crore to establish the first overseas production base for Lotte Pepero at its Haryana factory, aiming to start operations in the second half of next year. Following Lotte Choco Pie, the company plans to develop and introduce localized versions of Lotte Pepero reflecting local eating habits and climate conditions.

Lotte Wellfood entered the Indian market in 2004 by acquiring Parrys, an Indian confectionery company, and renaming it Lotte India. In December 2017, Lotte acquired Havmor Ice Cream, further strengthening its operations. Lotte India recorded double-digit growth last year, while Havmor holds the top market share in the ice cream sector in western India. The unified Lotte India entity aims to secure a strong financial structure and achieve annual sales of 1 trillion KRW (approx. Rs 6000 crore) through aggressive investments for future growth.

Retail India News: Raymond's Net Profit Up 27 Pc to Rs 57.04 Cr for April-June

Raymond Ltd disclosed a notable 26.7 percent increase in its consolidated net profit from continuing operations, which reached Rs 57.04 crore for the first quarter ending June 2024. This is a significant rise from the Rs 45.02 crore reported for the same quarter in the previous fiscal year, as stated in the company's regulatory filing.

The company also reported a substantial increase in revenue from continuing operations, which amounted to Rs 937.65 crore for the quarter, compared to Rs 473.37 crore in the corresponding period last year.

The quarter ending June 30, 2023, was marked by the board's approval of a demerger plan for Raymond Ltd's lifestyle business, which was transferred to a newly formed entity, Raymond Lifestyle Ltd. T he demerger process was completed on June 30, 2024, with the listing of Raymond Lifestyle Ltd expected in the second quarter of this year.

With this reorganization, Raymond Ltd's primary focus now shifts to its real estate and engineering ventures.

Gautam Hari Singhania, Chairman & MD, Raymond Ltd shared , “ Our real estate business continues to expand its portfolio through the JDA (joint development arrangement) route and we have been appointed as the preferred developer in our fourth project outside Thane land in Bandra MIG. Our foray into the aerospace business, following the acquisition of MPPL (Maini Precision Products Ltd), is showing promising signs with its strong performance in the first quarter ."

This statement underscores the company’s strategic diversification and its successful initial steps in new business areas.

Marico Reports Steady Growth in Q1FY25 Across Domestic and International Markets

In Q1FY25, Marico Limited reported revenue from operations of Rs 2,643 crore, reflecting a 7 percent year-on-year increase. The growth was driven by a 4 percent volume increase in the domestic business and a 10 percent constant currency growth in the international business. The overall FMCG volume trends in India showed gradual improvement, with rural areas showing more promise than urban. Both Home and Personal Care (HPC) and Foods segments saw growth, with the premium segments outperforming the mass segments.

Domestic revenue reached Rs 1,962 crore, marking a 7 percent year-on-year increase. This was supported by price hikes in the Coconut Oil portfolio, which offset the residual impact of pricing cuts in the Saffola Oils portfolio. Over 90 percent of Marico's key portfolios either gained or maintained market share and penetration on a moving annual total (MAT) basis.

During the quarter, Marico executed Phase 1 of Project SETU in six states, expanding direct coverage in urban and rural markets. The initial results were promising, and the company plans to scale up Phase 1 markets and expand into more states during FY25.

The international business maintained its double-digit constant currency growth, with each key market contributing to the broad-based growth. Gross margin expanded by 230 basis points year-on-year, and advertising and promotion spending increased by 13 percent. EBITDA margin stood at 23.7 percent, up 50 basis points, with EBITDA growing by 9 percent. The profit after tax (excluding one-offs) rose by 12 percent due to a lower effective tax rate, while reported PAT growth was at 9 percent.

Marico expects gradual growth in its core domestic categories through initiatives to enhance profitability and expand direct reach under Project SETU. The company aims to grow its Foods portfolio at a 20-25 percent compound annual growth rate (CAGR) to double FY24 revenues by FY27. The digital-first portfolio is projected to achieve an annual recurring revenue (ARR) of Rs 550-600 crore by the end of FY25 and double FY24 ARR by FY27.

The international business, which has shown resilience despite macroeconomic challenges, is expected to maintain double-digit constant currency growth. Marico aims to deliver revenue-led earnings growth in FY25, driven by improved domestic volume growth, favorable pricing cycles, and healthy international business momentum.

Saugata Gupta, MD and CEO of Marico stated, “ The new fiscal has started on a promising note for both the domestic and international businesses with revenue growth visibly turning a corner. We expect to sustain the improving trajectory in the core domestic business on the back of consistent market share and penetration gains coupled with the ongoing initiatives to revive growth in traditional trade and expand direct reach under Project SETU. We will also maintain a steadfast focus on the profitable scale-up of the Foods and Digital-first brands. The international business has been veritably consistent over the last few years and is expected to maintain its double-digit constant currency growth momentum. We will aim to deliver on each of the key performance parameters and drive healthy revenue-led earnings growth in the near and medium term. ”

This comprehensive approach to growth and market expansion underscores Marico's strategic vision for its retail and international businesses, setting a robust foundation for sustained performance in the coming years.

Retail India News: Allcargo Group Names Ketan Kulkarni as Deputy MD of Gati Express and Supply Chain

Allcargo Group, an India-born global logistics conglomerate, has appointed Ketan Kulkarni as Deputy Managing Director of Gati Express and Supply Chain Pvt. Limited, a material subsidiary of Allcargo Gati Limited. This move aims to further bolster the company's growing business in the retail and logistics sectors across India. Ketan steps into this role after serving as Chief Growth Officer of Allcargo Group in the Chairman’s office.

Ketan will assume his new responsibilities immediately, working closely with Pirojshaw (Phil) Sarkari, Managing Director and CEO of GESCPL. This collaboration aims to facilitate a smooth leadership transition and drive the company’s growth in the express and contract logistics business, focusing on sales, operations, customer service, and digital initiatives.

Phil Sarkari will retire on November 30, 2024, upon reaching the age of superannuation. He will continue to serve as a Non-Executive and Non-Independent Director on the Board of Allcargo Gati Limited.

Ketan Kulkarni brings over three decades of diversified experience to his new role, with a track record spanning sectors such as logistics, consumer durables, FMCG, and beverages.

Shashi Kiran Shetty, Founder and Chairman of Allcargo Group said, “ Ketan’s appointment as the Deputy Managing Director of GESCPL aligns with the Group’s vision to strengthen its leadership team, enhance efficiency, and capture emerging opportunities. We have great faith in his strategic and execution abilities. His leadership capabilities will be instrumental in boosting the customer experience and growth outlook of the company. ”
Ketan Kulkarni, Deputy MD of Gati Express and Supply Chain Pvt. Limited said, “ I am excited to step into this new role. At Allcargo Gati, we are committed to creating effective and efficient logistics solutions backed by future-ready digital tools and technology. With unmatched reach across India and a strong brand legacy of quality service delivery, we will continue to strengthen our position in the express and contract logistics space. I look forward to working with various divisional heads at Allcargo Gati to deliver growth and superior customer experience. ”

This strategic leadership change is expected to enhance Allcargo Gati's market presence and operational efficiency, further cementing its position as a leader in the logistics industry in India.

Mars Wrigley India Partners with CleanMax to Boost Renewable Energy and Sustainability Efforts

Mars Wrigley India has announced a partnership with CleanMax, a leading provider of renewable energy solutions for the Commercial and Industrial (C&I) sector in Asia. This collaboration is aimed at advancing Mars Wrigley India's sustainability goals by reducing carbon emissions and enhancing its renewable energy usage. The partnership supports the company's target of achieving net zero emissions by 2050.

As part of this initiative, CleanMax will implement a combined total of 6.2 MWp of offsite and onsite solar projects tailored to the energy needs of Mars Wrigley India's manufacturing facilities. A notable project includes a 4 MWp offsite solar installation, which will supply renewable energy to Mars's plant in Pune through CleanMax's Akot Farm in Maharashtra. Additionally, onsite solar projects will contribute to Mars Wrigley India's energy independence and reinforce its commitment to sustainable operations.

Tamer Kadry, Country General Manager at Mars Wrigley India stated, “ At Mars Wrigley India, sustainability is at the core of our operations. Our collaboration with CleanMax marks a pivotal step in our journey towards achieving our 2050 net zero emissions goal. By harnessing renewable energy across our facilities, we are not only reducing our carbon footprint but also upholding our purpose. We continue to innovate and uphold sustainable practices from our factories to the end use of our products, ensuring minimal to no negative impact on the environment. ”

The renewable energy projects are expected to significantly impact both the environment and local communities. These projects will reduce CO2 emissions by approximately 119,000 tCO2e over their lifespan and will produce around 9.3 GWh of renewable energy annually. This energy production is comparable to the environmental benefit of planting approximately 400,000 trees.

Mars Wrigley India’s efforts align with its broader sustainability commitments, as outlined in the Mars Sustainable in a Generation Plan, which supports various UN Sustainable Development Goals. This plan includes initiatives to expand renewable energy usage, promote water conservation in agriculture, eliminate deforestation, and advance circular economy principles in product packaging.

Kuldeep Jain, MD of CleanMax said, “ Joining hands with Mars Wrigley India in their sustainability efforts is a moment of pride for us. This collaboration reflects a shared commitment to a green and decarbonized future. CleanMax provides tailored and innovative renewable energy solutions to assist Mars Wrigley India in reducing its environmental impact and achieving its sustainability milestones. ”

By integrating CleanMax’s renewable energy solutions into their operations, Mars Wrigley India sets a strong example for the corporate sector, demonstrating a commitment to a cleaner and more sustainable future.

  • Mars Wrigley Confectionery
  • Sustainable Initiative

Retail India News: Fratelli Vineyards Gears Up for IPO Amid Growing Indian Wine Market

Fratelli Vineyards, India's second-largest wine brand with a 35 percent share in the domestic market, is set to make its stock market debut this week following a share-swap transaction with a listed sister company. The move marks a significant step in the company's strategy to reach a revenue target of Rs 650 crore by 2028.

Gaurav Sekhri, Managing Director of both Fratelli Wines and Tinna Trade India, which is facilitating the listing through a reverse share swap, provided insights into the company's strategic direction. Sekhri explained that Tinna Trade, a farm commodity trader listed on the BSE, acquired Fratelli Wines Pvt Ltd in March through a share-swap deal. 

Despite India's low per capita wine consumption, Sekhri highlighted significant changes over the past decade. Consumption has shifted from predominantly rural areas to urban centers, with cities like Lucknow, Kanpur, Nagpur, and Vijayawada now showing increased interest in wine. 

Fratelli Vineyards reported a gross turnover of about Rs 247 crore in FY24, with 70 percent of the revenue coming from luxury, super-premium, and premium segments. The company achieved a 25 percent growth rate over the past four years, compared to the industry average of 15 percent. Sekhri pointed out that Fratelli's strongest areas are the luxury segment, with wines priced above Rs 2,000, and the ready-to-drink wine-in-a-can category. The company's EBITDA margin stood at 13 percent, amounting to Rs 28.6 crore.

The company has made notable strides in its luxury segment, launching products like Sette and J'noon, which have set new standards in pricing and quality for Indian wines. Over the past four fiscal years, Fratelli's gross revenue has nearly doubled, with a significant recovery starting in FY22 following the COVID-19 pandemic.

Fratelli currently produces around five lakh cases annually and plans to increase this capacity to 15 lakh cases. The company operates four wineries across Maharashtra and Karnataka, with a total capacity of 4.7 million liters. Sekhri emphasized that Fratelli is the first in Asia to produce white wine from red grapes (Sangiovese Bianco).

Sekhri explained the rationale behind the company's decision to list Fratelli Wines via IPO, noting that it was increasingly difficult to justify maintaining a trading business alongside the wine operations. The share swap with Tinna Trade will allow Fratelli Wines to become a publicly listed entity, marking the end of Tinna Trade's trading activities.

According to spirits consultancy IWSR, India's wine market is projected to grow at 10 percent annually until 2027. The consumption of wine increased by 19 percent in volume in 2022, while other beverage categories also saw notable growth.

V-Mart Retail Q1 Net Profit at Rs 12.14 Cr; Revenue Up 15.8 Pc to Rs 786 Cr

V-Mart Retail Ltd. has announced a notable financial turnaround for the first quarter ending June 2024, reporting a profit of Rs 12.14 crore. This represents a substantial recovery from the Rs 21.94 crore loss recorded in the same period the previous year, as detailed in a recent regulatory filing.

The company's revenue from operations surged by 15.85 percent, reaching Rs 786.08 crore for the quarter, compared to Rs 678.52 crore in the corresponding quarter of the prior year. This increase reflects the retailer's successful strategies and growth in its business operations.

V-Mart's total expenses for the June quarter amounted to Rs 781.40 crore. Breaking down the revenue sources, the company earned Rs 774.50 crore from its core retail trade activities. In addition, it garnered Rs 11.58 crore from its digital marketplace, Limeroad, indicating a growing presence in the online segment.

Despite the positive earnings report, V-Mart Retail's stock saw a decline on Monday. The shares closed at Rs 3,248.80 each, marking a decrease of 5.26 percent from the previous close. This drop in stock price contrasts with the company's strong quarterly performance, reflecting the broader market dynamics and investor sentiment.

The significant improvement in V-Mart's financial results highlights the company's effective management and growth strategies during the quarter. It also underscores the challenges and fluctuations in the stock market, even when a company delivers impressive earnings and revenue growth.

  • fashion and clothing
  • annual revenue

Retail India News: Bisk Farm Secures Injunction Against Parle Biscuits

SAJ Food Products Pvt. Ltd has announced that the Calcutta High Court has granted an ex-parte injunction preventing Parle Biscuits from selling and marketing their new biscuit product under the brand name "TOP GOLD STAR."

Bisk Farm has been using the "TOP GOLD" mark for one of its biscuit products since 2005 and has secured statutory protection through trademark and copyright registrations. SAJ is the sole entity registered and/or applied for the "TOP GOLD" mark with the Trademark Registry. Recently, it was observed that Parle launched a new product in the same category under the name "TOP GOLD STAR."

Bisk Farm asserted that it is the prior and only registered user of the "TOP GOLD" mark in Class 30 as of this date. Parle's use of "TOP GOLD STAR," with 'TOP' and 'GOLD' in larger font and 'STAR' in smaller font, is structurally, phonetically, and deceptively similar to Bisk Farm's "TOP GOLD" mark and is used for identical goods, i.e., biscuits. Bisk Farm argued that this constitutes a clear act of passing off and approached the Calcutta High Court to restrain Parle Biscuits from using the "TOP GOLD STAR" mark.

On 19th July 2024, Hon'ble Justice Krishna Rao issued a stay order preventing Parle from selling and marketing their product under the "TOP GOLD STAR" brand name until 27th August 2024.

Vijay Singh, MD of Bisk Farm stated, “ We have a distinguished history of introducing distinct biscuits, each marked by its own unique identity, all of which have been well-received by consumers. We are determined to protect our intellectual property rights and brand integrity which has been carefully built over two decades by our late founder K.D.Paul. We are thankful to the honorable court for issuing an ex-parte protective order against this action of trademark infringement by Parle. ”

Retail India News: Myntra CEO Nandita Sinha to Lead Flipkart Fashion

Flipkart's fashion vertical head, Arief Mohamad, is set to exit the company, with his role being assumed by Myntra's CEO, Nandita Sinha. Sinha, who successfully led Myntra to achieve EBITDA-level profitability earlier this year, will now oversee the fashion division of Flipkart, Myntra's sister company. Despite Sinha's leadership, both Flipkart and Myntra, owned by Walmart, will continue to operate independently.

A Flipkart group spokesperson confirmed the change stating, “ Nandita has been instrumental in driving the growth of numerous businesses within the Flipkart ecosystem. Under her leadership, Myntra has solidified its position in the fashion industry, while also paving its path for the next phase of growth. Flipkart Fashion and Myntra will continue to operate independently under Nandita’s leadership as she guides the broader strategic direction for Fashion .”

Sinha, a Flipkart veteran with over eight years at the firm, took the helm at Myntra in January 2022. Mohamad, who has been with Flipkart for nine years, has led various verticals, including mobile business customer growth, and loyalty.

Mohamad’s departure follows a series of senior leadership changes at Flipkart under group CEO Kalyan Krishnamurthy. On May 24, the sources reported that Flipkart had appointed Prathyusha Agarwal as vice president and head of Shopsy, following the exit of senior vice president Adarsh Menon. On May 20, It was reported that Anuj Rathi was appointed as the new CEO of Flipkart's travel booking unit Cleartrip, succeeding former CEO Ayyappan R and former CFO Aditya Agarwal.

Other senior vice presidents, including Amitesh Jha, who led the marketplace and categories, fintech and payments head Dheeraj A, and growth and retention head Bharath Ram, have also left the company in recent months. In January, Flipkart was implementing performance-based staff reductions across all verticals, impacting 5-7 percent of its workforce, including vice presidents in engineering and product.

  • New Appointiments

BSH Home Appliances Expands Bosch and Siemens Washing Machine Line in India

BSH Home Appliances Pvt. Ltd, a subsidiary of BSH Hausgeräte GmbH, a global leader in home appliances, has introduced its latest range of 'Made-in-India' Bosch and Siemens front-loading washing machines. Designed to handle 9-10kg loads, these machines combine advanced energy efficiency with cutting-edge technology, catering to the evolving needs of Indian households. Available in Silver, Dark Grey, and Dark Lake, they offer robust performance along with a sophisticated appearance.

The growing demand for high-capacity washing machines in India reflects changing consumer preferences, such as the need for fewer wash cycles and the ability to handle larger items like curtains and bedsheets. From 2022 to 2023, the market for 9kg front-load machines grew by over 70 percent, while the 10kg segment saw significant expansion. This trend highlights the shift towards larger, more efficient machines.

BSH Home Appliances continues to innovate with over 70 years of expertise in front-load washing machines. The new Bosch and Siemens models, manufactured to German standards, promise superior fabric care and performance. These machines have passed the TUV test, ensuring that clothes retain their integrity and color after 50 washes. Features include SuperQuick 15’/30’ cycles for fast washes and specialized settings for delicate fabrics, including silk, cotton, and wool. The Speed Perfect feature allows a full load to be washed in 60 minutes without compromising quality.

Saif Khan, MD and CEO, BSH Home Appliances said, “ We are thrilled to introduce our new range of high-capacity front load washing machines as a part of our strong commitment to ‘Make-in-India-for-India’. To cater to the growing demand for Bosch front loading washing machines, we have doubled our capacity at the Chennai factory with a second assembly line. Our new 9kg and 10kg Bosch and Siemens front load washing machines have been meticulously crafted to suit diverse needs of Indian households, revolutionizing fabric care. These machines are designed to provide the softest care for clothes, ensuring that every wash preserves the quality and longevity of your garments. This launch exemplifies our dedication to offering innovative, high-capacity solutions that are accessible and meet the increasing demand for premium home appliances in Indian market. ”

BSH customer service supports this initiative with extensive infrastructure, including two customer contact centers, 16 Branch Service Offices, over 370 authorized service partners, and more than 1600 trained technicians across India.

  • BSH Household Appliance

Retail India News: Muscle and Strength India Broadens Offerings with Exclusive Global Supplement Deals

Muscle and Strength India, a prominent player in India’s fitness supplement and nutrition retail market, has announced its entry into exclusive distributorship for several well-known international supplement brands. This move follows the success of its franchise model, which includes popular brands such as JNX Sport, Ryse Supplements, DY Nutrition, Unmatched Supplements, Universal Nutrition, VMI Sports, DarkLabs, Hawk Labz, and Blackstone Labs.

The company currently operates 25 stores across various cities in India, offering a broad selection of over 1,000 fitness supplements from more than 42 brands. These products cater to athletic performance, fitness, and overall wellness. Muscle and Strength India aims to extend its reach beyond domestic markets, with plans to enter international markets including Nepal, Bhutan, Sri Lanka, Bangladesh, and Myanmar.

“ At Muscle and Strength India, we believe everyone is deserving of good health, and we are pleased to now offer world-class supplements and advanced sports nutrition products to consumers. This next step in our growth is a testament to our hard work over the years, further enriching our diverse product offerings. We take immense pride in our association with these renowned brands and our partnership with them will enable us to fulfill our mission of providing high-quality products to fitness enthusiasts. We hope to see many other partnerships come to fruition shortly and are also looking forward to the continued introduction of more such products to newer markets. We are excited about the opportunity that lies ahead, ” said Praveen Chirania, Founder, Muscle and Strength India.   “ The driving factor of the dietary supplements market is the increasing health consciousness and proactive health mindset amongst the consumers. However, it is important to make the distinction between genuine and fake supplements and hence one should buy them from genuine dealers of reputed brands. In a short span of time, Muscle and Strength India has already made its mark with its authentic and genuine products. Going forward, the company aims to further launch products in various variants, focusing on different health and wellness categories and segments. We now anticipate great business opportunities for growth with this new partnership and making a meaningful difference to improve the quality of life, ” added Praveen.

Founded in 2018, Muscle and Strength India has quickly established itself as a leading brand in the supplements sector, endorsed by notable celebrities and athletes. The company provides a comprehensive range of high-quality fitness supplements and nutritional products from international brands.

  • Dietary supplement

[Funding Alert] Baazar Style Retail Obtains Rs 37 Cr Funding, Lowers Public Issue Size

Kolkata-based Baazar Style Retail Limited, a key player in India's value fashion retail sector with a strong presence in Eastern India and leadership in West Bengal and Odisha, has raised Rs 37 crore from institutional investors. This funding has reduced the size of the public issue from Rs 185 crore to Rs 148 crore.

As reported in Financial Express on August 5, 2024, Baazar Style Retail undertook a private placement of 9,56,072 equity shares to Volrado Ventures Partners Fund II at Rs 387 per share, which includes a premium of Rs 382 per share.

According to the Draft Red Herring Prospectus (DRHP) filed in March 2024, the public issue consists of a fresh issue of up to Rs 185 crore and an offer for sale of up to 16.88 million shares by the promoter group and other selling shareholders, with a reservation for eligible employees.

Founded in Fiscal 2014, Baazar Style Retail has expanded rapidly from 2 stores in one state to 153 stores across 1.39 million square feet in 140 cities across 9 states as of December 31, 2023. It has been the fastest-growing value retailer from 2017 to 2023 in terms of store count and revenue, with the highest EBITDA margin for Fiscal 2023 according to a Technopak Report.

The company’s brand, ‘Style Bazaar,’ has built a strong customer base through a diverse product range, fostering loyalty and recognition. Its growth is attributed to a cluster-based expansion model, high-street stores, a wide product assortment, and strategic location selection, particularly in Eastern India, which is noted for its rapid growth in value retail.

Axis Capital Limited, Intensive Fiscal Services Private Limited, and JM Financial Limited are serving as the book-running lead managers, with Link Intime India Private Limited as the registrar of the issue.

Titan's Profit Falls 5.4 Pc to Rs 715 Crore in Apr-Jun; Sales Up 12 Pc

Titan, the leading jewelry retailer and watchmaker, announced a 5.42 percent decline in consolidated net profit to Rs 715 crore for the quarter ending June 2024. This compares to a net profit of Rs 756 crore for the same period last year.

Despite the profit drop, Titan saw a 12.64 percent increase in sales, reaching Rs 12,223 crore, up from Rs 10,851 crore in the corresponding quarter, according to a regulatory filing.

Total expenses for the quarter rose by 12.75 percent to Rs 12,413 crore. Titan’s total income also increased by 11.44 percent to Rs 13,386 crore.

Titan’s jewelry segment saw a revenue increase of 10.4 percent to Rs 11,808 crore. The segment experienced a 20 percent retail growth in the first six weeks of the quarter, which included Akshaya Tritiya. However, Titan noted that “Q1 saw multiple forces coming together that impacted topline. A steep rally in gold rates (20 percent increase over Q1FY24), election-led restrictions in many markets, very few wedding dates, and an unprecedented heat wave across the country weighed on overall consumer demand.”

The company expanded its international footprint with a new Tanishq store in Muscat, Oman, bringing its total to 17 international stores. In India, Tanishq opened 11 new stores, Mia added 19, and Zoya opened three, including its first locations in Chennai and Pune.

Revenue from Watches & Wearables rose 12 percent to Rs 1,023 crore. The analog segment saw a strong 17 percent revenue growth due to brands like Titan, Fast Track, and Sonata. However, the Wearables segment experienced a 6 percent drop in revenue compared to Q1FY24, despite healthy volume growth due to declining average selling prices.

The June quarter also saw the addition of 17 new stores, including five in Titan World, five in Helios, and seven in Fastrack. Revenue from the Eyecare segment increased 3.44 percent to Rs 210 crore, while revenue from other segments, including Fragrance, wallets, and Indian Dress Wear (Taneira), surged to Rs 277 crore, doubling from the previous year.

“Taneira’s sales grew 4 percent compared to Q1FY24 mainly driven by growth from new stores,” Titan said, noting that its Fragrances and Fashion Accessories (F&FA) business grew only 1 percent.

Titan is a joint venture between the Tata Group and the Tamilnadu Industrial Development Corporation (TIDCO). On Thursday, the company’s shares closed down 0.15 percent at Rs 3,463.15 on the BSE.

  • Titan Brand

Retail India News: Muscle & Strength India Broadens Reach in Multi-Brand Supplement Market

Following the success of its multi-brand supplement store franchise, Muscle & Strength India, a prominent retailer of fitness supplements and nutritional products, has secured exclusive distributorship agreements with several renowned international supplement brands. These brands include JNX Sport, Ryse Supplements, DY Nutrition, Unmatched Supplements, Universal Nutrition, VMI Sports, DarkLabs, Hawk Labz, and Blackstone Labs, among others.

These world-class supplements and nutrition products are known for their trusted quality, innovation, and value, offering consumers a wide range of options for health, wellness, fitness, and bodybuilding. Muscle & Strength India also plans to extend its reach to international markets such as Nepal, Bhutan, Sri Lanka, Bangladesh, and Myanmar in the near future.

Currently, Muscle & Strength India operates 25 stores across multiple cities in the country, providing an extensive range of over 1,000 fitness supplements and nutrition products from more than 42 brands. These products are aimed at enhancing athletic performance, fitness, and overall wellness. As part of its expansion strategy, Muscle & Strength India will also partner with various gyms nationwide and introduce additional products soon.

“ At Muscle & Strength India, we believe everyone is deserving of good health, and we are pleased to now offer world-class supplements and advanced sports nutrition products to consumers. This next step in our growth is a testament to our hard work over the years, further enriching our diverse product offerings. We take immense pride in our association with these renowned brands and our partnership with them will enable us to fulfill our mission of providing high-quality products to fitness enthusiasts. We hope to see many other partnerships come to fruition in the near future and are also looking forward to the continued introduction of more such products to newer markets. We are excited about the opportunity that lies ahead ,” said Praveen Chirania, Founder, Muscle and Strength India.
“ The driving factor of the dietary supplements market is the increasing health consciousness and proactive health mindset amongst the consumers. However, it is important to make the distinction between genuine and fake supplements and hence one should buy them from genuine dealers of reputed brands. In a short span of time, Muscle & Strength India has already made its mark with its authentic and genuine products. Going forward, the company aims to further launch products in various variants, focusing on different health and wellness categories and segments. We now anticipate great business opportunities for growth with this new partnership and making a meaningful difference to improve the quality of life ,” Praveen added further.

Founded in 2018 by Praveen Chirania, Muscle & Strength India has become a leading brand in the supplements space, endorsed by renowned celebrities and athletes. The company offers a comprehensive range of genuine, high-quality fitness supplements and nutritional products across categories such as proteins, vitamins, minerals, and herbal supplements, all manufactured by international fitness brands under one roof.

  • Health Supplement
  • Multi-brand retail

Retail India News: The Body Shop Announces Collaboration with Actress Diana Penty

British ethical beauty brand The Body Shop has announced an exciting partnership with Indian actress Diana Penty.

A standout element of this collaboration is the introduction of Edelweiss, a remarkable new ingredient in The Body Shop’s product lineup . Harvested by a team of passionate experts in the pristine Swiss Alps, Edelweiss extract is sourced, managed, and organically cultivated to ensure the highest quality. These specialist growers are dedicated to responsible sourcing practices, ensuring that the potent extract is concentrated within the formulations.

“We are delighted to collaborate with Diana Penty to highlight this fantastic ingredient, the beauty industry’s best-kept secret, with 43 percent more antioxidant power than retinol,” said Harmeet Singh, Chief Brand of Marketing, Product, & Digital, The Body Shop Asia South.

The Body Shop was founded in 1976 in Brighton, England, by Dame Anita Roddick. Since then, it has evolved into a global beauty brand renowned for its commitment to ethical practices and high-quality products. In India, The Body Shop operates through its partner Quest Retail, a leading beauty specialist omni-channel retailer and brand development company, ensuring that the brand’s ethical values are upheld across all operations.

In addition to this exciting partnership, The Body Shop has recently introduced vibrant murals at some of its stores, enhancing the shopping experience with artistic flair. The company considers India one of its top markets and is now focusing on expanding its presence in tier II and III towns to reach a broader audience.

Through its collaboration with Diana Penty and the introduction of Edelweiss, The Body Shop continues to innovate and uphold its legacy of providing high-quality, ethically sourced beauty products. This partnership not only highlights the brand's dedication to sustainability and excellence but also strengthens its connection with consumers who value both beauty and responsibility.

  • The Body Shop

Retail India News: Lavish Soni Takes on the Role of Chief Business Officer at The House of Rare

Seasoned retail expert Lavish Soni has been promoted to Chief Business Officer at The House of Rare, a move he shared with his network in a social media post.

“I’m happy to share that I’m starting a new position as Chief Business Officer at The House of Rare,” Soni commented.

With a robust background in retail operations, Soni has built a strong reputation in the apparel and fashion industry. His expertise encompasses Trend Analysis, Market Research, Merchandise Planning, Business Operations, and Retail Sales. Soni holds a CBA in Business Administration and Management from INSEAD, underscoring his deep knowledge of business development.

Before joining The House of Rare, Soni worked with several notable retail brands, including Ruosh, Mustard Clothing Company Ltd., SSIPL Retail Ltd., and Puma Sports, where he honed his skills and gained valuable experience.

Soni joined The House of Rare in 2016 as Head of Retail Business Development. His impressive performance and leadership have propelled him through the ranks, leading to his current appointment as Chief Business Officer. In this new role, Soni will be responsible for overseeing strategic initiatives aimed at furthering the company’s growth and enhancing its market presence.

The House of Rare, founded in 2015 by Manish Poddar, Chairman of Radhamani Textiles, and Akshika Poddar, Managing Director of Radhamani Textiles, is recognized for its flagship brand Rare Rabit. The company has grown significantly since its inception and now boasts over 100 stores across India. This expansion reflects its commitment to delivering high-quality products and exceptional customer experiences, solidifying its position in the Indian retail market.

Retail India News: Novotel Pune Welcomes Anant Leekha as General Manager

Novotel Pune has announced the appointment of Anant Leekha as its new General Manager. With over 20 years of industry experience, Anant is well-regarded for his strong track record and achievements. His expertise in sales and operations, coupled with his natural ability to inspire and develop dynamic teams, will play a crucial role in driving the hotel’s business growth and enhancing guest experiences.

In his role, Anant will lead efforts to advance the hotel’s strategic and technological initiatives, aiming to deliver the Heartist experience to both guests and team members. This new position marks Anant’s return to Pune, where he first served as General Manager in 2016, marking the beginning of his journey with Accor.

Anant brings a wealth of knowledge from his 16-year tenure with Accor, offering deep insights into the company’s goals, service standards, and brand identity. Before joining Novotel Pune, he held significant roles within Accor, most recently as Cluster General Manager for ibis Mumbai Vikhroli, ibis Navi Mumbai, and ibis Thane. During his tenure, these hotels achieved consistent year-on-year excellence in performance metrics.

As General Manager of Novotel Pune Nagar Road, Anant will oversee the hotel's overall operations and management. He will focus on enhancing guest engagement, boosting profitability, and further establishing the hotel’s reputation.

Anant holds a Bachelor's degree in Hotel Management & Catering Technology. Outside of work, he enjoys playing cricket, taking beachside holidays with his family, and celebrating life, which fuels his motivation to excel.

Novotel Hotels, Suites & Resorts provides a range of destination properties designed to offer comfort and rejuvenation, allowing guests to pause and savor life's important moments. The brand features a diverse selection of hotels, suites, and resorts that cater to both business and leisure travelers. Guests can enjoy spacious, modular rooms with natural and intuitive designs; round-the-clock catering with healthy options; dedicated meeting areas; attentive and proactive service; family-friendly zones; versatile lobbies; and accessible fitness facilities.

With over 530 locations across more than 60 countries, Novotel is a part of Accor, a leading global hospitality group. Accor boasts over 5,200 properties and 10,000 food and beverage outlets in 110 countries.

  • General Manager

Retail India News: Nothing Achieves 567 Pc YoY Growth in H1 2024

London-based consumer technology brand, Nothing, has reported a 567 percent year-on-year (YoY) growth, according to Counterpoint Research, a global technology market research firm.

This significant surge has been attributed to the launch of new models, such as the mid-segment Phone (2a), which caters to a wide range of consumer needs and preferences.

“ This year, it’s all about scaling by expanding our smartphone portfolio and leveraging Nothing’s cutting-edge design and user experience innovations in new market segments. While I believe that market share should be the result of creating great products, not the end goal, I’m thrilled to see this growth. This success demonstrates that we are effectively executing our strategy. The most exciting part is that this achievement is fueling Nothing’s innovation, which will be a core focus for 2025 ,” said Carl Pei, Chief Executive Officer (CEO), Nothing .

Nothing recently surpassed 4 million units shipped worldwide and achieved over $500 million in revenue last year, marking significant milestones in its journey. This growth is further supported by aggressive expansion in India, with 300 service centers, including 3 exclusive centers in Mumbai, Delhi, and Bengaluru, and plans to open two additional exclusive centers by the end of this year.

Additionally, the workforce has grown by 65 percent over the past year and continues to expand. Already available at Flipkart, Croma, and Vijay Sales, Nothing has more than doubled its offline presence from 2,000 to 5,000 locations.

  • consumer durable
  • Information Technology

Retail India News: Apple Sets Revenue Records in India and Beyond for June 2024

iPhone maker Apple experienced record revenue growth in India and over two dozen other countries in the quarter ending June 30, 2024, according to its chief executive officer, Tim Cook.

Apple reported a 7.8 percent increase in net income, reaching $21.44 billion in the June 2024 quarter, up from $19.8 billion in the same period last year.

The company saw a 4.8 percent rise in total net sales, amounting to $85.77 billion for the reported quarter, compared to $81.79 billion in the June 2023 quarter.

“Apple is reporting a new June quarter revenue record of $85.8 billion, up 5 percent from a year ago and better than we had expected. We also set quarterly revenue records in more than two dozen countries and regions, including Canada, Mexico, France, Germany, the UK, India, Indonesia, the Philippines, and Thailand,” said Tim Cook, Apple CEO.

Revenue from Apple's ‘Rest of Asia Pacific’ region, which includes India, Indonesia, the Philippines, and Thailand, grew by $760 million in the June quarter compared to the previous year.

Apple’s iPhone sales declined by about one percent, totaling $39.29 billion in the reported quarter, down from $39.66 billion a year ago.

Sales of Apple Mac products increased by 2.4 percent to over $7 billion, up from $6.8 billion, while iPad sales surged 24 percent to $7.16 billion from $5.8 billion year-over-year.

“Mac generated $7 billion in revenue, up 2 percent Y-o-Y, driven by the MacBook Air powered by the M3 chip. We saw particularly strong performance in our emerging markets, with June quarter records for Mac in Latin America, India, and South Asia,” said Luca Maestri, Chief Financial Officer, Apple.

He noted that the Mac installed base reached an all-time high, with half of the MacBook Air customers in the quarter being new to Mac.

Sales in Apple's Wearables, Home, and Accessories category declined by about 2 percent, falling to $8 billion from $8.28 billion a year ago.

Retail India News: Vinod Cookware Acquires Healux International to Expand Retail Footprint

Vinod Cookware, a renowned brand with over 60 years of history in the Indian cookware market, has announced the acquisition of Healux International Pvt. Ltd., a Bangalore-based startup specializing in cookware and healthy lifestyle products. This acquisition aims to enhance Vinod Cookware's B2C reach, bringing high-quality and sustainable cookware to households across India.

Vinod Cookware’s acquisition of Healux International, a premier consumer brand in the cookware segment, will combine the brand’s trusted craftsmanship with a robust female entrepreneurial sales network. Healux International boasts 60+ branch franchises and 20,000 sales consultants, 90 percent of whom are female, providing a direct B2C reach.

The acquisition is expected to close by mid-second quarter, with Vinod Cookware India Private Limited holding a 51 percent share in Healux International Pvt. Ltd. The management will consist of a joint board of directors with a 4:3 directorship composition. Healux's current product lines, distribution channels, and customer base will remain intact, enhanced by Vinod Cookware’s brand strength and customer base.

David Stanley, Founder and MD of Healux International said, " We are thrilled to partner with the esteemed legacy brand Vinod Cookware, a company with a rich 62-year history. This strategic alliance will enhance the stability of Healux's current sales operations while accelerating our expansion into new markets, establishing innovative distribution channels, and offering a wider range of Kitchenware products. Healux Leadership can now benefit from the strategic guidance of Sunil Agarwal, MD of Vinod Cookware, a veteran leader in the cookware and kitchenware industry. This collaboration positions Healux International on a trajectory to emerge as one of the top 5 Premium Cookware and Kitchenware brands in India. "
Sunil Agarwal, Director of Vinod Cookware said, " As we join forces with Healux International, we are eager to embark on this exciting new chapter and leverage the synergies between our organizations. This strategic acquisition marks a significant milestone for us, as we embrace the opportunity to harness Healux's direct-to-consumer network, enhancing our ability to connect with customers on a more personal level. By utilizing our vast production facilities to manufacture waterless and fatless cookware made from AISI 304 Surgical Stainless Steel, we are expanding our reach to redefine the culinary experience for households across India. This partnership underscores our shared values of promoting healthy living, sustainable consumption, and delivering innovative solutions that exceed customer expectations. We are poised to elevate the cookware industry to new heights, setting a new standard for quality, convenience, and customer-centricity. ”

This acquisition represents a pivotal moment for both companies, combining Vinod Cookware’s advanced facilities and wider distribution network with Healux's extensive sales network. The partnership aims to expand long-term sustainability and enhance B2C reach in the retail industry in India.

Retail India News: A.O. Smith Celebrates 150 Years with Growth Focus in India

A.O. Smith Corporation has marked its 150th anniversary, reflecting on its rich history, innovative transformations, and promising future. 

A.O. Smith India, established in 2010, is among the fastest-growing regions within the corporation, outperforming major markets with a strong pan-India presence. The company has driven category growth in water heaters and water purifiers at a faster pace than the market, becoming a leader in the premium segment. A.O. Smith's products reach customers across metros, tier l, tier ll, and tier lll cities through general trade, modern retail, and e-commerce channels. The company plans to expand its distribution presence further into smaller towns.

“ A.O. Smith offerings are premium and differentiated and have many industry-first innovations both in water heater and water purifier categories. Our products are not only innovative but also responsible and sustainable. We have been able to register strong double-digit growth in the Indian market over the years. Our new products have helped to redefine benchmarks in water purification and water heating categories and helped us gain market share. While we are strongly present in retail outlets, sales from e-commerce in the country have also gone up as part of the total business. We will continue to innovate and build on the trust earned, in the years to come, ” said Parag Kulkarni, Senior VP, International and President, A.O. Smith India Water Products Private Ltd.

In 2023, A.O. Smith India business grew by over 15 percent compared to the previous year. India sales also increased 16 percent in the second quarter of 2024, driven by continued strong demand. A.O. Smith focuses on introducing superior design and aesthetics, enhancing convenience, and integrating cutting-edge technology features to meet evolving consumer expectations in the thriving retail market in India.

Consistent with its strategy to grow through acquisitions and penetrate high-potential markets, A.O. Smith recently signed an agreement to acquire Pureit from Unilever for $120 million, subject to customary adjustments. Pureit, a leading water purification business in South Asia, has annual sales of approximately $60 million, primarily in India. This acquisition aligns with the company's core capabilities and doubles its market penetration in South Asia.

“ The Pureit brand, known for innovative water purification products, strong brand recognition, and dedication to customer service, complements A.O. Smith’s geographic and channel presence. The Pureit team’s deep understanding of consumer needs and water treatment expertise adds tremendous strength to A.O. Smith in India and we look forward to welcoming the Pureit team to the A.O. Smith family, ” added Parag.

From bicycles and baby carriages to water heating and water treatment solutions, A.O. Smith’s commitment to integrity, innovation, and customer service has remained unchanged. Today, A.O. Smith is a leading global water technology and manufacturing company, improving lives by ensuring access to clean, safe, hot water.

“ India is a key investment market for A.O. Smith and we have a long-term view on the India market. Our expectation from the India business is to continue growing at the current double-digit growth rates, which would then increase India’s contribution overall to A.O. Smith's global sales, ” said Parag.

The celebration of the 150-year legacy will continue through 2024 with the theme “Where water flows – our legacy grows!” A.O. Smith locations across the globe, including India, will honor this anniversary with unique events celebrating employees and the communities where A.O. Smith operates.

Retail India News: ixigo Achieves 78 Pc YoY Profit Growth in Q1 FY25

Le Travenues Technology Limited, popularly known as ixigo, has released its financial results for the quarter ending June 30, 2024, showcasing substantial growth and profitability across key performance metrics.

ixigo's Gross Transaction Value (GTV) surpassed Rs. 2,988 Cr in Q1 FY25, marking a 27 percent year-over-year growth. Train and flight GTV expanded by 28 percent YoY, while bus GTV saw a 16 percent YoY increase compared to Q1 FY24.

Revenue from operations grew by 16 percent YoY, reaching Rs. 181.9 Cr in Q1 FY25, up from Rs. 156.6 Cr in the same quarter of the previous year. The contribution margin increased by 22 percent YoY, reaching Rs. 86.8 Cr. CM as a percentage of revenue from operations rose from 45 percent in Q1 FY24 to 48 percent in Q1 FY25.

Aloke Bajpai, Group CEO & Rajnish Kumar, Group Co-CEO, ixigo stated: “We are pleased to report continued momentum in our growth in Q1 FY25, with an all-time high GTV, Revenue from Operations, Contribution Margin & Adjusted EBITDA for the quarter. We continue to expand rapidly and improve our market share and at the same time have been able to improve our profitability. We believe the government initiatives on infrastructure, capacity creation and spiritual tourism are set to benefit our sector.”
Saurabh Devendra Singh, Group CFO, ixigo added: “Our financial results for Q1 FY25 are a testament to our disciplined approach of balancing growth and profitability. We remain committed to growing responsibly and balancing profitability with growth given we will continue investing in initiatives that help us in the long term.”  

The company's EBITDA surged by 62 percent, reaching Rs. 19.2 Cr for Q1 FY25. Adjusted EBITDA, which includes ESOP expenses and excludes other income, rose to Rs. 20.3 Cr, a 48 percent increase from Rs. 13.7 Cr in Q1 FY24. Additionally, profit after tax (PAT) grew by 78 percent YoY, reaching Rs. 14.9 Cr in Q1 FY25, compared to Rs. 8.4 Cr in Q1 FY24.

Retail India News: Metro Brands Names Mohit Dhanjal as Chief Operating Officer

Mumbai-based footwear retailer Metro Brands Ltd. (MBL) has appointed Mohit Dhanjal as its Chief Operating Officer, effective 1 August.

In his new role, Dhanjal will drive operational excellence and process improvements to support the company’s growth initiatives. He will play a key role in shaping the strategic direction of the company and overseeing day-to-day operations.

“ We are thrilled to welcome Dhanjal to our executive team. His extensive experience in fashion and lifestyle retail, coupled with his visionary approach to cater to the new-age customer, makes him a great fit to lead MBL’s operational strategy ,” said Nissan Joseph, chief executive officer, MBL. 

Before joining MBL, Dhanjal worked with Reliance Retail, where he served as Chief Revenue Officer for Tira Beauty. With over 30 years of experience in the retail sector, he has held various leadership positions at Sephora (Arvind Fashions Ltd.), Raymond Ltd., and Hindustan Unilever.

Mohit Dhanjal commented, “ I am excited to join MBL at such a pivotal time in its growth journey. I look forward to working with the multi-talented team here to help accelerate Metro’s strategic priorities and deliver exceptional value to our customers .”

Metro Brands Ltd. retails footwear under its own brands such as Metro, Mochi, Walkway, Da Vinchi, and J. Fontini, as well as certain third-party brands like Crocs, Fitflop, Fila, Skechers, Clarks, Puma, and Adidas. 

As of 31 March 2024, MBL operated 836 stores across 193 cities in 31 Indian states and Union territories, showcasing the company’s robust retail network and commitment to accessibility. This extensive reach underscores MBL’s dedication to serving a diverse customer base and maintaining its growth trajectory.

Additionally, MBL is set to expand its brand portfolio with the opening of its first Foot Locker store in October this year. This follows MBL's acquisition of the license to own and operate Foot Locker stores in India, a significant step that reflects the company’s strategic growth and diversification efforts. With Dhanjal's appointment, MBL is poised to leverage his extensive expertise to drive operational improvements and strategic growth, reinforcing its commitment to delivering exceptional value and innovative retail experiences to its customers.

  • footwear retailer

Retail India News: IMAX Debuts in Gujarat with New Theater

PVR Cinemas, based in Mumbai, has launched its latest theatre at Palladium Ahmedabad, a development that marks the debut of Gujarat's first IMAX with Laser technology. The new venue features the exclusive LUXE (Luxury Cinema Concept).

“ PVR is now open at Palladium Ahmedabad, featuring Gujarat’s first IMAX with Laser and the exclusive LUXE (Luxury Cinema Concept) along with 4K Laser Projection, Dolby 7.1 Sound, Next Gen 3D, Luxurious Lounge, Live Kitchen, Celebrity Recliners, Extensive Food Menu & much more ,” said Gurmeet Singh Bhatia, Regional Director, Inox Leisure Limited.

In a recent regulatory filing with the Bombay Stock Exchange (BSE), PVR Inox outlined its strategy to add 120 new screens this financial year, while also closing 70 existing ones. This move is part of a broader strategy to modernize and upgrade its facilities. Of the new screens being added, 15 percent to 20% percent will be premium or special format screens, reflecting the company's focus on offering high-end viewing experiences.

In addition to the new screens, PVR is also introducing a few rows of recliner seats in both existing and new mainstream cinemas. These recliners are designed to provide a more comfortable and premium viewing experience and will be available at a higher ticket price compared to standard seats. This initiative aligns with the growing trend of premiumisation in the cinema industry, where enhanced comfort and luxury are becoming key differentiators.

The new PVR theatre at Palladium Ahmedabad is a testament to the company’s commitment to innovation and customer satisfaction. With state-of-the-art technology and luxurious amenities, PVR aims to set a new standard in the Indian cinema industry, offering moviegoers an experience that combines the best of technology and comfort.

  • IMAX theaters
  • PVR Cinemas

Retail India News: Vineet Gautam Reaches 15-Year Milestone at Bestseller India

Vineet Gautam, the CEO and Country Head of Bestseller India is set to celebrate 15 years with the Danish fashion and lifestyle group. Gautam recently shared this milestone on social media, marking a significant chapter in his career.

“ I am soon to complete 15 years at Bestseller India and it is a big milestone for me and my family. In 2011, I was a man with big dreams and a deep passion to deliver value to the organization. I have tried to build that sense of responsibility and commitment into Bestseller India over the last decade and a half. This journey being a rollercoaster ride would be an understatement and still, there are miles to go ,” Vineet Gautam commented.

Gautam revealed that he will reach this milestone on December 31. Since joining Bestseller in January 2010, Gautam has played a pivotal role in transforming Bestseller India into a significant player in the country’s fashion and lifestyle sector. Under his leadership, the number of stores has surged from 15 to over 2,000.

Gautam oversees prominent Bestseller brands in India, including Jack & Jones, Vero Moda, Only, and Selected Homme.

With expertise in operations, marketing, brand management, and business development, Gautam holds over 20 years of experience in the retail and marketing industry. A graduate from IHM-Delhi, his career includes notable roles at United Colors of Benetton (UCB), Idea Cellular, Wills Lifestyle, Café Coffee Day, Domino’s Pizza, and Nirula’s.

Founded in Denmark in 1975, Bestseller operates in 70 countries and has a presence in more than 16,000 multi-brand and department stores globally. The company owns around 2,100 of its 2,700 branded retail stores across 32 countries, with the remainder managed by partners.

In India, Bestseller operates 362 exclusive brand outlets and is featured in over 1,793 shop-in-shops within multi-brand stores, according to the company’s official LinkedIn page.

Retail India News: Colgate-Palmolive India Reports 33 Pc Increase in Q1 Profit to Rs 364 Cr

Colgate-Palmolive (India) Limited announced its financial results for the first quarter ended June 30, 2024, showcasing impressive growth and robust performance across its product portfolio. The brand delivered a robust 13.0 percent year-on-year topline growth for the quarter ended June 30, 2024. Net sales increased to Rs. 1,485.8 crore from Rs. 1,314.7 crore. The quarter witnessed continued demand pickup in rural markets, outpacing growth in urban markets for the second consecutive quarter. Driven by this trend and the strong performance of toothpaste, toothbrush, and personal care products, domestic revenues grew by 12.8 percent year-on-year for the quarter.

Net profit after tax surged to Rs. 364.0 crore from Rs. 273.7 crore, reflecting a 33.0 percent year-on-year growth for the quarter. Excluding the impact of exceptional items in the prior year, the net profit after tax grew by 26.3 percent year-on-year. The company continued to focus on enhancing the overall brand experience while maintaining a disciplined approach toward cost controls.

Prabha Narasimhan, Managing Director & CEO, Colgate-Palmolive (India) Limited said , “ We are happy to report another quarter of strong and consistent performance led by robust topline growth across the portfolio and continued strengthening of competitive performance. Our toothpaste portfolio witnessed double-digit growth driven by high-single digit volume growth. Our continued investments in perceivable superiority in product, brand building, and innovation are yielding significant results while strengthening our brand metrics to highest ever levels. In this quarter, our Toothbrush portfolio has also seen a concrete positive shift in competitive growth trajectory with strong double-digit growth in topline. EBITDA margins remained consistent despite the higher investment in advertising, which increased by 10 percent y-o-y. Key highlights of this quarter include a first to the world Whitening booster gel to play in the rapidly growing Whitening segment; the continued focus on category growth through the “BrushatNight” campaign and sustained investment in superior communication which is driving Colgate equity to its highest historical levels .”

In this quarter, the company also released its third Environmental, Social, and Governance (ESG) Report along with the Annual Report for FY 2023-24. The report highlights the significant strides the company has made during the 2023-24 fiscal towards achieving the goals outlined in its Global 2025 Sustainability & Social Impact Strategy.

50 percent of Colgate’s toothpaste portfolio (by volume) has transitioned to recyclable tubes, and Colgate-Palmolive India is on track to achieve 100 percent recyclability by FY 2024-25. The company is progressing towards 100 percent reusable, recyclable, or compostable plastic packaging by 2025, with 83 percent already achieved.

  • Colgate-Palmolive (India) Limited

Retail India News: Adidas Reports Q2 Sales Growth in North America Excluding Yeezy

Adidas announced that its second-quarter revenues in North America, excluding sales of the Yeezy line, increased from last year. This growth was driven by both wholesale and its own retail segments.

Including Yeezy, the currency-neutral sales in North America—Adidas' second-largest market after Europe—dropped by 8 percent to 1.3 billion euros ($1.51 billion) in the April to June quarter. "The decline was solely related to the significantly smaller Yeezy business," the company stated, without specifying the increase in sales excluding the product line.

In a turnaround led by CEO Bjorn Gulden, Adidas has been working to clear the remaining Yeezy stock following a breakup with rapper Kanye West, also known as Ye. Simultaneously, the company is striving to boost its brand through popular retro styles.

In the first quarter, Adidas' North American business was still impacted by high inventory levels. However, the company reported an 18 percent reduction in overall inventories to 4.5 billion euros as of June 30, compared to a year earlier.

Quarterly apparel sales rose 6 percent, aided by strong double-digit percentage growth in soccer-related items, as the company sold jerseys tied to the Euro Cup and Copa America tournaments. In Europe, Adidas' currency-neutral sales increased 19 percent from a year earlier, reaching 1.9 billion euros in the second quarter. "New in the quarter was to see a positive development also for apparel," Gulden stated.

Adidas had raised its full-year guidance and reported preliminary second-quarter results above expectations in mid-July. This success was bolstered by the popularity of its low-rise, multi-colored Samba and Gazelle sneakers, and weaker sales at rival Nike.

The company still anticipates currency effects to significantly impact its profitability this year but maintains that its mid-term target for a 10 percent operating profit margin is achievable.

  • Adidas Brand

Retail India News: Brainbees Solutions, FirstCry’s Parent, to Launch IPO on August 6

Online e-commerce platform FirstCry’s parent company, Brainbees Solutions Ltd., is set to launch its initial public offering (IPO) on August 6.

The three-day issue is scheduled to close on August 8, with bidding for the anchor portion opening for a day on August 5, according to the red herring prospectus (RHP).

The proposed public issue from Pune-based Brainbees Solutions includes a fresh issue of equity shares valued at Rs 1,666 crore and an offer for sale (OFS) component of up to 5.44 crore shares by existing shareholders.

The price band for the public issue will be announced on Thursday.

Under the OFS, SVF Frog, a Cayman Islands-registered entity of Softbank, will sell 2.03 crore equity shares of Brainbees Solutions Ltd, and automaker Mahindra & Mahindra (M&M) will offload 28.06 lakh shares of the company.

Currently, Softbank holds a 25.55 percent stake in Brainbees Solutions, and M&M owns a 10.98 percent stake in the multi-brand retailing platform.

Apart from Softbank and M&M, other shareholders participating in the OFS include PI Opportunities Fund, TPG, NewQuest Asia Investments, Apricot Investments, and Schroders Capital.

Launched in 2010, FirstCry is India’s largest multi-channel, multi-brand retailing platform for mothers’, babies’, and kids’ products. It was created to provide a one-stop destination for parenting needs across commerce, content, community engagement, and education, based on brand affinity, loyalty, and trust of customers.

FirstCry further expanded internationally into select markets, establishing a presence in the United Arab Emirates (UAE) in 2019 and the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia (KSA) in 2022.

Kotak Mahindra Capital Company Ltd, Morgan Stanley India Company Private Ltd., BofA Securities India Ltd, JM Financial Ltd, and Avendus Capital Private Ltd. are the book-running lead managers for the issue.

  • e-eCommerce

Retail India News: P N Gadgil Jewellers Ltd. Receives SEBI Approval for IPO

Maharashtra’s leading regional jewellery retailer, P N Gadgil Jewellers Ltd., has received the green light from the Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI) for its proposed initial public offering (IPO), marking a significant milestone in the company’s growth trajectory.

The Company’s initial public offering will comprise a fresh issue of equity shares with a face value of Rs 10 each, aggregating up to Rs 8,500 million, and an offer for sale of equity shares with a face value of Rs 10 each, aggregating up to Rs 2,500 million. This brings the total offer size to equity shares aggregating up to Rs 11,000 million. The offer for sale includes equity shares with a face value of Rs 10 each, aggregating up to Rs 2,500 million, to be sold by SVG Business Trust, a Promoter Selling Shareholder.

The proceeds from the IPO are earmarked for several strategic initiatives. The primary use of the funds will be to establish 12 new stores across Maharashtra, enhancing the company’s retail footprint. Additionally, part of the funds will be allocated for the repayment or pre-payment, in full or part, of certain borrowings availed by the company, thereby strengthening its financial position. The remaining funds will be used for general corporate purposes, providing the company with greater flexibility to manage its operations and pursue growth opportunities.

Motilal Oswal Investment Advisors Limited, Nuvama Wealth Management Limited (formerly known as Edelweiss Securities Limited), and BOB Capital Markets Limited are the Book Running Lead Managers for the issue, ensuring the IPO process is handled efficiently and effectively.

Founded in 1832 by Purshottam Narayan Gadgil, PNG Jewellers Pvt. Ltd. has a long-standing heritage in the jewellery industry. Starting with a single store in Sangli, the company has grown substantially over the years. Today, it operates 35 stores across Maharashtra and Goa, offering a wide range of high-quality jewellery products that have earned the trust and loyalty of a vast customer base.

P N Gadgil Jewellers Ltd. is renowned for its commitment to quality, craftsmanship, and customer service, attributes that have been instrumental in its success. The approval from SEBI for the IPO is a testament to the company’s robust business model and growth potential, positioning it well for future expansion and success in the competitive jewellery market.

The company’s rich history, combined with its forward-looking strategies, underscores its commitment to maintaining its legacy while adapting to modern market demands. With the IPO, P N Gadgil Jewellers Ltd. is poised to strengthen its market position and continue its legacy of excellence in the jewellery industry.

Retail India News: Pepperfry Expands Product Portfolio with Amberville

Pepperfry has launched its latest collection, “Versaille,” by its in-house brand, Amberville. This new range combines French elegance with versatility, designed to enhance the aesthetics of any home.

The Versaille collection captures the timeless charm of ivory hues, offering a sophisticated and adaptable range of furniture pieces that blend seamlessly with various décor styles. Inspired by authentic French designs, this solid wood collection features a luxurious creamy tone that warms, calms, and refreshes any space. Whether your home has a period style, modern aesthetic, or Scandinavian minimalism, these pieces integrate seamlessly to elevate your decor.

Versaille includes versatile furniture pieces designed to transform every room in your home. The collection features solid wood bedside tables with convenient drawers, elegant 6-seater dining sets with benches, stylish sideboards, consoles, bookshelves, writing tables, and cabinets—all with exquisite Tulip finishes that infuse your space with vintage charm.

The Versaille collection provides a blank canvas for personal expression, allowing homeowners to add layers of color and personality through carefully chosen accessories and artwork. This collection is ideal for those who aspire to create an ambiance of timeless sophistication and elegance, blending classic design with modern functionality.

Amberville, one of Pepperfry's distinguished house brands, captures the essence of stately and gracious living. Its collections draw inspiration from classic colonial furniture styles of the 1800s, featuring distinctive curved lines, classically proportioned forms, and symmetrical moldings and trims, all meticulously crafted with a smooth, superior finish. Each piece evokes a sense of timeless beauty, transporting you to an era of refined taste and elegance.

The Versaille collection is now available exclusively on Pepperfry’s website and in stores across India. Discover a curated collection of distinctive furniture pieces at Pepperfry stores, designed to elevate your home décor with a touch of sophistication.

Retail India News: Honasa Appoints Nilesh Kotalwar as Online Senior Vice President

Honasa Consumer Limited, the holding company of renowned brands like Mamaearth, The Derma Co., Aqualogica, Bblunt, and Dr Sheth's, and the fastest-growing beauty and personal care (BPC) brand in India, proudly announces the appointment of Nilesh Kotalwar as Senior Vice President – Online Revenue & Growth.

In his new role, Nilesh will spearhead the online revenue strategy, driving growth and profitability for Honasa Consumer's diverse portfolio of brands. His focus will include building a robust online network strategy, optimizing digital marketing efforts, and enhancing the overall online consumer experience for brands including Mamaearth, The Derma Co., Aqualogica, Dr Sheth’s, and Bblunt.

An alumnus of IIM-Lucknow, Nilesh brings over 13 years of leadership experience in the FMCG domain. He has managed cross-functional teams across various revenue channels, with expertise in eCommerce, digital marketing, customer & shopper marketing, and brand management. His impressive career includes roles at leading conglomerates like Godrej Consumer and Hindustan Unilever. At Hindustan Unilever, he played a pivotal role in the Center of Excellence team, developing and rolling out new-age digital and tech tools. Most recently, he served as AVP- Business Transformation at Godrej Consumer Product Limited.

Varun Alagh, Co-Founder, Chairman and CEO, Honasa Consumer Ltd. commented , “ We are thrilled to welcome Nilesh as our new Head of Online Business. His extensive background in managing cross-functional teams and driving growth in established brands will be invaluable as we focus to continue expanding our online presence. Nilesh’s expertise in leveraging digital strategies and understanding the needs of today’s digital-savvy consumers will be key in enhancing our online approach and ensuring our brands are accessible wherever consumers choose to shop .”
Nilesh commented , " I am thrilled to join Honasa Consumer and contribute to its vision of building purpose-driven consumer brands. The company’s commitment to a digital-first approach has been pivotal in establishing Mamaearth and other brands as leaders in the Indian market. I am excited to leverage my experience and insights to support the team, drive further growth, and achieve new milestones for these dynamic brands .”

Nilesh will be based out of the Gurgaon office, and this appointment comes at a pivotal time for the organization’s growth and expansion.

  • Appointment
  • Beauty and wellness

IndiaMART Announces Q1 FY2025 Financial Results with 17 Pc Revenue Growth

IndiaMART InterMESH Limited has released its financial results for the first quarter ending June 30, 2024. The company's consolidated revenue from operations reached Rs 331 crore, up from Rs 282 crore in the same period last year, marking a 17 percent increase. This includes Rs 315 crore from IndiaMART Standalone Revenue and Rs 15 crore from Busy Infotech, which saw year-over-year growth of 18 percent and 15 percent, respectively.

Customer collections grew by 14 percent to Rs 366 crore for the quarter, with Rs 341 crore from standalone collections and Rs 24 crore from Busy Infotech collections. Deferred revenue as of June 30, 2024, increased to Rs 1,474 crore, a 23 percent year-over-year growth. This primarily includes Rs 1,421 crore from IndiaMART Standalone Deferred Revenue and Rs 51 crore from Busy Infotech.

Net profit for the quarter was Rs 114 crore, representing a margin of 30 percent. Cash flow from operations was Rs 136 crore, and the cash and investments balance stood at Rs 2,319 crore as of June 30, 2024.

Standalone Financial Highlights (Q1 FY2025)

IndiaMART's standalone revenue from operations rose to Rs 315 crore, compared to Rs 268 crore last year, indicating an 18 percent growth. This increase was driven by a 13 percent improvement in realization from paying suppliers and an increase in the number of paying suppliers.

Collections from customers grew to Rs 341 crore for the quarter, and deferred revenue increased to Rs 1,421 crore, representing a 22 percent year-over-year growth. EBITDA for the quarter was Rs 117 crore, with a margin of 37 percent, and net profit was Rs 124 crore, with a margin of 34 percent.

Operational Highlights (Q1 FY2025)

IndiaMART recorded 25 million unique business inquiries in Q1 FY2025, a 15 percent year-over-year increase. Supplier storefronts grew to 8 million, a 5 percent year-over-year increase, and paying suppliers rose to 216,000, with a net addition of 1,500 subscribers during the quarter.

During the quarter, IndiaMART also agreed to acquire a 10 percent stake in Baldor Technologies Private Limited (IDfy), an integrated identity platform offering KYC, background verification, risk mitigation, digital onboarding, and digital privacy solutions.

CEO Comments on Performance

Dinesh Agarwal, CEO of IndiaMART commented, " We are happy to start the financial year on a positive note with a steady growth in revenue and deferred revenue, along with expansion in the operating margins. On the back of a strong balance sheet and sustained cash flows, we will continue to make investments to further strengthen our value proposition, improving customer experience and leveraging growth opportunities. We are confident of the sustained long-term profitable growth as more and more businesses adopt the internet to grow themselves. "

Q1 FY25 Financial Summary

  • Total Income: Rs 366 crore (up 14 percent  YoY)
  • Revenue from Operations: Rs 315 crore (up 18 percent YoY)
  • EBITDA: Rs 117 crore (up 55 percent YoY), Margin: 37 percent
  • Net Profit: Rs 124 crore (up 30 percent YoY), Margin: 34 percent
  • Customer Collections: Rs 341 crore (up 15 percent YoY)
  • Deferred Revenue: Rs 1,421 crore (up 22 percent YoY)
  • Cash and Investments: Rs 2,150 crore

How Tata Soulfull is Disrupting the Masala Oats Category

Tata Soulfull, known for its millet-based products, introduces Tata Soulfull Masala Oats+ Dal Shakti to the Indian retail market. This new variation in the Masala Oats category combines Moong dal with the Mast Masala flavor, offering a nutritious and convenient snacking option.

Tata Soulfull has transformed the snacking industry with its non-sticky Masala Oats+, made with 25 percent millets. Dal, a staple in Indian households, is celebrated for its nutritional value and comfort. The new Tata Soulfull Masala Oats+ Dal Shakti merges the taste and health benefits of Moong Dal with the convenience of quick cooking, making it a wholesome snack. Priced at Rs 15, it provides an affordable and nutritious option for consumers.

Prashant Parameswaran, MD and CEO, Tata Consumer Soulfull said, " Tata Soulfull’s launch into Masala Oats brought disruption to the category and unlocked significant growth. Prior to Soulfull’s launch, the category was growing at 13 percent, and since our entry, we have driven category growth to 25 percent. This successful launch addressed consumer pain points by offering a 'non-sticky' proposition with the goodness of oats. We are extremely excited about our latest innovation in the category: Tata Soulfull Masala Oats+ Dal Shakti. Here, we further cater to the core taste profile and love for Indianness among our consumers by including Long Dal in a power-packed nutritional bowl. We believe this will further fuel excitement in the category and make Tata Soulfull Masala Oats+ Dal Shakti a staple in every household across the country. "
Vikas Gupta, Global Head of R&D for Tata Consumer Products added, " Masala Oats+ Dal Shakti perfectly blends the nutritional benefits of oats with the goodness of Dal protein, topped by a unique seasoning specially crafted for the Indian consumer. This product has been thoughtfully designed to offer our consumers a delightful and superior snacking experience. "

Leveraging Tata Consumer Products' expertise in the pulses category, Tata Soulfull Masala Oats+ Dal Shakti provides a nutritious snacking option. Available in a 31g pack for Rs 15 and a 500g pack for Rs 249, it ensures consumers enjoy a healthy snack without compromising on taste.

  • fmcg category

Honeywell and Air India Forge Long-Term Support Agreement for Auxiliary Power Units

Honeywell has entered into a long-term agreement with Air India Limited, India’s premier global airline and a part of the Tata Group, to provide Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) aftermarket support for both the existing and new fleets. This agreement ensures comprehensive maintenance for Honeywell APUs, enhancing aircraft dispatch reliability, fleet availability, and reducing unplanned maintenance costs across Air India’s fleet.

The Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) is essential for providing electrical power and air conditioning to an aircraft while it is on the ground. It supports passenger comfort and provides the necessary air source before the main engines are started. APUs are part of Honeywell’s extensive technology offerings that contribute to the future of aviation, aligned with key global trends in Automation and Energy Transition.

Ashish Modi, President of Honeywell India stated, “ We are delighted to strengthen our collaboration with Air India and support its fleet modernization efforts. This latest milestone in our 30-year-plus partnership reflects our commitment to advancing India’s aviation sector through innovative technology. ”

With the growth of air travel, the demand for accessible aftermarket services has increased. Under this agreement, Honeywell will provide Air India with comprehensive APU aftermarket support to maintain the reliability and efficiency of its fleet of over 300 aircraft. This includes Air India’s legacy fleet, which comprises more than 100 A320 aircraft, 15 B777 aircraft, and a new fleet of 190 B737-8 aircraft, covering Honeywell’s 131-9A, 131-9B, and 331-500 series APUs. Honeywell’s global service and support network is designed to ensure optimal performance and minimal operational disruptions.

Sisira Kanta Dash, Chief Technical Officer at Air India said, “ This agreement marks an exciting milestone in our ongoing partnership with Honeywell. It is part of our global growth and transformation strategy, aimed at achieving efficient and reliable operations, maximizing fleet availability, and meeting the needs of our customers through Honeywell’s advanced technology services. ”

With over 70 years of experience and more than 100,000 gas turbine APUs produced, Honeywell remains a leader in auxiliary power solutions. Its APUs are renowned for their reliability, playing a vital role in flight safety, operational dependability, and fuel efficiency. Honeywell also provides a global support network with integrated service solutions tailored to meet the industry’s evolving needs.

Arvind Ltd Sees 37.25 Pc Decline in Q1 Profit, Revenue Slips 1.2 Pc to Rs 1,830.6 Cr

Arvind Ltd., a leading textile manufacturer, announced a 37.25 percent decrease in its consolidated net profit, totaling Rs 43.73 crore for the first quarter ending 30 June 2024. This decline is attributed to a workers' strike and the general elections.

In comparison, the company reported a net profit of Rs 69.70 crore for the same period last year, as stated in a regulatory filing. Arvind Ltd. also noted a 1.22 percent drop in revenue from operations, which amounted to Rs 1,830.60 crore for the April-June quarter, down from Rs 1,853.27 crore in the previous fiscal year.

“The financial performance and growth of Arvind Ltd. in Q1 of FY25 were impacted by two unrelated events: the National general election and an illegal worker’s unrest ,” stated the company in its earnings statement.

The strike at the Santej factory, its largest textile facility, lasted for 21 days, significantly affecting the company’s core businesses, including the woven and denim segments, as well as the industrial and human protection parts of the Advanced Materials Division (AMD).

“ This resulted in capacity loss and challenges in executing existing orders. the strike had an approximate impact of Rs 200 crore on revenue and Rs 60 crore on EBITDA, including about Rs 11 crore in increased costs such as air freight and additional worker costs incurred to mitigate the strike’s effects. A double-digit growth of 25 percent in volume was achieved by the garments division. New customer addition and expansion into new categories in the knit garment were also seen in the segment, which is a result of our verticalisation strategy, ” said Arvind.

Arvind’s total expenses for the June quarter saw a slight increase, reaching Rs 1,789.60 crore. For the April-June period, the revenue from the textiles segment was Rs 1,350.02 crore, while the advanced materials segment generated Rs 328.79 crore. The advanced materials division faced some partial impacts from the strike.

Arvind’s total income for the June quarter declined by 1.15 percent to Rs 1,843.52 crore.

On the BSE, Arvind Ltd. shares closed at Rs 374.10 on Monday, marking a 3.26 percent decrease from the previous close.

  • Arvind Limited

Arvind Reports 40 Pc Drop in Q1 Profit Amid Inflationary Pressures

Indian clothing retailer Arvind experienced a significant 40 percent decline in its first-quarter profit, attributed to inflationary pressures that affected consumer spending on apparel, even with discounts. The company's net profit dropped to 393.1 million rupees ($4.7 million) from 658.7 million rupees a year earlier.

Arvind, known for selling international brands like Tommy Hilfiger, Arrow, and Calvin Klein, saw its shares fall by 2.8 percent following the results. The retail and textile sectors in India faced weak demand throughout fiscal year 2024, as consumers were cautious about spending on discretionary items.

The retail inflation rate for the April-June quarter was around 5 percent, mainly due to high food prices, leading to reduced spending on non-essential items. Arvind reported a 1 percent decrease in revenue from operations, with its core textile segment, which represents 73 percent of total sales, declining by 5 percent year-on-year.

The company also highlighted "illegal workers' unrest" at its largest factory, which disrupted operations for 21 days and impacted the woven and denim segments. This strike caused an estimated revenue loss of about 2 billion rupees.

To attract customers, retailers, including Arvind, have been offering discounts. Despite these efforts, Arvind's total expenses increased by 1 percent, further squeezing its margins. The advanced materials segment, which includes fabrics and protective gear for construction, saw a 4 percent decline.

Earlier this month, competitor Shoppers Stop reported a quarterly loss due to similar inflationary impacts on consumer spending. As the Indian retail and textile sectors navigate these challenges, companies are adjusting their strategies to cope with the changing economic landscape.

Elan Group Partners with CBRE for Facilities Management of Gurugram Malls

Elan Group has announced a strategic partnership with CBRE, a global leader in real estate services, for the comprehensive facilities management of its four malls in Gurugram. This move underscores Elan Group's commitment to delivering exceptional retail experiences in India for customers and visitors.

The contract, valued at Rs 7.5 crore annually, aims to professionalize mall management and maximize value for stakeholders. CBRE will use its extensive expertise in property and retail asset management to optimize operational efficiencies, implement best practices, and enhance tenant satisfaction across Elan Group's malls in Gurugram. These include Elan Epic in Sector 70, Elan Town Centre in Sector 67, Elan Miracle in Sector 84, and Elan Mercado in Sector 80.

Pooja Patti, Senior VP of Mall Operations at Elan Group stated, " Elan Group prioritizes customer satisfaction, striving to exceed expectations at every touchpoint. To further elevate this commitment, we have onboarded CBRE to manage the comprehensive operations of our four Elan malls in Gurugram. We are thrilled to associate with CBRE for their unparalleled experience and proven track record in operations management. Their expertise will be instrumental in enhancing the overall experience for both visitors and tenants, ultimately creating a thriving retail ecosystem within our malls. ”
Rajesh Pandit, MD of Global Workplace Solutions, India and Property Management for India, South East Asia, Middle East, and Africa at CBRE said, " At CBRE, we master the art of facility management, the backbone of a thriving real estate asset. Our services focus on creating an environment that fosters productivity and attracts tenants and customers. Professional upkeep of real estate assets is critical to enhance the brand image of the entire property. We are committed to delivering the highest-quality services with our team of experienced professionals, ranging from routine maintenance to strategic planning, sustainability initiatives, and disaster preparedness. We understand and customise experiences for our clients to tailor unique solutions that ensure their real estate assets operate at peak efficiency while also being prepared to handle any potential disruptions. We are glad to partner with Elan Group for their Gurugram retail portfolio. Our service portfolio will bring innovation and exceptional service to elevate their properties' value proposition and ensure a seamless customer experience, building on Elan's strong legacy. "

This collaboration is expected to significantly enhance the retail landscape in Gurugram, providing customers with a superior shopping experience and ensuring the malls operate at their best.

ITC Strengthens FMCG Portfolio with Strategic Expansions

To enhance its future-ready FMCG portfolio in the retail sector in India, ITC has launched nearly 100 superior and differentiated products annually, focusing on segments such as Health and Nutrition, Hygiene, Protection and Care, Convenience, On-the-Go, and Indulgence. Sustained margin expansion was achieved through premiumization, streamlined operations, agile cost management, and operational leverage, leading to an average margin expansion of 100 basis points per year over the past seven years. ITC’s FMCG products now reach 250 million households, generating consumer spending of Rs. 32,500 crore. The ITC Next strategy strengthens structural competitiveness and supports ITC's goal to become the No. 1 player in this industry.

Despite global challenges and subdued domestic consumption, ITC delivered a resilient performance in the past year. Gross revenue, excluding the Agri-Business, which faced regulatory trade restrictions due to food security concerns and inflation, increased by 6.8 percent. Profit after tax (PAT) for the year grew by 8.9 percent.

Over the last two years, overall revenue and PAT grew at a compound annual growth rate (CAGR) of 9.9 percent and 16.5 percent, respectively. The FMCG-Others segment saw a growth of 14.5 percent, while Segment Profit Before Interest and Tax (PBIT) grew by an impressive 38.8 percent. Despite near-term challenges in the FMCG industry, ITC’s innovative capacity, future-ready portfolio, resilient supply chains, digital investments, and focus on penetration-led growth position the company well in the addressable market potential of Rs 5 lakh crore in its operating categories.

ITC Contributing to ‘Make in India’ Vision

ITC continues to invest in building world-class infrastructure and ecosystems linked to its products and services, contributing significantly to the 'Make in India' vision. Despite its growing footprint, nearly 90 percent of all raw materials are locally procured. The extensive manufacturing network of over 200 factories supports local entrepreneurship and sustainable livelihoods. In the last two years alone, investments in three owned luxury hotels, eight state-of-the-art manufacturing facilities (including those under the PLI scheme), and the doubling of ITC’s distribution infrastructure have generated significant livelihoods. Ongoing investments in three state-of-the-art manufacturing facilities and an IT and Knowledge Centre will further enhance this potential. ITC engages with over 6,000 MSMEs, focusing extensively on upgrading their technology, quality, and skills, believing that enterprises are only as strong as their value chains.

ITC’s Digital Investments Transform Operations

ITC's digital investments drive a digital-first culture, transforming all facets of operations—from insighting to product development, smart sourcing to on-time efficient delivery, and superior brand engagement and marketing through real-time content, connect, and commerce. An intelligent big data ecosystem leveraging Industry 4.0, AI/ML, and GenAI is redefining consumer experiences and operational efficiencies. ITC’s Trade Marketing and Distribution infrastructure has evolved into a smart omnichannel network, doubling market coverage, with three out of four retailers carrying ITC's FMCG products. ITC has also launched six exclusive D2C platforms. The e-B2B platform, UNNATI, continues to scale rapidly, covering nearly 7 lakh outlets.

ITC’s Investment Outlay of Rs 20,000 Crore

Despite market challenges, ITC’s strategic investments across all its businesses enhance structural competitiveness and build an enterprise poised for future opportunities. Reflecting unwavering confidence in the India growth story, ITC has committed an investment outlay of about Rs 20,000 crore in the medium term.

Tata International Unveils Sustainable Phoenix Leather

Tata International, the global trading and distribution division of the Tata Group, has launched Phoenix Leather, an eco-friendly product under its Earthcare Leather range, reinforcing its commitment to sustainable practices. Developed in collaboration with the Central Leather Research Institute (CLRI) in Chennai, Phoenix Leather represents a significant advancement in sustainable leather technology.  

P. Rajasekaran, Business Head - Finished Leather Business at Tata International stated, “ Tata International’s Earthcare Leather range aims to lead the sustainable development of the leather industry. Despite lower demand post-Covid, we are now witnessing promising recovery with increased interest from key markets such as the USA, China, and Europe. Tata International is one of the largest exporters of leather and leather products in India. We are optimistic about sustainable and bio-based leather. The percentage share of Earthcare leather in the financial year 2023-2024 accounted for 27 percent of our total production, and we plan to increase this to 50 percent in the next 4 years. ”

Phoenix Leather is produced using the patented "GENOCORIUM" process, which transforms trim waste from leather production into high-quality reconstituted leather sheets. This innovative technology repurposes corium waste and significantly reduces water pollution, depletion, and greenhouse gas emissions associated with traditional leather manufacturing.

The Earthcare Leather range, featuring Phoenix Leather alongside bio-based and chrome-free/metal-free/aldehyde-free options, underscores Tata International's commitment to circularity and sustainability in the leather industry. Phoenix Leather stands out for its eco-friendly production process and high quality, meeting the stringent requirements of leather product manufacturers.

Tata International has significantly contributed to the 'Make in India' initiative by manufacturing sustainable leather under its flagship brand, Earthcare. The Earthcare Leather range is produced at the company's facilities in Dewas, employing more than 750 workers.

  • Tata international

Aditya Birla Group Enters Indian Jewellery Retail Market with Indriya

Aditya Birla Group Chairman Kumar Mangalam Birla announced the launch of the Group's jewellery retail business, targeting the expanding Rs.6.7 lakh crore Indian jewellery market. This strategic venture, under the brand name Indriya, represents a significant step in strengthening the Group’s consumer portfolio, leveraging its brand equity and market insights. Indriya aims to be among India's top three jewellery retailers in the next five years, backed by a Rs 5,000 crore investment.

The Group opened four Indriya stores simultaneously in Delhi, Indore, and Jaipur. The brand name Indriya, derived from Sanskrit, translates to ‘belonging to Indra’, the God of devas. The brand’s insignia, a Female Gazelle, symbolizes the senses, beauty, and grace of a woman.

Kumar Mangalam Birla stated, “ The Indian consumer is rapidly coming of age and India is perhaps the most promising consumer cohort globally. This year, we have redoubled our bet on the dynamism of the Indian consumer by launching two major new consumer brands – paints and jewellery. Entering the jewellery business is compelling due to the ongoing value migration from informal to formal sectors, the rising consumer preference for strong, trusted brands, and the ever-booming wedding market. This foray is a natural extension for the Group, which has been in the fashion retail and lifestyle industry for over 20 years. ”
Dilip Gaur, Director of Novel Jewels commented, “ Through Indriya, we are poised to redefine standards in creativity, scale, technology, and the customer experience in the jewellery sector. Our product fuses timeless craft with contemporary designs. Our regional selection celebrates unique backgrounds but opens them up for discovery across other cultures. ”
Sandeep Kohli, CEO of Novel Jewels added, " Jewellery as a category is transitioning from mere investment to a statement. Our proposition is built on perceptible differentiation, distinctive designs, personalized service, and authentic regional nuances. At the heart of Indriya's offering is the innovative Signature Experience with exclusive lounges. Customization services with in-store stylists and expert jewellery consultants promise to elevate all five senses and create an unparalleled shopping journey. Our best-in-class digital front end will create a seamless experience across digital and physical touchpoints and herald the new age in jewellery retail. ”

The Indriya stores are designed to offer a unique shopping experience. Whether it is an atelier for a discerning bride-to-be, a studio for personalized styling, or a courtyard for special occasions, the Indriya store aims to be a memorable destination for jewellery shopping.

  • Aditya Birla Group

Top 5 Sibling Entrepreneurs Revolutionizing Indian Retail

Copyright © 2009 - 2024 Franchise India Holdings Ltd

FinModelsLab

Effective Ways to Increase Earnings from Street Food in India

By henry sheykin, get full bundle.

$169$99
$59$39
$39$29
$15$9
$25$15
$15$9
$15$9
$15$9
$19

Related Blogs

  • Starting a Business
  • KPI Metrics
  • Running Expenses
  • Startup Costs
  • Pitch Deck Example
  • Sales Strategy
  • Rising Capital
  • Valuing a Business
  • Writing Business Plan
  • Buy a Business
  • How Much Makes
  • Sell a Business
  • Business Idea
  • How To Avoid Mistakes

Exploring the vibrant world of Indian street food not only tantalizes the taste buds but also presents a unique canvas for economic analysis. What factors drive the profitability of these bustling micro-enterprises? From the cost implications of ingredients to the strategic pricing in varied locales, the economics behind each savory bite reveals intricate dynamics. This introduction delves into seven pivotal questions that explore how vendor efficiency, seasonal fluctuations, and consumer preferences interplay in the bustling streets of India, shaping the financial landscapes of these popular eateries.

  • Assess profitability of Indian Street Food venture.
  • Explore typical time frame to profit for Indian Street Food.
  • Examine typical annual revenue of Indian Street Food.
  • Identify main revenue streams for Indian Street Food business.
  • Analyze significant financial risks in Indian Street Food operations.
  • Discuss strategies to diversify revenue and boost profitability for Indian Street Food.
  • Consider scalability options for Indian Street Food business.

Is Indian Street Food a profitable business venture?

The allure of Indian Street Food as a business venture in the U.S. is strong, buoyed by the increasing demand for authentic and diverse culinary experiences. When examining the Indian Street Food profitability , several key factors come into play, including market trends, consumer preferences, and operational logistics.

Starting an Indian Street Food business involves considerations from initial investment to ongoing operational costs. The cost of starting a street food stall can vary widely, but initial setup typically includes expenses for purchasing a food truck or cart, acquiring permits, and sourcing ingredients. The average cost for setting up can range from $50,000 to $100,000 depending on location and scale.

However, the potential Indian Street Food revenue streams are quite promising. Food trucks in urban areas, particularly those offering niche cuisines like Indian street food, have seen annual revenue growth averaging around 10% in recent years. With proper management, a single Indian food truck in a high-traffic area can generate upwards of $250,000 to $500,000 in annual sales.

The adaptability of the Street Food business model contributes significantly to its profitability. Flexibility in location and service hours allows vendors to maximize revenue during peak times and explore various high-footfall venues. Moreover, the Indian Street Food business model benefits from relatively low ongoing expenses compared to traditional brick-and-mortar restaurants.

Strategies to Increase Indian Street Food Profitability

  • Menu Innovation: Continually updating the menu with fusion dishes or less common regional foods can attract a broader customer base.
  • Event Catering: Expanding services to include catering for events and private parties opens new revenue streams.
  • Effective Social Media Marketing: Utilizing platforms like Instagram and Facebook for daily updates and location tracking can significantly enhance customer engagement and footfall.

Understanding the financial risks in Indian Street Food is crucial. Fluctuations in food costs, unpredictable consumer traffic, and regulatory changes can affect profitability. For instance, a sudden increase in ingredient prices can squeeze profit margins if not managed astutely. Additionally, maintaining strict hygiene standards and quality can influence customer retention and, consequently, revenue.

A specific analysis on profit margins in Indian Street Food reveals that strategic cost management is key. Typically, profit margins can range between 20% to 30%, which is appealing compared to other food service formats. This margin can be influenced by factors such as ingredient sourcing, waste management, and efficient staffing.

The scalability options for Indian Street Food businesses are relatively flexible. Entrepreneurs can start with a single cart or truck and expand by adding more units or franchising the concept. This scalability can potentially increase the annual revenue generation from Indian Street Food .

In conclusion, the profitability of street food in India and its business models in the U.S. are reinforced by a combination of cultural appeal, economic efficiency, and strategic adaptability. With careful planning and innovative strategies, an Indian Street Food venture can indeed be a lucrative and rewarding business path.

Indian Street Food Business Plan Get Template

How long does it typically take for Indian Street Food to become profitable?

The profitability timeline for an Indian Street Food business in the United States can vary based on several factors such as location, initial capital investment, business model, and operational efficiency. Typically, food businesses, including food trucks and carts, take about 18 to 24 months to break even. However, for an Indian Street Food vendor, especially one operating in a niche market, this period could be shorter or longer depending on how well the business capitalizes on its market opportunities and manages its expenses.

Assessing the profitability of street food in India involves delving into the specifics of the Indian Street Food business model . A food truck focused on Indian Street Food can leverage the mobility aspect to test different markets and locations, potentially leading to a faster route to profitability. This agility allows business owners to fine-tune their offerings and operations based on immediate customer feedback and sales data.

Initial costs for starting an Indian Street Food business often include expenditures for permits, a vehicle or cart, kitchen equipment, initial food supplies, and marketing. These costs can significantly impact the time it takes to become profitable. The ability to maintain low overhead costs and manage efficient inventory systems also play critical roles in reaching profitability swiftly.

Real-life data indicates that Indian Street Food vendors who strategically choose high-footfall locations such as city centers, festivals, and tourist spots, tend to reach break-even points quicker. These areas provide a consistent stream of potential customers and can significantly boost Indian Street Food revenue .

Tips to Accelerate Profitability in Indian Street Food Business

  • Engage actively with social media: Leveraging platforms like Instagram and Facebook for daily updates and engaging content helps in building a loyal customer base and attracts new customers through organic and paid promotions.
  • Focus on scalability: Starting with one food truck or cart, then gradually expanding to multiple units or even a permanent location as customer demand increases can significantly enhance revenue streams and profitability.
  • Offer diverse menu options: While popular items like samosas and chaat are essential, periodically introducing new and innovative menu items can keep the customer interest alive and help in tapping into different customer segments.

According to industry benchmarks, annual revenue generation from Indian Street Food can vary widely, but successful vendors often see annual revenues ranging from $250,000 to $500,000, with profit margins around 10% to 20% after the initial one to two years of operation. This demonstrates a considerable potential for profit in well-managed Indian Street Food operations.

It’s also vital to consider the financial risks in running an Indian Street Food stall . One of the major risks includes the fluctuating costs of ingredients and the potential for food spoilage, which directly impacts cost management and profitability.

In conclusion, while the path to profitability in the Indian Street Food market can be fraught with challenges, strategic planning, and operational efficiency can significantly shorten the time to break even and start generating profits. Recognizing the factors that impact Indian Street Food profitability , such as location, cost control, and customer engagement, is essential for any entrepreneur in this vibrant and growing sector.

What annual revenue can Indian Street Food typically generate?

The profitability of the Indian Street Food business , particularly in the US, is influenced by various factors including location, menu selection, and customer demographics. When exploring the Indian Street Food revenue generation, it's essential to consider these elements comprehensively.

In recent years, data from food industry analyses indicate that a well-positioned Indian food truck or cart in a city with a substantial interest in diverse cuisines can generate annual revenues ranging between $250,000 to $500,000. These figures, while variable, offer a promising outlook for those considering starting an Indian Street Food business . The scalability of such a venture can influence these numbers significantly, with options such as catering services and special event appearances enhancing the potential revenue streams.

The flexibility of the Street Food business model also allows for adjustments in operation hours and menu items, which can further maximize income during peak periods. For instance, participation in food festivals, private parties, and corporate events can provide lucrative income boosts that are not part of the daily sales figures.

Understanding the profit margins in Indian Street Food is crucial. Typically, the gross margins for street food vendors can range from 65% to 75%, depending on factors like food waste, ingredient cost, and labor. The overheads in a mobile setup are often lower than those of traditional brick-and-mortar establishments, contributing to healthier margins.

Key Strategies to Enhance Profitability in Indian Street Food Business

  • Menu Innovation: Continuously updating the menu with new, innovative dishes can attract a broader customer base, while keeping the popular staples to ensure steady income from regulars.
  • Strategic Location Movement: Utilizing data-driven insights to move the food truck to high-footfall areas during specific hours can significantly boost daily sales.
  • Effective Cost Management: Vigilant management of inventory and supplies to reduce waste and lower cost of goods sold can directly improve profitability.

Moreover, the annual revenue generation from Indian Street Food is not solely based on in-person sales. The advent of social media and food delivery platforms has opened new avenues for revenue. Implementing an online ordering system can tap into the customer base that prefers delivery, thereby complementing traditional sales and helping to stabilize income throughout the year.

It's also worth noting the financial risks in Indian Street Food , such as market saturation and variable consumer spending behavior. Yet, with a targeted approach in marketing and customer relationship management, these risks can be mitigated to ensure sustained growth and profitability.

In conclusion, while the revenue prospects for an Indian Street Food business are appealing, success largely depends on strategic planning, understanding of the market, and the ability to adapt to evolving consumer preferences.

Indian Street Food Financial Model Get Template

What are the key revenue streams for an Indian Street Food business?

The viability and success of an Indian Street Food business in dynamic markets such as the US hinge significantly on understanding and harnessing multiple revenue streams. For entrepreneurs venturing into starting an Indian Street Food business, recognizing these sources of income is crucial to developing a robust business model that maximizes profitability while mitigating financial risks inherent in the food industry.

Primarily, the revenue for an Indian Street Food operation can be diversified across the following critical streams:

  • Direct Sales from Food Trucks or Carts : This is the backbone of any street food venture, including Indian Street Food businesses. These mobile units offer flexibility to navigate and tap into different markets like busy downtown districts, festivals, farmers' markets, or private business areas. The ability to move based on customer footfall and event-centric locales is a definitive advantage, directly impacting revenue.
  • Catering Services for Events : Offering specialized catering for events such as weddings, corporate gatherings, and private parties opens a significant revenue stream. This not only helps in brand visibility but also assures a steady income source beyond daily sales. With the rich, diverse culinary palette of Indian cuisine, catered events can significantly boost profitability.
  • Online Ordering and Delivery : Leveraging digital platforms for order placements and partnering with food delivery services can significantly increase revenue. Especially in the post-pandemic era, where consumers show a preference for home delivery, integrating an easy-to-use online ordering system can attract a wider customer base unwilling or unable to visit physical locations.
  • Selling Packaged Goods : Another innovative revenue stream could be the sale of packaged ingredients or DIY meal kits of popular Indian Street Food items. This allows customers to recreate their favorite dishes at home and enhances brand loyalty and market penetration.

Recent industry benchmarks from 2022 highlight that food trucks in urban settings can gross between $20,000 to $50,000 per month, depending on location, seasonality, and menu appeal. Specifically, for Indian Street Food, the unique offerings such as samosas, biryani, and chaat can particularly stand out in a market with limited authentic competitors, thereby potentially increasing these averages.

Essential Tips for Maximizing Revenue in an Indian Street Food Business

  • Seasonal Menu Adjustments : Regularly update the menu to include seasonal specialties which can attract more customers and provide a fresh dining experience regularly.
  • Engage in Local Food Festivals : Participation in food festivals and local events not only increases visibility but also allows for premium pricing due to the specialty nature of the cuisine.
  • Utilize Social Media Marketing : Active engagement on platforms like Instagram and Facebook can help in creating buzz and attracting a younger demographic who are keen to explore authentic and exotic cuisines.

The financial risks of running an Indian Street Food stall are present but can be mitigated by strategic planning and operational excellence. Key factors, including cost management for street food vendors, effective supply chain logistics, and dynamic marketing strategies, are integral to ensuring sustained revenue and profitability of street food in India.

In conclusion, understanding and effectively managing these revenue streams and operational challenges are pivotal in determining the Indian Street Food profitability. As this sector continues to evolve, those who innovate and adapt swiftly will likely reap the highest rewards in this appetizing segment of the food industry.

What are the most significant financial risks when operating an Indian Street Food?

When discussing the financial risks of running an Indian Street Food business, particularly in the context of a food truck or cart operation in the U.S., several key factors come into play. Such ventures can be lucrative, yet they involve several financial uncertainties that can impact their overall profitability.

Firstly, fluctuations in ingredient costs pose a substantial risk. The prices of essential ingredients used in popular Indian Street Food items like spices, vegetables, and rice can vary due to changes in supply, global trade policies, or economic downturns. For instance, the price of chickpeas (critical for dishes like chana masala) witnessed a significant hike due to reduced outputs in main producing countries in 2022.

Another significant concern is location dependency and regulatory compliance costs. As food trucks rely heavily on high-footfall locations, any changes in local regulations, zoning laws, or competition can drastically affect their operations and revenue. Cities like New York and San Francisco have seen yearly variations in permit costs and regulatory guidelines which directly influences the operational costs.

Moreover, workforce management also poses a risk. The turnover rate in the food service industry can impact the consistency and quality of service, thereby affecting the Indian Street Food revenue . Training new employees results in additional costs and potential downtime, which can impede the business during peak hours or seasons. The Bureau of Labor Statistics reported a 73% annual turnover rate in the restaurant sector in 2021.

Weather-related interruptions also cannot be underestimated. Unlike a traditional restaurant, food trucks and carts are directly dependent on suitable weather conditions for customer flow. Unexpected poor weather can significantly reduce the number of days the business can operate, especially in regions prone to long winters or frequent storms.

Maintaining food safety and quality is critical and costly. The failure to adhere to health regulations can lead to fines or, worse, temporary closures. Additionally, food spoilage is a risk in the absence of proper storage facilities, especially when dealing with perishable goods common to Indian cuisine, like dairy and meat.

Key Tips to Mitigate Financial Risks in an Indian Street Food Business

  • Engage in thorough market research to strategically select locations with high traffic yet reasonable competition. Utilizing online platforms for customer feedback can also inform better location choices.
  • Adopt a dynamic pricing strategy that adjusts to changes in ingredient costs while maintaining profit margins. Bulk purchasing and negotiating with suppliers can also stabilize prices.
  • Invest in robust training programs to decrease employee turnover and implement advanced booking systems to reduce the impact of weather-related changes.

Understanding and managing these risks are crucial steps in ensuring the Indian Street Food business model's success and sustainability. While the potential for high Indian food stall profits exists, navigating these financial pitfalls is integral to achieving long-term profitability and growth in the competitive food vending landscape.

Indian Street Food Pitch Deck
Get Template

What strategies can Indian Street Food employ to diversify revenue streams and enhance profitability?

In considering strategies to increase Indian Street Food profitability , it is essential to focus on diversifying revenue streams—a reliable approach to sustain and enhance the financial health of any business. The dynamic nature of the Indian Street Food business in the U.S. presents unique opportunities to innovate beyond the traditional food truck or cart model.

Firstly, the incorporation of a catering service is a lucrative strategy. Catering for private events, corporate functions, and large gatherings can significantly boost revenue. According to industry reports, catering services can increase an establishment's sales potential by 20-30%. This is facilitated by the versatility of Indian cuisine, which can easily be adapted to both small-scale home events and large-scale corporate settings.

Secondly, leveraging the digital landscape can help Indian Street Food vendors tap into a broader market. Establishing a robust online presence through a dedicated website and active social media channels can attract more customers. Implementing an online ordering system not only caters to the convenience of customers but also adds a steady stream of orders independent of the physical location of the food truck or cart. The pandemic has shown us the power of digital sales, with some food businesses seeing an increase in digital revenue by over 50% through apps and websites.

Thirdly, expanding the menu to include seasonal and fusion dishes can attract a diverse clientele. For instance, offering a 'summer special' menu featuring lighter and healthier options, or a 'winter delight' menu with richer, warmth-giving dishes can keep the menu exciting and customers curious.

Practical Tips for Enhancing Indian Street Food Revenue:

  • Develop loyalty programs – Implementing rewards systems or special discounts for repeat customers encourages frequent visits and enhances customer retention.
  • Participate in food festivals – Attendance at local food festivals not only increases visibility but also allows testing of new menu items based on direct customer feedback.
  • Collaborate with local businesses – Partnering with nearby businesses for lunch specials or event promotions can boost sales volumes and local standing within the community.

Beyond these direct strategies, understanding the financial risks in Indian Street Food and managing cost effectively is vital for maintaining profitability. Careful management of food waste, strategic sourcing of ingredients, and efficient staffing can help in reducing operational costs, thereby boosting overall profitability.

In essence, diversification of revenue streams in the Indian Street Food business involves a mix of traditional and innovative approaches. By integrating services like catering, harnessing digital platforms for visibility and sales, expanding and adapting the menu according to customer demand and seasonal influences, and managing costs astutely, Indian Street Food profitability can see a significant upward trajectory.

What are the potential scalability options for an Indian Street Food business?

The scalability of an Indian Street Food business in the U.S. presents several lucrative avenues, particularly when considering the growing popularity of global cuisines and the mobility of food truck operations. Understanding the scalability options requires both innovative and strategic planning.

Firstly, the concept of a food truck allows an Indian Street Food vendor to tap into multiple locations, enhancing the Indian Street Food revenue potential by reaching a broader demographic. According to industry benchmarks, food trucks in urban areas of the U.S. have seen a revenue increase of approximately 12.4% from 2019 to 2022, demonstrating a strong market demand for mobile food businesses.

Expanding the number of food trucks or carts is a direct method to scale the operations horizontally. This expansion strategy does not only capture more geographical territory but also caters to diverse consumer segments at various events, festivals, and urban street corners, potentially increasing the annual revenue generation from Indian Street Food .

Another scalability option involves transitioning from a mobile-only presence to establishing physical restaurant locations. These can serve as flagship stores that provide a sit-down experience while also acting as hubs for broader culinary exploration and menu testing. The solid establishment of a physical presence can further legitimize the business, encouraging a more steady stream of income, unaffected by the seasonal variances that impact food trucks.

Franchising offers another significant growth opportunity, allowing for brand extension without the direct cost of management and capital investment typically associated with expanding an Indian Street Food business. Franchising enables the use of a successful business model by other entrepreneurs, which can lead to rapid expansion across different regions, with controlled financial risks in Indian Street Food operations.

Digital transformation through the adoption of an online ordering system and delivery services is essential for scalability. Implementing robust online platforms can tap into the Indian Street Food market analysis showing an increased consumer preference for convenience. This adaptation not only enhances the customer experience but also opens up new revenue streams in the digital space.

Key Tips for Scaling an Indian Street Food Business

  • Focus on menu innovation and regularly update offerings to keep the brand exciting and relevant, ensuring customer retention and attracting new patrons.
  • Utilize data analytics to understand market trends and customer preferences, which can guide targeted marketing strategies and efficient menu planning.
  • Engage actively with the local communities and participate in local events, which can serve as marketing tools and boost brand visibility and loyalty.

Scalability requires careful consideration of various factors, including market trends, consumer preferences, and the inherent financial risks of running an Indian Street Food stall . However, with the right strategies in place, scaling an Indian Street Food business can lead to substantial growth and profitability.

Ultimately, scalability options for an Indian Street Food business hinge on the ability to innovate and adapt in response to evolving market demands and operational challenges. With the popularity of Indian cuisine growing globally, particularly in the United States, extensive opportunities exist for entrepreneurs looking to expand in this vibrant market segment.

Expert-built startup financial model templates

Leave a comment

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Please note, comments must be approved before they are published

Street food, travel and recipes

10 Easy Food Stall Ideas in 2024 (Indian)

A collage consist of Food stall ideas

A culinary adventure through India’s bustling streets is a sensory extravaganza. Starting a food stall might be an exciting option to consider for individuals who have a taste for food and want to pursue entrepreneurial endeavors.

We’ll walk you through some amiable and practical food stall ideas in this book, all aimed at tempting palates and giving your patrons an unforgettable experience.

This article will examine ten well-liked food stall concepts that you can begin immediately to help you get inspired, including:

  • Spice Haven
  • Tandoori Twist
  • Biryani Bazaar
  • Dosa Delights
  • Bhel Corner
  • Pav Paradise
  • Desi Sweets
  • Fusion Frenzy
  • Chai Chaska
  • Pakoda Place
  • Desi Chinese Corner

Top 10 food stall ideas to boost your food business!

1.  spice haven.

Welcome your customers to a Spice Haven, where the aroma of Indian street food fills the air. Explore classic favorites including Vada Pav, Pani Puri, and a plethora of  Chaat  selections.

Stall Menu Recommendations –

  • Pani Puri/Golgappe
  • Papdi Chaat
  • Raj Kachori
  • Aloo tikki chaat

A Chaat stall

2. Tandoori Twist

Tandoori Twist will transport your patrons to the streets of India while serving up a variety of delectable kebabs, Paneer Tikka, and luscious Tandoori Chicken.

  • Chicken Kebabs and Tikka
  • Paneer tikka
  • Tandoori Soya Chaap
  • Tandorri Momos
  • Mutton Kebabs, Galouti Kebabs
  • Tandoori Chicken

Pic depicting food stall selling tandoori and kebabs

3. Biryani Bazaar

Offer a variety of Hyderabadi, Lucknowi, and Kolkata kinds of Biryani at your Biryani Bazaar to take your patrons on a gastronomic voyage.

  • Hyderabadi Biryani 
  • Kolkata Biryani
  • Lucknowi/Awadhi Biryani
  • Delhi Style Achari Biryani and Muradabadi Biryani

a food stall selling chicken biryani c24c5087 507e 438d b999 9c20f8504761

4. Dosa Delights

Dosa Delights, which offers a selection of dosas like Masala Dosa, Rava Dosa, and the decadent Cheese Dosa, will add a touch of South India to your meal.

  • Masala Dosa
  • Cheese Dosa

a street food shop sellinh dosa ac63d237 fbd8 446f bfb3 fac457e29f1a

5. Bhel Corner

Take your customers to the busy Bhel Corner and serve them a delicious selection of street food, such as Bhel Puri, Batata Puri, Jhal Muri and other light snacks made from puffed rice or Murmure.

  • Batata Puri
  • Healthy Sprouts Bhel

a street food shop selling bhelpuri 16aa29f4 61eb 4f8f 8ecd 1cbd56c39a8c

6. Pav Paradise

Make a Pav Paradise where the aroma of traditional street food, like as Misal Pav, Dabeli, and Pav Bhaji, fills the air and echoes the energetic streets of Mumbai.

  • Samosa Vada Pav
View this post on Instagram A post shared by Piyush Garg 😎 (@kitchen_wheremagichappens)

7. Desi Sweets

Desi Sweets Delight, which has a variety of traditional Indian sweets including gulab jamun, jalebi, and rasgulla, will sweeten the experience.

  • Gulab Jamun
  • Gajar Halwa
  • Moong dal Halwa

8. Fusion Frenzy

Mixing recipes from two different countries in a creative way, that what’s makes it fusion.

With creative dishes like Paneer Pizza and Butter Chicken Pasta that combine the best flavors of India and the world, Fusion Frenzy elevates the dining experience.

  • Kulhad Pizza
  • Paneer Pizza
  • Pasta with Makhani sauce
  • Aloo tikki burger
View this post on Instagram A post shared by Aditya 🧿🧿 (@foodwalebhaiya)

9. Juice Bar

Who doesn’t like  healthy  and refreshing Juices. Serving a variety of unique juices, will definitely going to attract customers. In India, the healthy lifestyle trend is soaring and people will definitely like some healthy options like this!

  • Mixed Fruit Juice
  • Banana Shake
  • Mango and Plain lassi
  • Coconut Cucumber Water

Juice Stall design

10. Kathi Hub

When you are in a run, and want to have something juicy tasty and fulfilfilling, then Kathi rolls is  one of the best options which comes into my mind.

Kathi roll stalls are very popular very popular all around India, Started in Kolkata during the British era, this food is a no brainer for us when we feel hungry.

  • Chicken Kathi Roll
  • Paneer Kathi roll
  • Chicken shwarma roll
  • Double chicken egg Kathi roll
View this post on Instagram A post shared by Kolkata Pictures | India (@kolkata.pictures)

11. Chai Chaska

Chai or Masala chai is one of the most liked and selling beverages in India. People in India love to drink tea multiple times a day. Accompanied with snacks like mathri, biscuits, chiwda and other indian snacks it is consumed atleast two times a day by chai lovers!

  • Masala Chai
  • Tandoori chai
  • Biscuits and local cookies
View this post on Instagram A post shared by Dipshikha Biswas (@trickswithdips)

12. Pakoda Place

In Winters and rainy seasons, the first thing which comes to the mind of Indians are Pakodas and if combined with a cup of masala chai, then it is cherry on the top.

Pakoda stalls are one of the most successful small ventures in India, I have never seen a pakoda stall is empty or without a dozen people.

  • Mirchi Pakoda
  • Onion Pakoda 
  • Aloo Pakoda and Aloo chop
  • Fish Pakoda
View this post on Instagram A post shared by Foodland | Food & Travel (@foodland.pune)

13. Desi Chinese Corner

Its very nostalgic to see when a bunch of teenagers orders a plate of chowmein, Manchurian and  Chicken or Paneer chilli. Indian style chinese fast foods are super famous all around India. 

  • Schezwan noodles
  • Spring rolls
  • Paneer chilli
  • Chicken Chilli

ADVICE FOR MANAGING SUCCEEDING FOOD STANDS

Choosing the correct location: the significance of high traffic areas.

Achieve success by selecting high-traffic areas in good places so that a large audience may enjoy your delicious offers.

Good Ingredients and Good Hygiene Are Essential for Success

Stress how crucial it is to use high-quality, fresh foods and to uphold the strictest hygienic standards in order to leave a lasting impression on your clients.

Customer Involvement: Establishing Connections

Create a feeling of community by interacting with your clients, appreciating their opinions, and cultivating a devoted clientele.

Presenting and Appearance: Stunning Stall Design

Draw attention with a visually appealing stall arrangement, improving your clients’ overall dining experience.

  In summary

Starting a food stall is an adventure of spreading joy via food, not just a business endeavor. We invite you to enjoy the varied flavors of India and craft a gastronomic experience that leaves a lasting impression on your customers’ palates and hearts as you investigate these amiable and practical food stall ideas.

Related Posts

best non veg in Delhi

TOP 10 STREET FOOD OUTLETS THAT SERVE BEST NON-VEG IN DELHI (2024)

street food in india - blog

Is it healthy to eat street food in India?

Leave a comment cancel reply.

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

Top most festival Products FMCG consumers search today

How right selection of fmcg salesmen improves brand market share, how most searched fmcg sales and marketing words help newbie salesman, how successful fmcg salesman starts his day, a guide.

  • How Pestle analysis helps newbie FMCG business owners grow big.

DigitalGumma

Fmcg Brands. Fmcd Consumer Products. Sales & Marketing

Indian-Snack-Platter.

How Top Indian snacks and street food helps newbie cafe owners earn more

What are some good street food ideas in india.

India is famous for its street foods like- Golgappe/Pani ka batasha/Puchki Pav Bhaji Dosa Idli

Cheese-Butter-Pav-Bhaji-and-fmcg-food-brands.

Chole bhature

SAMOSA-Originated-in-the-Middle-East-and-was-known-as-‘Sambosa.

roti Bhutta Murmure Kachauri

heese-Chilli-Toast-Sandwich.

Many other foods, whose spiced Indianised version is available –

Burger Pasta Chowmein Sandwich Momos etc

Most popular Indian Snacks and Street food

What type of Food vendors are available on Indian streets?

Street vendors:.

  • Vegetable Seller
  • Fruit Seller
  • Plastic Items Seller
  • Earthen pots Sellers
  • Loose Hosiery Sellers
  • Bangle Sellers
  • Flower Sellers
  • Ballons/Toys Sellers
  • Traffic Signal Sellers
  • Footwear Sellers
  • Broom Sellers
  • Cosmetics/Female Accessories Sellers
  • Pirated DVDs Sellers
  • Goggles/Glares Sellers
  • Second Hand Books Sellers
  • Painters/Paintings Sellers
  • Antiques Sellers/Pots/Vases/Stones
  • Swing Sellers-Jhullawala
  • Belt Sellers
  • Watch Sellers
  • Phone Accessories Sellers
  • Spices Sellers
  • Streetside Tailors
  • Sankranti Items Sellers
  • Mask Sellers

Food Street Vendors:

  • Pani Puri Stalls
  • Amla Sellers-Outside Schools/Colleges
  • Vadapav/Sandwich/Pizza
  • Chinese Lari
  • Chole Kulche
  • Lemon Water

Names prevalent in North India.

Farsaan Lari

Makaai Lari

Samosa/Kachori

Ice Cream Lari

Sabudana Khichdi

Nariyal Paani

Cotton Candy

Kharek Lari

Coffee/ Coco

Ragda Patis

How much can a street Food vendor make in India?

An average street vendor in India earns anywhere from minimum Rs. 80000 to Rs 2.5 lakh per month. Here is the calculation for a roadside Bhel – Chat vendor –

Cost of Bhel / Chat / Paanipuri = Rs 30

No of plates sold per day = Minimum 200

Business per day = 200 * 30 = 6000

Business per month = 6000 * 30 = 180000

Profit margin is approximately 60 – 70 %

So, net earning per month considering sale of 200 plates per day = 60% of 180000 = 108000

I have seen street vendors where sale per day is way more than 200. It could be upto 300 – 400 plates per day.

Considering that, Net earning per month is easily around Rs 2 – 2.5 lakh per month and that too with following benefits –

# No Income tax.

# No Room Rent. Free roadside footpath.

# No Electricity Cost

# No Investment cost. Can be started with investment of Rs 10000 – 15000

# Cheap and readily available raw material

# Only 5 hours job – mainly from 5 pm to 10 pm

# No education qualification required

# No experience required

# No risk of recession hitting the business. In fact more the recession, more their business as people try to spend more money on restaurants and prefer having street food which is cheaper than restaurants.

street food stall business plan in india

Consider the famous Vada Pav stalls of Mumbai (Indian version of Berger with potato).

Vada-Pav-and-Food-Fmcg.

Thanks to the 4th Most populous citiy in the world with 22 Million people, 5000 is still very small number. The most unbelievable fact we have to Know is that almost 97 percent of these stalls are in triple profits despite having stalls close to each other.

So no matter how many new of these stalls gets added up each day ,they will remain in profit because those are the lifelines of many people who cant afford outside meals everyday.

And the investment for this?

Stall in rent- 100 Rs a day

Investment on Making 1 Vada Pav- 5 Rs Max.

Amount of Sale- Average 70 to 100(Around the market and station areas), it is more than this.

Minimum Profit of the day- 600 to 1000 Rs Minimum. (Considering the corruption and Malpractices which are common,the profit goes beyond all these).

So at the end of the day- 450Rs per day he gets.

street food stall business plan in india

Is it true that road-side food stall owners earn more than average software engineers in India?

Consider the famous Vada Pav stalls of Mumbai (Indian version of Berger with potato). An average vada pav anywhere is Mumbai costs for 10 to 15 rupees. There are more than 5000 Stalls selling Vada Pavs in Mumbai. Thanks to the 4th Most populous citiy in the world with 22 Million people, 5000 is still very small number. The most unbelievable fact we have to Know is that almost 97 percent of these stalls are in triple profits despite having stalls close to each other. So no matter how many new of these stalls gets added up each day ,they will remain in profit because those are the lifelines of many people who cant afford outside meals everyday. And the investment for this?

Now consider an average Software Engineer in Mumbai. As a fresher an average salary in Mumbai is around 15K a month (Without considering the people got Campus Placements).

Average Salary- 15K

Daily Travelling- Around 1500Rs per month( Many of them provides traveling,so variable).

Now before jumping into conclusion just consider the cons of these stalls. The municipality never gives permission so most of these are illegal,and they can be grabbed any moment. Stall owners has to pay bribes to Police, Muncipality, Leader of the area( Mumbai special) etc. In case of a floods these small wagons are almost destroyed.

Masala-dosa-from-South-India

How much street vendor earns In india?

In a vada pav (popular snack in Maharashtra) stall about 5 people seem to work there. They open up their stall at about 4pm and work till 9 30pm.

I observed the output (number of items sold) for about half an hour.

So he sells apart from Vada pav, other items like – samosa, samosa pav, bhajji pav. Although the hot selling one is vada pav– which is indeed tasty i must say.

So for ease of calculation let us consider they sell only vada pav so that we get a margin.

One Vada pav costs rs 15.

And in that half an hour i counted them roughly selling 6 Vada pavs a minute.

So considering there is a margin of 7 rupees per Vada pav

So their working hours 5hrs 30mins— 330mins

Per min- 6 Vada pavs — total 1980 vada pavs

Margin- 7 rs

Net profit- 7×1980=13860

And they work everyday

Per month- 13860×30=4,15,800

This divided by 5 people gives about 83,160 per person per month!!

Not bad at all!!

Lucrative career option u would say 😛

Edit 1: So i have to consider the ‘hafta’ which they pay the local bodies- so after some research, i have found that it is around 300–400 per day , so roughly 10.5k a month, divided by 5, which is 2.1 k per head.

So 83,160–2,100 =81,060

Still pretty good.

Edit 2: margin of 7 is calculated as- again its a rough estimate

Potato per kg in the city is 30rupees, so per vada they maybe hardly using 100g, so 3 rupees

Pav costs 1.50rs (wholesale rate)

Other ingredients (all in miniscule amounts as one vada doesn’t contain much) – viz coriander,garlic, chilli, besan, oil, turmeric,salt- 2.5 rupees

So total is 7 rupees.

Plus garlic chutney and green chutney (both less than half a teaspoon)- 1rs

Cost of vada pav is 15rs, so a rough estimate of 7 rupees per item is profit.

Malayalee-Cuisine-Fish-Pollichathu-Fish-Banana-Leaf-wrapped-and-tawa-fried.

Is it true that road-side food stall owners earn lot more.

To start a fastfood centre you need to invest somewhere near 2.5 lakhs or in between to buy stuffs like chairs, tables, cooking stall, utensils and so. And it also includes advance to pay for the place to kick with. So first you should have 2 to 3 lakhs in your pocket

Second, you need two workers a cook and a helper. Daily wages for cook and helper is 1000 and 500 nowadays and it may differ place to place and person to person.

Third, you can run the business by two ways either by leasing it or running it by yourself (running it by yourself will fetch you more profit than leasing) and other thing to be noted is business runs great in winter season more than in summer.

Malayalee-Cuisine-and-Karimeen-fry.

Fourth, coming to the main part buying groceries costs around 600 to 1000 per day (rice, noodles, chicken, eggs and other stuff) which is sufficient to provide for 60 people (30 plates of fried rice and 30 plates of noodles)

taobao-corndog-is-a-chain-of-fast-food-restaurant-headquarter-in-ncr.-corndog-a-popular-worlds-fam

And lets say if the price for fried rice and noodles per plate is 100 and then we can expect 6000 rupees for 60 people. Out of which 1000 for cook, 500 for helper, 1000 for groceries and 500 for other stuffs like gas, rent, current overall 3000 will be reduced. So 6000–3000=3000 rupees. And do note that not everyday 60 customers will be there to buy food it may ranges from 40 to 60 people. So for 40 people it’s 4000 -3000= 1000. So your profit is around 1000 to 3000 more or less. This is one way of doing business .i.e by running it yourself

Other way is by leasing it to the cook in which you have to write an agreement. In this you have to fix a price first like 1000 in winter or 750 in summer and it ll be paid by the cook to you daily no matter what and how the business profits are. All the profits or losses will be taken by cook you ll be safe getting paid daily. At the end you ll get 30000 or 22,500

And right now he owns two shop one he gave for lease and other he runs himself . Now his earings are 900 *30= 27000 (lease shop, lease amount is 900) from one shop and 30k to 35k from other shop.

Foodie-and-fmcg-industry-

How much do street food vendors earn per day?

There’s a myth that street food vendors don’t make much money, but it’s a lie. Depending upon the location and the quality of food they provide, they can make good profits.

But if we are to talk about in numbers, then I used to know a street food vendor, which is selling KULCHE (it’s a punjabi food), he was selling 1000 kulche per day. Each kulcha is priced for 15rs per piece.

So depending upon that his income per day was about 15000rs but it’s surely was not all profit. As he had to pay for the materials. So you can say that he was making 3–5k per day in profit.

Wood-fired-brick-oven-for-Pizza

How can I start a panipuri business without a shop? How much money should I invest?

Man I want to tell you the real golden line which you have heard also

Koi dhandha chota nahi hota

So you have already seen that most of the panipuri wala doesn’t have a shop they only have a cart which you often called a thela.

So coming to your money part it only need 2000 rs as an investment thats all and you can make around 1000 rs a day easily

Guide-to-Potato-Fries-

On an average how much money do tea stalls make in India?

Tea is the most popular and most loved beverage in India. There is a majority of us who need a good cup of tea to begin the day with.

Chaishops in India can be found anywhere and everywhere. Especially near offices, highways, and market places. In fact, every workplace has a designated ‘Chaiwale Bhaiya’.

But have you ever wondered how much does a Tea-seller really earn? And How exactly the business model works?

Indian-Snack-and-Tea.

Let’s take a closer look at how much a tea seller can earn in different workplaces.

First, let us understand the working hours each tea shop has.

Tea Shops near Offices – Working 10 hours every day – Sells 900-1000 Cups.

Tea Shops on highways – Working 14 hours every day – Sells 400-500 Cups.

Tea Shops in markets – Working 12 hours every day – Sells 500 Cups.

Per Day Revenue.

Tea shops near offices – Selling 900 cups a day at Rs 5 to Rs 7 earns Rs 5300 on an average.

Tea Shops on highways – Selling 400 cups a day at Rs 10 earns Rs 4000 on an average.

Tea Shops in markets – Selling 500 cups a day at Rs 7 earns Rs 3500 on an average.

Per Day Expenses. (Including- Milk, Sugar, Tea, Ginger, Gas, and cups)

Tea shops near offices – Rs 4030

Tea Shops on highways- Rs 2350

Tea Shops in markets – Rs 2390

Income Per Month

Tea shops near offices – Rs 29040 (working 22 days a month)

Tea Shops on highways- Rs 54000 (working 30 days a month)

Tea Shops in markets – Rs 32760 (working 26 days a month)

Other Monthly Expenses (Rent, Helper, Misc.)

Tea shops near offices – Rs 1500

Tea Shops on highways- Rs 23000

Tea Shops in markets – Rs 13000

Now, Nett Income Per Month.

Tea shops near offices – Rs 27540

Tea Shops on highways- Rs 31000

Tea Shops in markets – Rs 19760

Chicken-Biryani-and-Hotel-Industry.

What type of street food vendors are available on Indian streets? Do you think we have to work on them to better their business?

Street food vendors are two types : mobile or standard place in the street or road side.

Mobile street vendors are many types : 1.carry their goods on over head 2. Pull or push carts 3. Bike 4. Mini vans 5. Goods carriers.

Standard street vendors : they own the 5 to 10 percentage of the street.

To better their business, we need to actually help them learn the art of purchasing from farmers. They actually end up paying high for the goods from the middlemens.

To better their business, we need to help them start a community where they can help each other business needs and for their welfare.

To better their business, government can include a small piece of land allocated for every township where they can start the business.

To better their business, an app can be started where street vendor is notified when the customer is searching for the product that he sells. So he can deliver the needy.

Burgersfoodphotography-foodstyling-burgerlover-cloudkitchen-zomatoindia-swiggyindia.

Which Indian dish earns the maximum profit?

There are so many dishes in India with maximum profit. Here are some:

Chole bathura

Chole Bathura is one of the most popular punjabi recipe which is now liked almost all over india and even abroad. chole stands for a spicy curry made with white chickpeas and bhatura is fried leavened flat bread.

Making cost for 4 people – ₹100 Profit – ₹300 ** Both price are approximate

street food stall business plan in india

2. Aloo Tikki

Aloo tikki is usually gave with chole (spicy chickpea curry), added with onions, sweet tamarind-jaggery chutney and hot green chutney made from green chillies and coriander leaves. The aloo tikki of north india is usually stuffed with a spiced filling of peas and paneer or chana dal.

Making cost for 4 people – ₹100 Profit – ₹200 ** Both price are approximate

street food stall business plan in india

Masala Dosa

Dosa is the very famous food in south and north India and all although they have many flavor with special coconut chutney and sauce. This is the minimum making cost with great profit food.

Making cost for 4 people – ₹80 Profit – ₹200 ** Both price are approximate

street food stall business plan in india

Dabeli is like a sandwich where stuffing is spicy potato mixture with different chutneys, sev, peanuts and pomegranate seeds. Learn to make this tasty and delicious Dabeli right from scratch.

Making cost for 4 people – ₹50 Profit – ₹150 ** Both price are approximate

street food stall business plan in india

Momos, originating from Tibet is a hugely popular street food in the country, largely in North-India. A versatile food that it is, we have a wide variety available from chicken, mutton to what we have here, vegetable momos. Since the kids love the dish so much, it is always great to make it at home.

Making cost for 8 piece – ₹50 Profit – ₹200 ** Both price are approximate

Chef-serving-momos.j

there is a list of dishes which make maximum profit in India. First of all, there are street vendors which make a profit, so below you can find all the Indian dishes who earns maximum profit.

street food stall business plan in india

Fresh charcoal synged Kabab stall:

Chicken-Sandwich.

Panipuri is a type of snack that originated in the Indian subcontinent. It consists of a round, hollow puri, filled with a mixture of flavored water, tamarind chutney, chili, chaat masala, potato, onion or chickpeas.

street food stall business plan in india

 Biryani stalls:

Biryani, also known as biriyani, biriani, birani or briyani, is a mixed rice dish with its origins among the Muslims of the Indian subcontinent. It is also one of the most famous Indian dishes which earns maximum profit.

street food stall business plan in india

Momo is a type of South Asian dumpling, popular across the Indian subcontinent and the Himalayan regions of broader South Asia. Momos are native to Tibet, Bhutan, Nepal, North Indian region of Ladakh, Northeast Indian regions of Sikkim, Assam, and Arunachal Pradesh, and Darjeeling.

street food stall business plan in india

Samosa stalls:

A samosa is a fried or baked pastry with a savory filling, such as spiced potatoes, onions, peas, meat, or lentils. It may take different forms, including triangular, cone, or half-moon shapes, depending on the region.

street food stall business plan in india

 Pav bhaji stalls:

Pav bhaji is a fast food dish from India, consisting of a thick vegetable curry served with a soft bread roll. Its origins are in the state of Maharashtra.

street food stall business plan in india

During the afternoon summer heat, when you’re out one day and on your way to meet your crazy Friend, you think of something to get to eat for both of you, and as you’ve savoured their hands’ magic for a very long time, you decide to grab a snack by the ‘Chinese Food Store’.

Imagine — there’s a large number of people, who rush daily, meeting their daily hustle needs. To get them started with switching of their ‘hunger’ buttons, the food stall helps. Each snack costs about ₹90 for a full-plate service, or about $1.26 (varies due to cost-disparity).

It’s open all day long, serving up to 50 people everyday, with almost everybody placing an order of more than two snacks. Let’s say 50 people purchase 2 snacks for ₹90 or $1.26 each from the store everyday. That’s ₹9000 or $126 (in dollars, that might sound meagre — but again, keep in mind the cost-disparity) in sales for the little road-side food stall. Assume what they spent, or lost, to be ₹1000 for the day.

Profit — ₹8000 or $112 for a single day. They don’t even pay the taxes.

Momos-@-fmcg-Frozen-Foods-and-Snacks.

Why puttu is famous in Kerala?

Image result for kerala puttu and kadala curry

Most nutritious breakfast

Nutritionists have rated puttu and kadala curry as the healthiest breakfast in Kerala . The combination of carbs and proteins is considered a great partnership according to them.

kerala-Puttu-Kari-kadale-and-Fmcg-India

What is misal pav made of?

Misal pav is a popular dish from Maharashtra. It consists of misal and pav. The final dish is topped with farsan or sev, onions, lemon and coriander. It is usually served hot with bread or rolls toasted with butter and buttermilk or dahi and papad. It is served as a breakfast dish, as a snack and also as a full meal.  Wikipedia

misal-pav-misalpav-misal-pav-farsan-misal-pav-misalpav-misal-pav-farsan-traditional-indian-spicy-dish

What is Kerala appam made of?

kerala-Appam-Kari-kadale-and-Fmcg-India

What do you eat Jolada Rotti with?

Bhakri-Pitla-and-Fmcg-India.

What Is Goan Ros Omlette?

Ros omelette , also known as  ras omelette ,  is a snack and street food in  Goan cuisine .   Ros  means “gravy” in  Konkani . It is a spicy gravy of either chicken or  chickpeas , which is often similar to  xacuti  which is commonly seen in the  Goan Catholic  style of cooking. If it is not a xacuti then it is probably a spicy gravy consisting of onions,  curry leaves , black  mustard seeds , scraped  coconut  and spices mostly prepared by Goan  Hindus . Ingredients such as  mushrooms  or  cauliflower  are also commonly used. The omelette contains  eggs , herbs, finely chopped green  chili peppers , onions (or  shallots ), finely chopped fresh green  coriander  and salt, with many variations. The ros is cooked separately. The hot ros is poured over the freshly fried  omelette  and served with Goan bread (Pav).

Goan-Ros-Omlette-and-fmcg-India.

1. Upma. This is made in entire south India and many other parts of India. The interesting reputation of this item is, it is either loved or hated by people. There is no midway.

Main characteristics: 1. Tempering spices (Thadka in Hindi, Popu/talimpu/Thiraga Mootha in Telugu) add after water. When water boils add the semolina.

Tempering variants:

  • Black gram dal, Bengal gram dal, mustard, jeera, curry leaves, ginger, green chilli, onions
  • all the above except onions (for those who don’t eat onions.
  • Black gram dal, Bengal gram dal, mustard, jeera, curry leaves, dried red chillies and asafoetida.

Samolina varients: Refined wheat, broken brown wheat, rice, jowar, bajra, maize, ragi(finger millet), vermicelli(though not a semolina) and ani other millet semolina.

So with three types of tempering and ten types of semolina more than twenty five types of upmas can be prepared.

Here I am giving a sample: 1.refined wheat semolina 2. vermicelli 3. maize 4. Jowar semolina, 5.Finger millet semolina 6. rice semolina.

street food stall business plan in india

2. Dosa: This is a thin crepe made either by wet grinding or mixing two or more powders. While one ingredient helps in making the dosa very thin, the other ingredient helps to increase the crispness of the dosa. For example: In urad dal dosa, urad dal (black gram dal) helps to spread the dosa as thin as possible while rice helps to maintain its crispness.

Batter verients:

  • Rice or any one of the millets mixed with balck gram dal and wet ground
  • Rice or any one of the millets flour with balck gram dal flour.
  • Rice or any one of the millets powder mixed with wheat flour.
  • Two or more lentils mixed with rice and wet ground.
  • Single lentle which has the properties of both spreading and crispness (Ex: Pesarattu).
  • Rice/millets mixed with beaten rice and wet ground.
  • Rice with other ingredients like coconut wet ground.

Here I am giving a sample picture: 1. Urad dal dosa 2. Pesarattu(moong dal) 3. ragi(finger millet) 4. ravva dosa (wheat samolina) 5. Neer dosa (coconut and rice) 6. Adai (mixed dal and rice)

street food stall business plan in india

3. Idlis: They are steamed breakfast item: The common idli is made by wet grinding black gram dal and adding parboiled rice semolina to it and fermented before steaming.

Batter variants:

  • Wet ground black gram dal and parboiled rice semolina.
  • Wet ground black gram dal and any millet semolina.
  • Refined wheat flour fermented with yogurt.
  • Beaten rice (poha/atukulu) fermented with yogurt.
  • Rice samolina and moong dal(yellow gram dal) samolina fermented

I am giving here a sample of some varieties. 1. Black gram dal and parboiled rice 2. urad dal and maize 3. Finger millet (ragi) and rice 4. rice and yellow gram dal (moong dal) 5. wheat semolina 6. beaten rice(poha)

street food stall business plan in india

4. Roti/Paratha: This is Indian bread taken as breakfast lunch or dinner.

The most common roti is made with wheat flour, by rolling the dough with a rolling pin.

These rotis can be either plain or stuffed with some vegetables.

Dough varients:

  • Whole wheat flour
  • Any millet flour

Cooking variations:

  • Roast without oil (called pulkha)
  • Roast with oil (called paratha) without stuffing.
  • Roast with vegetable stuffing

I am showing here a sample of six varieties: 1. Potato stuffed Paratha 2. Cauliflower stuffed paratha 3. Akki roti 4. mooli paneer paratha 5. Methi Paratha 6. Methi jowar roti

street food stall business plan in india

5. Kichidi: This called with various names in various states. In Telugu states it is called Pulagam while in Tamilnadu it is called Pongal.

Though called by different names, the main cooking method remains the same while tempering varies from state to state state.

Main cooking method: Rice or any millet is cooked along with one or more lentils with or without vegetables.

Main ingredient variations:

  • Rice/millet with moong dal (Yellow gram dal)
  • Rice/millet with masoor dal (red gram dal)
  • Rice/ millet with tour/arhar dal
  • Rice/ millet with mix of any two or more lentils.

Tempering variations:

  • Green chillies, mustard, jeera and curry leaves
  • Black pepper, jeera and cashew nuts
  • Red chillies, jeera and bay leaves
  • Green chillies, onions, garlic, cloves, cardamoms and cinnamon.

I am giving here a sample of few varieties: 1. Whole moong dal kichidi 2. moong dal kichidi with vegetables 3. Pulagam (Telugu kichidi) 4. Masoor dal kichidi 5. Pongal 6. Besibela Bhat.

street food stall business plan in india

6. Dal (Lentil): This is one of the main accompaniments for roti or plain rice in entire India. Whole lentils or split lentils (often with their hulls removed) are cooked with or without vegetables and tempering is added at the end.

Main ingredient variations:(source:  Indian Pulses – A quick guide to lentils, beans and peas – Ministry of Curry )

street food stall business plan in india

  • Jeera, red chilli and curry leaves.
  • Mustard, jeera, green chilli, ginger and curry leaves
  • Mustard, asafateda, red chilli and curry leaves.
  • Mustard, jeera, garlic, green chilli, onions and coriander.

I am giving a sample of some items. 1. Arhar dal with yellow cucumber (dosakaya pappu) 2. Gujrati style dal 3. Chana Dal 4. Punjabi dal tadka 5. Spinach and moong dal 6. Urad dal

street food stall business plan in india

7. Sweet poridge(Kheer in Hindi and Payasam in Telugu): This is a must item all over India during festivals or any special occasions.

The main characteristic of this item is rice/ other ingredients is cooked along with milk and sugar/ jaggery is added at the end along with powdered cardamom. Garnished with dry fruits and nuts.

  • Saboodana (tapioca)
  • Broken wheat
  • Poppy seeds
  • Sweet potato
  • Vermicelli/ semolina of any millet

Sweetness variations:

I am giving here a sample of some items. 1. Rice kheer 2. Saboodana kheer (Saggu biyyam payasam) 3. Broken wheat kheer 4. Finger millet(ragi) vermicelli kheer 5. wheat vermicelli kheer 6. Sweet potato kheer.

street food stall business plan in india

8. Laddu: This is a spherical shaped sweet. Like kheer, this is also made during festivals and special occasions.

The main characteristic of this item is either deep fried or roasted item is either dipped in sugar syrup or mixed with powdered sugar and round balls are made with the mix.

  • Boondi (deep fried pearls made with bengal gram dal)
  • Bengal gram flour, finger millet flour, wheat flour roasted in clarified butter
  • Urad dal or moong dal dry roasted and powdered.
  • Powder made with sev (a deep fried item)
  • Scraped coconut, peanuts, puffed Bengal gram dal, puffed rice, sesame
  • Fine wheat semolina fried in clarified butter.
  • Roasted and mixed dry fruits
  • Sugar syrup (one string consistency)
  • jaggery syrup (one string consistency)
  • Powdered sugar
  • Powdered jaggery
  • Sugarfree (only for some items)

I am giving here a sample of some items: 1. Boondi laddu 2. Tokkudu laddu (bandaru laddu-crushed sev) 3. Rava (fine wheat semolina) laddu 4. Puffed wheat laddu 5. Besan (bengal gram flour) laddu 6. Coconut laddu

street food stall business plan in india

9. Pickles: Indian meal is not complete without a pickle. Indian pickles are normally made with mango, any citrus fruit or non citrus fruits by adding ether lemon juice or tamarind juice.

Though main method of preserving is the same, different spices are added in different states.

Fruits(raw)/vegetable variations:

  • Grape fruit (dabba kaya)
  • Mixed vegetables like cauliflower, carrot, green peas etc
  • Raw green tamarind

Spice powder variations:

  • Mustard, red chilli, turmeric
  • Mustard, red chilli, turmeric, fenugreek
  • fenugreek and red chilli
  • Fenugreek red chilli and coriander(dhania powder)
  • Fenugreek red chilli,coriander(dhania powder) and somph(fennel seeds)
  • Garlic added to each of them

I am giving here a sample of some items: 1. Spicy mango pickle of Guntur 2. Lime pickle 3. Sweet mango pickle of coastal Andhara districts 4. Maharashtrian mango pickle 5. Bihari mango pickle 6. Odisha mixed vegetable pickle.

street food stall business plan in india

P.S: I have included the items which I have tasted and know about them. If there are any more items where main characteristic is same but variations in additional ingredients, please indicate. I will add them.

Every business is good till we can make the sales and get customer for our products which we deal in.

If that is pakoras or anything else.

A few important points you will have to keep in mind.

Your quality of pakoras must be really tasty.

You must deal in different varieties of pakoras. Like:

street food stall business plan in india

Masala bada.

street food stall business plan in india

Onion pakoras.

street food stall business plan in india

Paneer pakoras.

street food stall business plan in india

Mixed vegetables pakoras.

street food stall business plan in india

Bread bada.

You must serve different types of chutneys with your pakoras.

street food stall business plan in india

Imli ki chutney.

street food stall business plan in india

Lahsun ki chutney.

street food stall business plan in india

Green chutney.

You must have tea, coffee and lassi also in your menu.

street food stall business plan in india

You should start your business in crowded locality to get customer for our products easily.

You must give an attractive name to your pakoras center, that will attract more customers.

All the best for your new venture.

If you were given Rs. 50,000 what would you do to turn them into Rs. 500,000 within 3 months?

Indian Snacks and Ice cream

I am passionate about cooking and hence, would approach this business problem from my core strength.

Here is the business plan

Title: STREET FOOD – PANI PURI

Location (Assumption): Near girl’s college

Business: Street cart selling of Pani puri / Bhel puri (run by women)

street food stall business plan in india

Image source: Internet

Here is a SWOT analysis

******************************************************************* STRENGTHS

· The food-cart will be operated by two women employees. Very rare to see women selling panipuris. · The panipuri will be made fresh will spread the aroma. Eyes and smell are the triggers for purchasing food items. · Hygienic, fresh, visually appealing, aromatic and transparent food making · Fresh RO purified water will be used. · Attractive hoarding which clearly outlines not only the appetizing property of panipuri but also the low calories, digestive properties etc., · Attractive lighting and mild music · Paper napkins · Business hours: 5pm to 8:30pm

******************************************************************* WEAKNESS

· Poor location choice · Rainy season · ********************************************************************* OPPORTUNITIES

· Location near the girl’s college · After college, many students will feel hungry · Girls do not come alone and eat street food. They always come in pairs. · Girls in their developmental age, crave for lip smacking,spicy- tangy-sweet food stuff. · Ovulating girls might develop deeper sense of smell & taste and may prefer panipuri. · Panipuri is the only food substance that can stimulate all the zones of taste-buds in a person (with the exception of being bitter). · Observation indicates that many girls order two plates of pani-puris **************************************************************************** THREATS

· Outbreak of viral fever or contagious diseases (government will close all road side shops) · Lack of availability of Mint & Coriander leaves during summer · Government holidays · Bandhs / Hartals · VIP travel & Police problems · Traffic congestion and problems · Government license needs to be obtained to sell street food – cost not calculated. Data not available · The police & local politician have to be paid amounts ranging from Rs.100 to Rs.200 per day based on the location.

********************************************************

Cost calculation (REPRESENTATIVE ONLY)

· Per plate: Rs.20 · Total working days: 26 (Sundays holiday)

Expected number of customers (plate count) per hour: 100 to 300 (Two resources serving pani-puris. The owner can also pitch in if there is crowd or festival days) Min Income per evening:100 Plates sold X Rs.20/plate X 3hours=6000 /day Max Income per evening:300 Plates sold X Rs.20/plate X 3hours=18000 /day

Min Income per month: 26 days X 6000 = 156,000 Max Income per month: 26 days X 18000 = 468,000

Expenses: Cost of manpower: Rs.200 per day( total 5 hours) = Rs.400/- = 10,400 per month. Manufacturing cost: 5Rs / plate =500 ~ 1500 per day = 13,000~39,000 per month.

Cart maintenance = 300 per month.

The math is left for you to calculate how much you will get per month

***************************************************************************

You said you would give me 50K. I have made this plan with just 25K. I can use the other 25K to start another panipuri stall near school or college to increase my sales and spread my risks.

street food stall business plan in india

Thanks for the A2A!!!

Please note that the answer is written by taking into consideration only Ideal scenario into suburban part of Mumbai.

The total investment for a Tea Stall (Chai Tapri) would be close to 20000.

Let’s get back to the calculation :

(1) Deposit for a 20×30 space : 15000(can be negotiated)

(2) Shop Act license and other registration charges like obtaining NOC, agent fees etc. : 1000 (why not do it legally)

(3) Chair(s) / Desk for customer seating : 2000

(4) Material : Glass Cups, Flask, Gas Stove, Lighter, Commercial Gas Cylinder, All Utensils, Tea Powder, Coffee Powder, Milk, Tea spices(Ginger and clove powder), Cleaning powder for cleaning utensils : 3000

All the above can be considered as one time fix costs for setting up the tea business.

Apart from above costs, the recurring costs would be as follows :

(a) Tea Powder, Coffee Powder, Ginger+Clove powder, plastic cups, Cleaning powder, Milk (Almost daily, depending on sale)

(b) Rent and Electricity expenses of around 5000 (Monthly)

(c) Any wear and tear of utensils, other ad-hoc expenses

(d) Commercial Gas Cylinder (1800 for 15 days, depending on sale)

(e) Delivery boy : 8000 per month(+ tips)

Now coming to profit part, as this is an all cash business, you would start to earn from day one. You can set up a paytm account for your stall and thus can accept cash as well as digital payments.

Imagine if you are situated on a busy road of any suburban Mumbai area, and you’re selling per cup of tea for Rs. 10 and also keeping biscuits (cookies, parle-g etc.). You can also keep Mineral water for sale. Also nearby offices and retail shops would be your regular customers for which you will have to maintain a monthly account in your notebook. If your per customer sale is 15 rupees on an average and if you’re just serving 200 cups of tea + other stuff like cookies, water, your net collection per day would be 3000(which is quite normal and bound to happen in first month of business itself.

Now 3000×30=90000 per month .

Your monthly expenses would be around 40000(considering highest quality of all raw material you use)

Net Income : 90000–40000=50000 per month, (Which is an average salary in IT Industry).

Not bad!!! You must have gone through the recent news of a Pune teawala who earns 12 lacs per month in his tea business. This is not a dream figure and almost achievable during the due course of time(approx 2 years required to reach this level)

Juice bars are shops where you can find a large assortment of fresh fruit juices, sometimes served with ice-cream scoops. They are typically situated near college campuses, gymnasiums or busy streets and market places, where a lot of people can see them.

Ice cream parlours

They are shops similar to the Juice shop discussed above. You must have eaten at a Giani’s the popular ice cream parlour. Ice cream parlours typically have a cost for 2 of anywhere between 300-400. They are a small 500-1000 square feet area with a seating space of around 4-5 four-seater

street food stall business plan in india

Generally, there are two types of margin: gross and net.

Gross margin is calculated by subtracting the product cost from the price at which you sold the product.

Let’s say that you sold a cup of tea for $5.00. That is the sales price or gross revenue. The cost would include the cup, lid, tea, and water. Let’s say that the cost of good sold (COGS) adds up to $1.00. Therefore, $5 – $1 = $4 gross profit. Translated as a percentage, it would be 80% [(5–1)/5). The gross margin is 80%.

To get your net margin, you need to subtract all your additional costs (labor, rent, promotion, etc.). Calculating net margin on a per product basis is difficult and not often precise as you would need to properly allocated the fixed and variable costs to each product. As you would most likely sell different products at different volumes and different prices, it would be difficult to measure.

However, you can determine net margin on a company wide basis. Take your total sales and subtract all costs (COGS plus rent, insurance, promotion, labor, etc.). The result is your net margin (before taxes, depreciation, etc.). Divide this by total sales and you will have your net margin.

Let say over the course of a year you sold 1000 cups of tea at an average price of $3.00. Your total gross sales are $3000. The average COGS sold is $1.25 or $1250. Your gross profit is $1750 ($3000-$1250) and the margin is 58%. But you had an additional $1200 for rent, labor, promotion, etc. Your total costs are $2450. When you subtract this from $3000 ($3000-$2450) and have a net profit of $550 or a net margin of 18%.

street food stall business plan in india

Cooking classes

If you like both cooking and teaching you could start your own cooking classes. You could select a target audience (for example – Cooking for beginners or for the more experienced) and build your promotions around it. Your channel could be online or offline, both ways you would need to build an audience. If you wish to have a teach online then you could benefit via a significantly larger reach. You could record your videos and upload them on YouTube to get started. Having a few customers to begin things (who would also be willing to share testimonials) would be great. Building an active social media channel and a website will expedite your food business growth.

street food stall business plan in india

How much investment do I need to open a Vada Pav shop in India?

Depends on your location. In a busy market area or in posh localities you may have to spend over 4–5 lakhs ,just to get the space on rent. The Western suburbs would be costlier than the Eastern.

For the actual business Rs 50 k is more than sufficient. In Mumbai, the space is the most important thing.

street food stall business plan in india

Local delivery network

If you do not wish to be involved in the cooking process, you could try out setting up delivery networks. Your job would then be to connect the cooks/ restaurants to the people who are looking for tiffins and catering services. This would be fairly easy if you have a good network base of both caterers and people looking for food. To make this a success, you may want to consider tying up with PG managers, grocery shop personnel and other everyday offline customer touchpoints. In addition to this, you may also want to be a part of relevant social groups and post your ads there as

street food stall business plan in india

A Food truck is basically a mobile restaurant which can be set up by using your vehicle – a truck, car (or cart). This is a very cost-effective approach because you do not need a lot of capital to set one up, and you don’t really need to worry about the seating arrangements around or pay heavily on rental costs. However, you would need all the licenses and legal documents to start one (just as in the case of a traditional restaurant). You could open a food truck at a price point of 10 lakh. You would have to set aside a large part of that for marketing and promotions of the food truck as that is what will make your brand knows (at least to get you started). This would include a number of things – website and app, online order platforms, contact and affiliate building, digital and offline ads and so forth. On the revenue front, the typical cost for 2 can range from anywhere between 300 to 500 rupees in India. You should have a well-decorated truck, a creative menu and of course, great food to reach out to a large audience.

A Complete guide to food trucks here

Food-Trucks-and-Fmcg-

Tiffin  Box Supply

Home made food is high in demand particularly in commercial hubs where a lot of corporate employees, both young and old, work far away from home and are constantly in the look out for homely food.

Indian-Office-Workers-Tiffin-Carrier.

You could have a few clients and you could charge them a weekly or monthly fee to regularize the payment stream of this food business.

street food stall business plan in india

Top Notch Chef/Food stylist

The core job of a food stylist is to prepare food for the purpose of photography, or video shoots. They can be either hired full-time or work on specific projects as a freelancer. They must work close to the chefs and cooks, the writers and the creative teams. Such professionals are often from culinary, hotel management or gastronomy backgrounds.

 chefs-and-hospitality-industry

World Wide Festive Trends Decoded What Indian festive consumers seek...

Team DigitalGumma

How can FMCG Companies improve salesman’s technique in order to...

FMCG-Keywords-in-Digital-Marketing

Why undestand FMCG sales management? Sales management is the process...

FMCG-salesmen-Launch-a-product.

How does one become a good sales executive in the...

Follow

  • Top reasons How fmcg salesmen change distributors all newbies must know why ?
  • How a guide to Pizza and Pasta helps newbie hotel owner earn more

' src=

Team DigitalGumma

A Professional Team Of Over 25 years of experience in Sales & Marketing operations, Channel (Direct & Indirect) Development and Distribution, and Key Account Management in the FMCG Sector. AREAS OF EXPERTISE Sales & Marketing: Conceptualizing and implementing sales promotional strategies as a part of brand building and market development effort. Business Development: Handling infrastructure development of sales & distribution systems and increasing coverage & penetration to have maximum market share. Channel Management: Identifying and networking with financially strong and reliable dealers/channel partners, Super Stockist, C&F resulting in deeper market penetration and reach. Ensuring cost-effective logistic operations & seamless materials movement to ascertain sufficient inventory levels at each sales outlet/ distribution channel. Evaluating performance & monitoring distributor sales and marketing activities. DigitalGumma.com website has everything you need to create a fully personalized, high-quality free showcase website. Get the word out about all the amazing things you’re doing. Easily email your contacts or share on social media to tell everyone you know. Sell Anything Anywhere To Anyone. DigitalGumma.com is a business development platform motivated to ideate connect propagate to millions of users worldwide. Create a beautiful, professional web presence. Our expert team members collaborate across digital marketing specialties to produce powerful results. Build your next digital marketing plan utilizing the latest internet technology, explode your online presence with a Fully Managed SEO program, and maximize your profits.

You May Also Like

Wholesale-Retail-and-Fmcg-business.

Can a fmcg wholesaler make money buying and selling products

Cloud-Kitchens-In-India have kept us going during the pandemic

How cloud kitchens are helping grow fmcg and food industry?

More-money-and-margin-in-fmcg-distribution

How Challenges of FMCG Distributors are resolved by top salesmen

6 thoughts on “ how top indian snacks and street food helps newbie cafe owners earn more ”.

Pingback: How much does a PIZZA - PASTA SHOP OWNER earn in one month?

Pingback: Guide to French Fries types of Burgers sold in Food Shops

Pingback: Coffee bean = Coffee = Caffeine = Good Health+ Better Life

Pingback: How the British made huge profits In Indians drinking Tea.

Pingback: Don’t Tolerate Poor Performance and Underutilized Employees

Pingback: Master train vendor Avdesh Dubey's customers enjoy buying.

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

How to start a small fast food business in India

How to start a small fast food business in India

Indians are  crazyyy  over food. We are always ever ready to explore new cuisines and flavours in town. In fact, the Indian food market is the fastest growing industry globally with a CAGR of 9%, expecting to reach 6 lac crores by the financial year 2022-23. So, why not think of how to start a small fast food business in India.

Step-by-Step Process to Start a Food Business in India

  • Business Plan 

Business Registration

  • License and Permits 

Set-up your Business

Hire the staff, business plan.

Planning is the most crucial part of starting a business. Therefore, you need to sit down with the team and make a good plan. 

With this in mind, the questions and factors you should discuss for fast food center business plan in India are:

  • What will be the name of your business?
  • Where will you start the business (location)?
  • How much investment is required?
  • Who are your competitors?
  • What are the products they are offering?
  • What are the products you will sell?
  • How will the shares be distributed?
  • What are the materials and utensils you will require?
  • Will you do eco-friendly packaging?
  • How much is the profit margin?
  • What are the prices your competitors are selling the product?
  • What will be your prices?
  • How to get the FSSAI license?
  • What will be the business structure?
  • Will you register as a proprietorship, partnership or company?
  • What is an  auspicious day to start business in 2022 ?

To decide on a type of business, here are some opportunities with low investment and high returns.

Types of Small Fast Food Business in India

  • QSR (Quick Service Restaurant)
  • Home-Bakery
  • Fast Food Hotspots
  • Food Franchise (WOW momos, Amul, 1mg, Kwality Walls etc)

Investment 

To start your business, you will need sufficient funds to survive in the industry.

The investment required to start a small fast food business is  Rs.5 lacs - Rs. 7 lacs (minimum) .

If you have personal savings, that is great. However, if you are looking for an investment, you can go for the following options:

  • Business Bank Loan
  • Angel Investors
  • Crowdfunding
  • Funds for Government Schemes
  • Financial Bootstrapping
  • Friends and Family

After planning all the above details, register your business legally. 

Registering your business with the ministry of corporate affairs is mandatory in India.

You can register your business as any of the following:

  • Private Limited  Company Registration
  • Sole Proprietorship
  • Partnership
  • One Person Company
  • Limited Liability Partnership

The decision of the structure depends on the factors like ownership, future expansion scale and type of business. 

Therefore, consult an expert by filling the form  >>  to help you choose the best structure for your business.

While getting your company registered, the business service provider also applies for your business PAN Card. 

So, as soon as you receive your business PAN Card apply for a  Business Bank Account  to start the business transactions.

License and Permits

Along with registration, also apply for licenses and local permits to start your small fast food business in India.

The mandatory licenses you will need are:

  • FSSAI License:  It is a mandatory license for all food businesses to start in India. It ensures that the food served by you has passed all the quality checks prescribed by the government of India. 
  • GST Registration:  It is necessary if your turnover exceeds Rs.20 lacs annually (Rs.10 lacs in north-eastern states). However, if your income is below the slab, you can operate without GST.
  • Shop and Establishment Act License:  You will need to apply for a Shop and Establishment Act License for the shop/cafe/store/premises where you will start your business. 
  • Liquor License : If you plan to serve any alcoholic drinks in your eatery.
  • NOC (No-objection Certificate) : You will need some NOC's from the neighbourhood if you play music. Also, you will need a NOC from the Fire Department after they check your premises for the safety measures.

Apart from these, if you plan to start a small restaurant, you may need  6 major licenses required for restaurant in India.

Further, after planning, registration, investments and licenses, set up your space.

You will need a minimum of  200-250 sq ft  area for starting a small fast food business in India.

To find a location, get in touch with your local brokers to get the best deals.

After that, decide on a theme for your little food store and decorate it accordingly.

Install the electric fittings, furniture and light up your place. 

Buy the kitchen utensils, serving plates and spoons. Additionally, keep disposables to pack the food for delivery.

Get all the cooking items you need for the recipes. 

After that,  design a budget-friendly menu  and have chef special dishes and combos to attract customers.

To start a small fast food business, you will need at least  2 chefs  to cook delicious food as per your menu.

Also, hire at least  2 - 3 helpers  to help with cutting, chopping, packing and taking orders. 

As it is a small business you will not require more people initially.

After following the step-by-step process mentioned above, you can now start your business.

Grand Opening

Select a good day to initiate your business and plan an opening ceremony starting with an auspicious ritual or pooja.

You can invite a few close people or more if you want to for the opening and get your store decorated.

Also, you can offer a  free dish  or a  discount  in the opening week to attract a customer base.

Market your Food Business

Market your business through the following:

  • Social media channels of your city. 
  • Pamphlets in the newspaper 
  • Advertise through radios in the cities like Delhi, Mumbai and Bangalore. Because even now people are fond of radios in the car and stay updated through it.
  • Whatsapp Broadcast
  • Be available on food delivery apps like Zomato and Swiggy to get more orders.
  • Offer regular discounts and combos weekly.
  • Put your food stalls in events like the Art Festival, Music Festival and other cultural or fun entertainment occasions of your city.

To conclude, I hope this helped you know how to start a small fast food business in India. 

The concept of a fast-food business is to serve in as little time as possible. Therefore, make sure you provide tasty food quickly and at a low cost.

So, when you open a small fast food business, keep the  thought of providing your customers with affordable and tasty food to stay energized and fulfilled  throughout.

Similar Post

Blog Image

How to Identify and Validate Your Startup Idea

Blog Image

10 Startup Business Tips for the New Entrepreneurs

Blog Image

10 Essential Legal Documents For Startup

Blog Image

Digital Marketing Agency Profit Margin | Startups Guide

Flat 51% off, on startup registration.

Starteazy

Request a call back

  • Blog Center
  • Term of use
  • Privacy Policy
  • [email protected]
  • For quick query resolution
  • +91 9928380610

Registered Office Address:

  • 65, Scheme No. 3,Alwar (Delhi NCR)
  • PIN Code:301001

StartEazy Logo

Thank you for pre-registering!

Thankyou For Your Support

You're All Set!

We'll get in touch with you within 24 hours. For Faster response drop us a mail at [email protected]

Keshav Agarwal,

Cofounder, StartEazy Consulting

Whatsapp

Best Cities To Start Food Business In India [Top Locations]

Table of Contents:

1. Fast Food Business Plan

2. steps to start fast food business plan, 3. licenses needed for street food business ideas, 4. step by step guide for fast food business plan, 5. best cities to open a fast food business plan in india, faqs on street food business ideas.

Since the last decade, demand for fast food in India has increased massively. If you like to cook or want to start your own business with low risk, then you can start your own fast food business in India . Opening your fast food restaurant or setting up a street food stall is a good idea because nowadays people love to visit such places because of their busy lifestyles.

Nowadays fast food restaurants are also known as " Quick-Service " restaurants, where customers do not have to wait after placing their order rather they get their food ready by ordering immediately. These types of restaurants are very much in trend in today's busy urban lifestyle. This blog will help you with a complete guide on Fast Food Business Plan & Street Food Business Ideas as per your budget and city.

street food stall business plan in india

  • Pick A Prime Location- The success of any business is defined by its location. If you are picking the correct location for your business, the chances of getting more profit increase rapidly. When picking a location for your Street Food Business Ideas , you must choose a location where there is a lot of traffic or crowd and people can reach easily.
  • Investment- If you want to open a small scale Fast food restaurant nearby, the investment does not need to be very high. A sum of 50,000 Rupees to 1 Lakh Rupees is sufficient to open a small food business restaurant. This amount depends on your overall Fast Food Business Plan, wherein, if you want to start on a grand scale, the cost increases. If you're going for a Food franchise in India , the pricing depends on the company's current rates.
  • Profits- The Fast Food Business doesn't guarantee lump sum profits in the beginning but once your business starts to take off your earnings increase gradually. It also depends on other factors such as Staff salary, stocks, etc. If your stall garners a decent crowd daily, then the average earning can easily be traced to 3000 Rupees a day. Do not buy extra items or food stock unnecessarily and offer discounts to get profit.

To start a fast food business in India you would need these 5 licenses in order-

  • FSSAI approved Food License
  • Health License via the Local Municipality
  • Safety License
  • License Verification from Local Police
  • GST License

You have to visit the official government website of FSSAI to obtain the licenses by filling all the forms and paying a nominal fee of 5000 Rupees.

Here are a few things you may want to take note of before starting and running any Street Food Business Ideas:

  • Total Set Up Cost- Shop Rent (Rs. 40,000 Approx for a big city), Equipment and Machinery (Rs. 15,000), Raw Materials (Rs. 10,000), License & Registration (Rs. 8000), Staff Salary (Rs. 30,000), Marketing Costs (Rs. 5000), and lastly Miscellaneous expenses of (Rs. 5000).
  • Picking a Prime location
  • Equipment and Machinery Management
  • Menu Pricing
  • Staff Management
  • Profits Calculation and Cash Flow Management

  • Food Business In Delhi - Apart from being the Capital of India, Delhi is known for its intense climates, unlike Mumbai. Delhi has an extensive reach of National highways & rail networks. Good media coverage, Government offices for clearance are beneficial for conducting business in Delhi, making it one of the best cities to do street food business in India.
  • Food Business In Kolkata- Named as the city of sweets and the city of Joy, this place is home to some of the best street foods in India . With docks, ports, and airports connected to the city centre, the street food culture draws diversity from many communities. in Kolkata is filled with natural resources & living is very inexpensive, the city becomes a booming opportunity for Street Food Business Ideas.
  • Food Business In Bangalore- Known as the Silicon valley and electronic city, this city garners a humongous youth population. The tech hub of India is known for its unique and multicultural street food from Southern states including Kerala, Andra, and Tamil. Due to the easy availability of the internet, and a huge migrant community, with students and IT employees, it also observes a lot of takeout meal orders. Hence, if you live here and enjoy cooking or baking, starting a food business in Bangalore might be an outstanding business opportunity.

street food stall business plan in india

1) Cake Shops in Pondicherry 2) Cake Shops in Patna 3) Cake Shops in Nashik 4) Cake Shops in Nagpur 5) Cake Shops in Kolkata 6) Cake Shops in Pune 7) Cake Shops in Ranchi 8) Cake Shops in Patna

Stay updated with new business ideas & business tips with OkCredit blogs in English, Hindi, Malayalam, Marathi & more! Download OkCredit now & get rid of your bookkeeping hassles. OkCredit is 100% Made in India.

street food stall business plan in india

Q. Which food business is most profitable?

Ans- Fast food business in India is the most profitable food business. It requires lower investment with quicker returns.

Q. How do I start a street food business?

Ans- To start a street food business in India, one must take care of the following steps-

  • Conducting a Comprehensive Product & Market Research
  • Keeping a track of your target audience and their demographic
  • Picking a prime location for business setup
  • Ready licenses and certificates that would be required for your Fast Food Business Plan
  • Researching on your current competitors
  • Keeping safety & hygiene on top priority

Q. Is street food profitable?

Ans- Street food has gone serious since the last decade. Profits may be low , initially but most stalls can expect to turn over around 5,00,000 Rupees a year- even on a cold, wet day, they might sell Rs. 2000 worth of street food, and in a bad month could still take as much as Rs. 5000 assuming they appear at local markets a week and a few private events like weddings, birthdays, etc.

Q. What are the top 10 Street Food Business Ideas with Low Investment?

Ans- These are the top 10 Street Food Business Ideas with Low Investment in India-

  • Biriyani Stall
  • Pani Puri Stall
  • Popcorn Stall
  • Pav Bhaji Stall
  • Idli/Vada Stall
  • Chinese Food Stall
  • Cold Drinks Stall
  • Sweet & Snacks Stall

Q. What is the best food business to start in India?

Ans- These are the top 10 best food business to start in India from small to big budgets-

  • Starting a Food processing business
  • Opening a fast-food restaurant
  • Starting a Food Truck business
  • Starting a Food delivery business
  • Investing in a Popular Food franchise
  • Opening a bakery or pastry shop
  • Starting a healthy foods business
  • Starting a home-based tiffin business
  • Start a Youtube Cooking/Baking Channel
  • Starting an Indian food based Blog

Sukanya Mukherjee

Sukanya Mukherjee

Check out the best of small business ideas, information on GST, business tips & tricks & more.

Recent Posts

Cable manufacturers in india [5 best manufacturers], air compressor manufacturer in india [top 11 manufacturers], pet bottle manufacturers in india [top 7 manufacturers], paint manufacturers in india [6 best manufacturers], silk saree manufacturers in india [best manufacturers], you might be interested in, how to start a cloud kitchen business [step-by-step guide], how to start gold import export business in india, how to start a bread factory investment, tips & more.

Restaurant.store logo

  • Cloud Kitchen Equipment
  • Consultancy
  • AMC packages
  • Compare Products

Top 5 Profitable Roadside Food Business Idea in India

  • Hotel Industry
  • Commercial Kitchen

street food business ideas

Street food is something everybody loves in India. If you are a true Indian Foodie, you must be knowing all the famous street food places or food business in your town. In India we call it Khau Gallis. At khau gallis, you get to eat a variety of food with a mouthwatering mixture of tastes; sweet, namkeen, spicy, tangy, fried, steamed, etc.

Many foreign tourists have Indian street food in their checklist when they visit India. You would be amazed to know that there are many Indians who have taken Indian street food to foriegn lands and are running their businesses successfully!

Imagine the profits you can gain if you start a street food business in India where there are millions of street food lovers. The best part about the street food business is that it requires less investment as compared to restaurant or cafe business. Since there are plenty of street food business ideas, we have brought the top 5 for you. In this blog, we are not only going to offer top 5 street food business ideas in India but also help you with what all you need to start any street food business in India. So let’s get started.

Top 5 Profitable Roadside Business Idea in India

1. idli, dosa, vada food stall.

You must have eaten at an Udupi food stall where the vendor quickly prepares extremely delicious dosas & vadas and serves them with spicy coconut chutney. This street food is immensely popular in all states of India including North India as well. Though people prefer having Idli & Vada for breakfast, the stalls experience rush throughout the day. Since the food takes less time to prepare, it is an ideal street food business in India.

Equipment you would need for Idli, Dosa street food stall

  • Wet Grinder
  • Stainless Steel Idli Maker
  • Dosa Bhatti
  • Dish Wash Equipment
  • Cooking Equipment

If you wish to know more about starting an Idli Dosa restaurant in India with all the details like; selecting the right location, hiring the right staff, menu designing, marketing, etc., check out this blog How to Start an Idli Dosa Business in India

2. Sandwich Stall

You must have grabbed a quick bite of sandwich on your way home after office or during hectic shopping hours. Sandwich is a street food item that is healthy and keeps your tummy full for a longer time. There can be various types of sandwiches you can offer at your stall; veg sandwich, chicken sandwich, cheese sandwich, chocolate sandwich, etc. A commercial sandwich griller, spices, fresh ingredients, and skill of preparing tasty sandwiches, you are ready to run a sandwich stall successfully anywhere in India.

Food Business

Equipment needed for sandwich stall in India

  • Commercial sandwich griller
  • Commercial toaster
  • Commercial salamander

If you wish to know more about commercial sandwiches and wonder how to select the right commercial griller, check out this blog . You can also find the perfect guide to buy commercial salamanders here .

3. Chaat Stall

Chaat is something we cannot say no to. The most tasty treat that is filled with a wide variety of flavors, chaat in India is one of the most popular street food items. You can have a menu that has Pani Puri, Samosa Chaat, Kachori Chaat, Ragda Puri, Dabeli, and much more. Make sure you bring in some fusions or introduce unique chaat items in the menu to catch more customer attention.

Equipment needed for chaat stall in India

  • Potato Peeler

4. Momo Stall

Be it steamed, fried, or tandoor momos, this street food has a special place in every Indian’s heart. Originating from Tibet & Nepal, momos are supremely popular all over India. You can offer a variety of momos and even add Indian Tadka to all the common types of momos.

Food Business

Equipment needed for momo stall in India

  • Commercial steamer
  • Commercial fryer
  • Dough kneader
  • Commercial grill
  • Vegetable cutting machine
  • Meat mincer
  • Commercial work table

If you wish to read a complete guide to start a momo business in India, click here .

5. Pav Bhaji Stall

Let me tell you an interesting fact about Pav Bhaji. Many decades back, Mumbai had a number of mills where thousands of workers used to work. Since those workers had a limited break time for lunch and needed a lot of proteins & nutrients to work hard, some food vendors innovated a new dish; Pav Bhaji. Workers could eat the dish quickly and even get all the necessary proteins & nutrients through the mixed vegetables (Bhaji). You can introduce a variety of Pav Bhaji dishes; cheese, paneer, khada, special, dry fruits, butter, etc. 

Food Business

Equipment needed for Pav Bhaji stall in India-

Let me offer some additional tips to start a street food business in India.

  • Select a good place to start your street food business.
  • Hire the best chef for preparing tasty food quickly.
  • Purchase all the equipment from a trustworthy online store.
  • Get all the licenses done.
  • Maintain hygienic conditions (many people avoid street food due to unsanitary conditions).
  • Market your new business smartly on social media.

You can follow these street food business ideas in India and start your food business journey. If you are wondering where you can get all the equipment mentioned above, check out Restaurant.Store.

Drop us message and we’ll get back to you.

  • Full name * First name Last Name
  • Mobile number *
  • Email address *

Make an inquiry

  • First name *
  • Last name *
  • Privacy policy
  • Return & Refund policy
  • Terms and Conditions

Join our WhatsApp channel for Information

StartupYo

Top 10 Profitable Food Business Ideas In India

Profitable food business ideas, 1.food truck business, 2.catering service business, 3.homemade meal business, 4.fast food cafés and street and stall based business, suggestions, profitable food business ideas in india.

Before you decide to get bored, let us tell you that these are the business opportunities you are looking for and are totally capable to keep up with it.

So, scratch all your other plans and partner up with your friends to brainstorm about this so that you can go to that exotic-international vacation you all were planning to and you’ll be having the growing food industry to thank too, not us, here’s why.

Did you know ? An average person spends 35 %  of his income on food and beverages which includes groceries, eating out and take outs. Infact the global expenditure on food by consumers is likely to reach $20 trillion by 2030.

Read More: How To Start Food Catering Services?

There are these routine expenditures then there are the massive expenses people incur on food and beverages on occasions like weddings, concerts, parties etc which has boosted the business for the caterers, food trucks, street fast food chains etc.

Considering this individually, it’s  market size is estimated to be worth around ₹3,37,500 crore and the Indian food market on a whole is estimated to be worth at $894.98 billion.

How would you like to be a cheery on the top of this cake size food industry? Well, now you can and here’s how.

From just being established as a diner to being available at your doorstep without you having to get dressed at all, somewhere the food business grew up.

Here are the few food business ideas that won’t keep you starving.

Best Food Business Courses

Mastering the art of food business, expert courses to learn cooking.

Food truck business | StartupYo

The food on wheels business has recently gained popularity in the past 5-6 years. There are currently 21 food truck business brands with different varieties in terms of cuisines, costs, format etc.

A food truck business involves using a large vehicle to cook and sell food to the consumers. This food business allows you to cater to a wider market by moving to and fro from one place to another and attract different consumers niches.

  • Requirement: Kitchen Equipment ( grills, fryers, refrigerators, and storage), Menu pricing, Suppliers and Inventory, Vehicle, Staffing (cook, cleaners, servants), Mobile Payment Solutions, etc.
  • Organic food
  • Street food
  • Italian etc
  • FSSAI license
  • NOC. From chief fire officer
  • Vehicle license
  • Permission from the local municipal body
  • Investment required: ₹1 lakh – ₹20 lakh (Depending on your scale of operations)
  • Profits made.   : ₹300000 per month
  • Low investment in terms of capital and manpower
  • Flexible timing and schedule
  • Affordable by all consumer segments
  • Quick turnover
  • Easy expansion opportunities
  • Catering business
  • School and college students
  • Working class population

Food Truck Business Courses

Start your own food truck.

Read More: How Does A Food Franchise Work?

Catering service business | StartupYo

The catering service business majorly has those 10 million wedding which take place per year in India. It involves providing the service of food to hotels, restaurants and other specific sites.

  • Requirements: Commercial Kitchen and equipment’s , Catering Equipment ( food warmers, dishes , Buffet servers, Display stands, Sinks and handwashing stations), Suppliers and Inventory, Transportation, Food Presentation ( packaging, appealing dishes, Seasonal Specials), etc.
  • Restaurant catering
  • Alcohol license
  • Food establishments licenses
  • Other licenses
  • Investment required :  ₹1 lakh – ₹20lakh
  • Profits made.  :   ₹1 lakh – ₹15 lakh
  • Wide target customers
  • High turnover
  • Low investment
  • Word of mouth promotions
  • Restaurants
  • Events and occasions
  • Commercial offices

Best Courses for Food Business

How to start a food business.

Homemade meal business | StartupYo

In this era’s growing need of increasing one’s disposable income through their existing skills and passion for food has bought a trend of becoming an entrepreneur by selling homemade food/meals to customers.

Moreover, because of the westernization in terms of food consumption pattern and shift towards healthy food over fast food chains and increase in demand for ready to eat meals has made consumers prefer this over any of those high calorie joints

  • Requirement: menu Pricing Strategy, Packaging and Labeling, Online Ordering and Delivery System, quality control, Seasonal Offerings, online payments system, etc.
  • Lunch, dinner meals
  • GST registration
  • Food safety license
  • Investment:  ₹50000-₹1lakh
  • Profits. :  ₹1lakh-₹3lakh per month
  • Can be started at home
  • Easy marketing prospects
  • Wide scope for expansion
  • Middle and working class
  • Corporate events
  • Parties and occasions
  • Millennials and baby boomers
  • Food delivery apps: Swiggy, ZOMATO, Rapido etc

Homemade Meal Business Courses

Start your own homemade meal business.

Read More: Top 5 Profitable Small Business Ideas In India

Fast food cafés and street and stall based business | StartupYo

India comprises of 67% of the unorganized fast food market held by street food vendors and the remaining by the fast food giants like Burger King, KFC , McDonald’s etc.

The demand for fast food has been increasing because of an increase in the disposable income of the consumers and also for the rising demand of the ready-to-eat food.

Then there’s demand for the stall based dessert and juice bars contributed by the same factors except by the healthy-eating and ice cream loving audience.

Don’t worry, you can fit in here and fit in well too.

  • Requirement: Location, Interior Setup, Suppliers and Inventory, Commercial Kitchen and equipment’s ( grills, fryers, storage container), Menu and Pricing, Mobile Payment Solutions, etc.
  • Burger joints
  • Juice centres
  • Ice cream centres
  • Chinese cuisine
  • FSSAI registration
  • Food establishment license
  • Health and sanitation licenses
  • GST Registration
  • Investment required:  ₹1lakh-₹10lakh
  • Profits made:    ₹1lakh-₹5 lakhs per month
  • Wider consumer reachability
  • Bulk orders
  • Students from college and schools
  • Middle and upper working class
  • Online food delivery apps

Fast Food Business Courses

Start your own fast food cafes & stall based business.

  • These business opportunities are the most profitable ones under different investment categories suiting your capital capabilities.
  • Food industry in India has been booming because of the westernization in terms of ready to eat and quick service restaurant stations as mentioned above.
  • All of the above food businesses come with quick turnover and provide you with wide scope for expansion, giving you just the reasons you need for taking any of these opportunities up.

Sign Up For Our Newsletter

Disclaimer : The information contained in this Article is for general information purposes only. The information is provided by StartupYo (SAB Weblabs Pvt.Ltd). While we endeavour to keep the information up to date and truest to the best of our knowledge, we make no representations or warranties of any kind, express or implied, about the completeness, accuracy, reliability, suitability or availability with respect to the website or the information, products, services, or related graphics contained on the website for any purpose. Any reliance you place on such information is therefore strictly at your own risk.

Share this post:

You might also like:, how to start a mobile bar business | investment & profit, how to start an hvac business in usa | investment & profit.

tire shop in Texas | StartupYo

How to start a tire shop in Texas | Investment & Profit

Provide your details.

Analysis of street food franchise sector in India

Analysis of street food franchise sector in India

Category: food franchise.

In today’s fast-changing environment, one industry that has shown incredible growth is the food industry. In the recent past, Indian marketplace has attracted both national and international brands and many of them have gained popularity owing fantastic services, authentic ambience and genuine Indian street food. People want food free from chemical-based cuisines; moreover they don’t compromise on taste. According to current market reports, the Indian foodservice market can be segregated on the basis of food consumption in the period 2015-18  Street food – 50 % approx. Fast food – 30 % approx. Fashionable restaurant – 10 % approx. Miscellaneous – 10% approx. In India, you can eat panipuri (puchka) at a minimum INR 10. For example roadside stall owner offer 6 to 7 panipuri at Rs. 10 and still they are earning around INR 500 to 1000 a day. In street food business profit margin is high as compared to rest of foodservice segments. What attracts investors in India? Cheap manpower: When it comes to cheap manpower, India is the only nation. People are ready to work at low wage rate hence companies can minimize cost on employee salary. Governmental support: Indian government offer 100% foreign direct investment imposed no strict laws on establishment of food franchise business.Huge consumer market:Indian population is burgeoning; it is around 1.2 billion at present. India is one of the biggest consumer markets in the world appeal to investors from all over the world. Profitable opportunities: Global food industry is growing rapidly; meanwhile Indian food industry has drive effective traffic over past few years. There will be more money-making opportunities in the coming future. The Chaat Puchka street food franchise model Appetizing, competitively-priced street food available in different flavors that never offered before by anyone. Serving large customer base. ROI potential – our company owned store generate around 5000 – 6000 in tier 3 city, capital to own Chaat Puchka store ranges from 6 to 8 lakhs. Our strong team is always there to support franchisees. Turn-key design and menu. Tailored marketing plan and store auditing. Consistent improvement of menu to increase sales and marginality. We are currently seeking multi-unit as well as single unit franchisees across the Indian marketplace. Rolling-out your food franchise business career with Chaat Puchka. We offer low investment franchise opportunity so don’t waste time start today.

Search Categories

Food franchise.

  • Franchise Business Opportunities

Popular Street Food Franchise in India | Chaat Puchka

Popular Street Food Franchise in India | Chaat Puchka

Category: franchise business opportunities.

What Is Restaurant Franchise? A franchised restaurant is a restaurant brand that you as the owner may have purchased the right to use for a royalty fee. The company that...

Food Franchise Business in India with Low Investment

Food Franchise Business in India with Low Investment

For startup business visionary, franchise is consistently a better option than starting your own brand or business. Investing in a food franchise would be a great and more secure option...

Benefits of the Fast Food Franchise Business – Chaat Puchka

Benefits of the Fast Food Franchise Business – Chaat Puchka

In India, most of the people depend on the street food of the vendors and cafes selling various delicious food items. So there are many benefits of franchising a fast food...

Food Franchise

Food business opportunity in India is emerging at a very high rate in franchise field. It is one of the fastest growing industries in the country. India is a huge...

Street Food Central

  • Best Products

street food stall business plan in india

What Equipment Do I Need For A Food Stall?

A checklist of all the equipment you need to easily start a food stall business

Food stall equipment - What equipment do I need for a food stall?

Starting out in the street food business can be daunting and you will probably have a thousand questions you need answering. From what food to sell to where to sell it from.

One of the first questions you will probably have is “What equipment do I need for a food stall?”. The basic equipment you need, no matter what you intend to sell, is a pop-up gazebo, a van, catering tables, and handwashing facilities.

There are a few other basics you will need and more specialized equipment depending on what food you intend to sell to start a food stall.

In this article, I will tell you the full range of basic equipment you need along with a general list of equipment for cooking a range of different foods. From cold storage and hob burners to rice cookers and BBQs.

Street food stall equipment: The basics

There are a number of ways you can sell food when you are a mobile caterer. From a food truck, food trailer, or cart or from a pop-up gazebo (food stall). It is the last one I will focus on because it is the quickest and cheapest to start.

1. Pop-up Gazebo

Very easy to set up and the cheapest way to start a street food business . They come in a number of different sizes, 2.5m x 2.5m /3m x 3 m/4 m x 8m .

Go for a 3m x 3m industrial-grade gazebo as this is the average size for street food markets and the pitch fee is also dependent on the size of your stall.

A gazebo that I have used and recommend is inexpensive and waterproof, the “ Sorara E-z pop-up gazebo”.

You can get it here on Amazon at the latest price

As a mobile caterer, setting up and packing away at each food market or event you will need transportation, namely a van. Starting out you can either hire a van to avoid the upfront costs of buying a van outright or get a second-hand one.

You can probably get away with a small to a medium van at the beginning, but as your equipment list grows so will your logistical needs.

3. Catering Tables

You will need work surfaces to prepare, cook, and serve your food. Go for the pop-up stainless steel tables as they look more professional and are easier to store and clean.

These are a bit more expensive than, plastic, pop-up tables, but in my experience well worth the investment as they last a very long time.

I’ve written a separate article on the 5 best folding tables for food stalls that hopefully will be useful to you.

4. Cold storage

Whatever you intend to sell you need to keep your foodstuff fresh. This is particularly important when you are trading over the summer on hot days and when you anticipate busy periods and will need surplus stock.

There is nothing worse than running out of food or drink when you still have hours of trading left and people want your food.

Most traders on food stalls use portable cool boxes for cold storage, which come in a variety of sizes, from around 30L up to cool chests of 120L. A mid-sized cool box is probably suitable at the beginning.

I use the “ Igloo Unisex’s Polar 120 Coolbox, White, 114 Litre”. It keeps things cold for around 12-24 hours and gives you plenty of room to store stock.

Related articles:

  • What Food Has The Highest Profit Margin?
  • 5 Best Mobile Pizza Ovens For Food Trucks
  • What Insurance Do I Need For A Market Stall?

5. Handwashing facilities

You need running warm water and a separate area for handwashing and utensils by law in the UK (check your local laws if outside the UK) . You can get mobile hand washing units which you fill with hot water and stay warm for a period of hours.

You can also go for a pop-up sink, with an electric pump and kettle if you want something a bit more extensive.

  • 5 Best Portable Hand Wash Stations For Events 202 3
  • 4 Best Heaters for Gazebos

6. Insurance & Certificates

Again to sell food to the public from a food stall you need certain insurance and certificates by law in the UK (check your local laws if outside the UK) .

A list of what you need includes:

  • Public Liability insurance – This covers you for any claims against your business.
  • Food Safety & Handling Certificate – A day course online or at your local college. This ensures you understand the risks associated with transporting, storing, and cooking foods.
  • HACCP Plan – This shows you have a system in place for how your food is transported, stored, and cooked.
  • Register with your local Council – A food and hygiene officer will visit you at your home/kitchen/food truck and give you a hygiene rating. Having a HACCP plan is very important for getting a rating. If you don’t have one you automatically get a zero, no matter how clean your business is.
  • What Insurance Does A Food Truck Need In The UK?
  • What Food Truck Catering License Do I Need For The UK?

7. Cleaning equipment

It seems pretty obvious but when starting out and having a thousand things to do, this one can be easy to forget. I know it all seems like a drag, but once again by UK Law, you need to use a disposable blue roll and an anti-bacterial surface cleaner, and a separate sanitizer.

This will be important for your star rating when you are inspected by the local authority who will ask how you clean your set-up.

As street food becomes more popular amongst the masses, so does the competition from other food traders. You, therefore, have to stand out amongst the crowd. This involves large signage above your stall clearly stating what you sell.

You obviously need to tell people what you are selling, which involves designing and creating a menu. A good tip is for your menu to be big and clear enough for people to see at a distance or when there are crowds.

  • How To Cook Food In Large Quantities
  • 6 Ways To Secure Your Gazebo From Wind

10. Equipment storage

As mentioned in the beginning you will need transportation to move all this equipment. You will also need storage, especially if you are hiring a van. You, therefore, may want to consider a garage or dedicated storage facility.

Even if you buy a van, the amount of food stall equipment will grow over time (I assure you it will), which means you will need additional space to store it.

11. Food Storage

Most food can be cooked on-site from a food stall, but You will most definitely need some sort of food storage, whether at home or in a dedicated prep kitchen.

12. Gas or electric?

You need to decide what you will run your food stall equipment off. Gas can be cheaper to run than electricity but is a bit more expensive to set up.

You will also have to take into consideration that most food markets have an electrical capacity that is allocated to each trader. This may, therefore, limit what equipment you can use.

13. Gas canisters

If you go for the gas option, you will need propane or butane gas canisters. You can get these in a range of sizes from 3.9kg to around 19kg.

  • How To Start a SUCCESSFUL Street Food Stall Business
  • What Equipment Do I Need For A Food Truck?

Street food stall equipment: A general list

14. grill or griddle.

Suitable if you are thinking of selling grilled cheese sandwiches, hot dogs, or burgers.

Good for hot dogs, burgers, jerk chicken, and general meats.

Think potato fries, halloumi fries, fried chicken – Anything you need to fry really.

17. Cast iron hob/rings

If you intend to make curries, soups, stews, or cook anything in a wok or pan you will need one of these. Go for the industrial-grade cast iron hobs as they last a long time.

18. Rice cooker

Does exactly what it says on the tin. For cooking rice, go with curries or chilies.

You will need a large capacity rice cooker to keep up with customer demand for events, such as the “Panasonic One-Touch Commercial Rice Cooker (46 Cups)”.

19. Seating

This is not essential equipment and to be honest, most event organizers provide some sort of seating. You may want to consider seating, however, if you plan to trade as a stand-alone unit.

  • 19 Profitable Street Food Business Ideas for 2023
  • 6 Best Deep Fryers For Food Trucks
  • 5 Best Food Truck Flat Top Grills

How much does it cost to start a food stall?

Starting a food stall as opposed to buying a food truck or trailer is the cheapest option and the best way to test an idea without risking loads of money. For the basics and some general equipment, you are looking at around £4000 – £6000 . In US dollars, this will be anywhere from $6000 – $10000.

  • Second hand-Van – £3000 – £4000
  • Gazebo (industrial grade) – £100 – £400
  • Catering tables – £150 – £300
  • Handwashing facilities – £200 – £300
  • Insurance/Certificates – £200 – £250
  • Signage (banner) – £60 – £120
  • Menu – £30 – £60
  • Grill/griddle – £300 – £400
  • Cast iron hob – £40-90

TOTAL (APPROX) = £6000

You will also have to factor in ongoing costs, such as storage.

There are ways to cut this cost by hiring a van, instead of buying and sourcing some of the equipment second-hand.

Things like stainless steel catering tables are okay to buy second-hand as they don’t have any complex moving parts. However, when buying electric or gas equipment – make sure you buy it brand new.

Where to buy food stall equipment?

Mobile catering can be a niche industry which means there are only a handful of suppliers solely dedicated to catering equipment.

You can source things like cool boxes and gazebos from Amazon but if you are based in the UK, then Nisbets is hands down the best place to buy your mobile catering equipment.

It has a huge range of products and you can pretty much get everything you need for a street food business in one place.

This makes things a lot easier than trying to source bits of equipment from a range of sources.

You can view Nisbet’s full product range here.

So there you have it, a basic list of the food stall equipment you need, regardless of what food you intend to sell, to a general list that is more food type-specific.

This is just an overview, however and as you go along in your food trading career you will most likely find you need more equipment, especially as your needs change. But for now, this list will surely get you well on your way!

Gavin D

Gavin D is the founder of Street Food Central and Tru Foo Juice Bar Co. and has worked in the mobile catering industry for over 7 years.

View all posts

street food stall business plan in india

ClickCease

Setting up a Street Food Business

All you need to know about starting and running your business.

In this article

What is a Street Food business?

Once seen as a source of convenience or a passing phase in the affections of Millennials, street food businesses have soared in popularity in the last decade. Now worth an impressive £1.2 billion, street food has become a favourite of all generations, and for good reason. Street food offers restaurant-quality food at more affordable prices.

Gone are the days where street food consisted of simple burgers and hot dogs. Street food businesses now offer a huge variety of cuisine from around the world, as well as British classics that we all know and love.

This culinary diversity is one of the reasons why street food has become a great option for those looking to open their own food business. A street food business allows you to play to your culinary strengths, focus on food that you are passionate about or focus on niche or untapped markets.

Compared to other culinary businesses, setting up a street food business requires a relatively low investment. The absence of a bricks-and-mortar establishment will also result in lower overhead costs. You also have the opportunity to start small and scale up your equipment and menu as your business grows.

Setting up a street food business also does not require you to have any specialist knowledge or training. You simply need a flair for business, a strong commitment level and the ability to create great food.

There are a variety of ways you can run a street food business.

  • A food van.
  • A food trailer.
  • A permanent market stall.
  • A pop-up stall that can be transported to different events.
  • A bicycle with an attached cart.

Although originally associated with big cities such as London, Manchester and Liverpool, street food can now be found all over the country. As well as on the streets of our cities and towns, street food vans, stalls and carts have become increasingly popular at festivals, outdoor events, fairs and markets.

Setting up a street food business does not simply require you to cook delicious food. As the business owner, you will also be responsible for ordering and replenishing stock, marketing and advertising, bookkeeping, customer services, taking orders and serving food and beverages.

A street food business can be financially and emotionally rewarding. Although it can be time-consuming and often physically demanding, setting up a street food business can also be lucrative and enjoyable.

Types of Customers

Street food businesses can attract customers of all ages. Some vendors choose to focus on a particular type of customer, or target market, whereas others find that focusing on one target market can be limiting.

Choosing a potential target market could be beneficial when creating your business plan. It could help you decide the type of stock you need to order and the food you plan to sell. It can also help you choose where you will station your street food business and decide on your brand.

You can operate your street food business in a large number of places, including:

  • Hiring a pitch at organised events such as festivals, fairs and music events.
  • Street food markets.
  • Food fairs.
  • Pop-up events.
  • Social events such as weddings and parties.
  • Street festivals.
  • Events for people with specific food requirements, such as vegetarian/vegan, halal, or gluten-free.
  • Street parking in areas with high foot traffic or high concentrations of your target market.
  • Business districts, industrial parks and office buildings.
  • Farmers’ markets.
  • Organised outdoor events.
  • Sporting events.
  • Popular outdoor locations, such as beaches and parks.

When determining your target market and the locations or events you will set up your business, there are several important factors to consider.

What type of food are you going to serve?

This should be your first consideration when creating your business plan. Focusing on a specific type of cuisine allows you to perfect your menu and differentiate your business from others. You could choose to focus on cuisine from a particular country by setting up a Mexican, Greek, American or Indian street food business. Alternatively, you could choose to focus on one particular food product, such as pizzas, burgers, jacket potatoes or baked goods. Some street food businesses offer a variety of food types. You may also want to consider whether you will offer beverages and, if so, the types of beverages you will offer. For example, soft drinks, hot drinks or alcoholic drinks.

What will your business identity be?

This is how your brand will be identifiable and what will make it stand out from other street food businesses. Your brand identity will be influenced by the visual look of your business, the types of food you sell and the name and logo of your business.

What are your price points?

How much do you plan to spend on your ingredients and how much do you plan to charge your customers? The cost of your food can influence your target market as some consumers may be prepared to pay higher prices than others. The more expensive your ingredients, the higher your price point will need to be.

What competition is there?

Research your competition to identify the types of street food businesses that already exist. It may be beneficial to focus on a previously untapped niche or a product that is more likely to guarantee your success. Keep in mind that events will seek diversity in the street food that is offered. If an already established business sells the same products as you, you may not be accepted for a pitch.

Fast food stall

Equipment You Will Need

Although setting up a street food business can be a low-investment enterprise, the type of equipment you require, and the associated costs, can vary significantly. To help you plan your equipment requirements, below is a list of the equipment you are likely to need when setting up your street food business.

If you opt to run your street food business from a vehicle, this is likely to be your biggest expense.

Prices will vary significantly, based on the type of vehicle you choose:

  • A food van – This is the most expensive option. They usually come with inbuilt cooking facilities and a fridge, although some may require you to pay separately to purchase and install these facilities. Food vans can range in price from £20,000 to £200,000.
  • A food trailer – This is a cheaper option and is recommended for those who don’t need to transport their business regularly. A food trailer can often be larger than a van, allowing you to have larger cooking facilities, more stock and extra staff. The average price of a trailer ranges from £5,000 to £50,000.
  • A bicycle with an attached cart – This is a cheaper option, although your menu will likely be limited to pre-prepared food. You will also be much more limited with the amount of stock you can hold. A bicycle with an attached cart can be purchased for £2,000 to £5,000.

If you opt to run your street food business from a stand or stall, you will have different equipment requirements.

You could choose to purchase:

  • An integrated stall with a built-in canvas roof – £200–£500.
  • A standard stall with an additional gazebo – £400–£1,000.

If you choose to run a food stall, you will likely need to purchase cooking equipment and fridge/freezer separately, so factor this additional cost into your calculations.

A catering table

If you need a work surface to prepare and cook your food, stainless steel catering tables look professional and are easy to clean. It is even possible to get a foldable catering table for easy transportation. Prices can range from £50 to £250.

A food warmer

If you operate in busy areas with a high number of customers, you may want to cook some of the food ahead of time. A food warmer allows you to keep the cooked food at a safe temperature before you serve it. The cost of a small food warmer usually starts at £40, although if you require a larger warmer, the price will be higher.

Food preparation equipment

The equipment you will require for preparing food will vary depending on the type of food you are preparing. Required equipment could include chopping boards, kitchen knives, a food processor, pots and pans, a food thermometer and timers. You may also require cooking and serving utensils, such as tongs and spatulas.

Display boards and pricing

Standing out from the crowd is essential, especially if you trade at events with other street food vendors. Eye-catching display boards can help you to attract customers. It should also be easy for customers to see the pricing of your food products and any additional information, such as allergen information.

Eating and takeaway equipment

You will need to provide something to serve your food in. Options for you to consider include cardboard takeaway containers, polystyrene trays, paper napkins, cones, and paper bags for larger orders. You may also need to supply cutlery and paper straws.

Additional equipment

There are a huge number of accessories you could choose to include as part of your street food business.

This could include:

  • Tables and chairs for customers.
  • Sauce dispensers, pumps or squeezy bottles.
  • Salt and pepper dispensers or sachets.
  • A cash register and Point of Sales system.
  • Rubbish bins.
  • A sanitising or handwashing station.

Cleaning equipment

Keeping all areas of your street food space clean is imperative. You will need to clean areas regularly throughout the day to avoid cross-contamination and the breeding of bacteria. Different cleaning materials are needed for different parts of your area so you may need to invest in cloths, sponges, antibacterial surface cleaners, bleach, sanitiser, dishwashing soap and a sweeping brush and mop.

Handwashing facilities

UK law requires food businesses to have a separate area for handwashing. This area cannot be the same area you use for pot washing and other cleaning. You could choose an inbuilt sink, a portable sink or a handwashing unit.

Typical pricing street food business

Typical Pricing

Typical costs associated with running your street food business can vary significantly, depending on the type of business you run. To help you plan your street food business more effectively, below is a list of approximate costs.

Equipment costs

The cost of equipment can vary significantly, depending on the type of business you run. For example, food vans are significantly more expensive than a pop-up stall. Some equipment can be bought second-hand or rented. Alternatively, you can start small and purchase cheaper equipment and buy more equipment as your business grows. Equipment costs can vary from £2,000 to £200,000.

Licence fees

The majority of the registrations and licences you will need to apply for will be free. However, if you require planning permission, there may be an associated cost, depending on your local council. A street food licence will also have a £75 application fee + additional weekly or monthly fees.

Pitching fees or rental fees

Some events are much more expensive to pitch at than others, with prices ranging from as little as £20 to as high as £2,000 per day. If you trade at a permanent market, you may receive monthly or annual discounts.

Food hygiene certificate

You can complete Food Safety and Hygiene training on our website for as low as £20 + VAT. If you hire any employees, it is also recommended that they also undertake food hygiene training.

There are several types of insurance you may require, including Legal Indemnity Insurance, Product Liability Insurance, Public Liability Insurance, Business Vehicle Insurance and Contents Insurance. The cost of these varies depending on your coverage level and insurance provider. You can expect to pay between £100 and £500 for insurance.

Running costs

Running costs includes any costs you encounter when running your street food business. This could include your overhead costs such as electricity, gas and petrol. It could also include the cost of replacing or upgrading your equipment.

Stock and ingredients

The cost of your ingredients should never be above 30%-40% of your food sale price. This means that to estimate your food stock costs, you first need to estimate the price of your menu and the number of sales you plan to make each month. If your business plan estimates you will make £10,000 per month, your stock and ingredients should never exceed £3,000-£4,000. The lower the cost of your ingredients, the higher your profit will be. Source your suppliers and consider buying in bulk to reduce costs.

The prices you will charge will depend on several factors. Street food businesses can charge as little as £2 to as high as £15.

You should price your food based on the following factors:

  • The type of food you sell.
  • The quality and cost of your ingredients.
  • Your overhead costs.
  • The location or event you are catering for.
  • Your target market.

Safely Running a Street Food Business

As a food business, you have a legal and moral responsibility to ensure you have implemented safety measures and that relevant procedures are followed at all times.

Food businesses should receive a visit from the Environmental Health Officer (EHO) in the early stages of opening their business. The EHO will examine your food safety and hygiene practices and check whether you have the correct protocols in place. If you do not meet the safety standards, the EHO may provide you with an improvement notice. If they believe there is an immediate risk to customers, your business could be closed, you could be issued with a fine or even face imprisonment.

Below is a list of safety protocols you, and your employees, should follow at all times.

Hazard Analysis and Critical Control Point (HACCP)

HACCP helps you to manage food safety hazards that could arise when storing, preparing and cooking food. You can identify potential risks and implement measures to ensure these risks are reduced or removed. Keeping records of the actions you have taken in line with HACCP is recommended. For more information on HACCP, consult our knowledge base .

Risk assessments

Risk assessments should be carried out before setting up your business and at any other time you require them. An additional risk assessment is now required for risks relating to Covid-19.

Safely running a street food business

Keep records

The EHO may want to see up-to-date records of your business’s cleaning schedules, risk assessments, health and safety policies, allergen information and temperature checks. Keeping these records helps to protect your business and ensures procedures are followed at all times.

Safe storage of stock and cooked food

Depending on your business, you could be dealing with frozen, chilled and cooked food. Ensure stock and food are stored at the correct temperature and frozen food is defrosted safely. Visit our knowledge base for more information.

Ensure food is thoroughly cooked

Serving food that is not thoroughly cooked can be dangerous, especially if you serve meat or other high-risk foods. Cooking at the correct temperature can reduce or eliminate the risk of food poisoning. Be aware of the different cooking times and temperatures for different foods and the higher risks associated with some foods.

Having effective cleaning procedures is essential to any food business. It is recommended that a cleaning schedule or cleaning policies are in place. As part of your cleaning requirements, ensuring the personal hygiene of you and your employees and providing handwashing stations for staff and customers can also help you to safely run your business.

Training for staff

As mentioned earlier, food hygiene training is essential to food businesses. Any employees who are handling, preparing and cooking food require a Level 2 certificate. If you are managing employees, you will need a Level 3 certificate.

Legal Requirements

There are several legal requirements you should be aware of when setting up your street food business.

Apply for a food business registration

There is no cost associated with business registration and it is quick and easy to apply for on gov.uk . You must register your street food business at least 28 days before you begin trading.

Apply for a street trading licence

Different councils within the UK have different rules regarding street trading licences. Some councils do not have restrictions on where you can trade, whereas others only allow you to trade in specific pitches or on private land. Contact your local council directly for more information.

Apply for a market stall licence

If you plan to run your street food business from a stall, you must apply for a licence from your local council. You can apply for a temporary licence or a permanent licence. Your licence will include restrictions on when and where you can trade and the size of your stall. To apply for your licence, visit gov.uk .

Get a Gas Safety Certificate

Any gas equipment used for catering purposes must be inspected every year by a gas safe engineer. If your equipment is deemed safe to use and complies with government requirements, you will be issued a Gas Safety Certificate.

Obtain alcohol licences

If you plan to serve alcohol, you will need to apply for the correct permits and licences. You may need to apply for a Temporary Events Notice and Personal Alcohol Licence and an Alcohol Beverage Control certificate. Visit Street Food Central for more information on alcohol licences.

Implement a Food Safety Management System (FSMS)

Food businesses in the UK must implement a Food Safety Management System. An FSMS is a systematic approach to controlling food safety hazards. It ensures that your business is following safety protocols.

Allergen requirements

If you sell packaged foods, it is legally required that you correctly label your food products with information regarding the 14 allergens. If any of the food you sell contains any of the 14 allergens, this information must be visible and easily accessible for customers.

Positives of owning a street food business

Positives of Owning a Street Food Business

There are many benefits of owning a street food business.

A high investment amount is not required

Depending on the type of street food business you set up, only a low initial investment will be required. Not only does this mean you will begin turning a profit more quickly, but it also reduces the level of risk involved.

Pitching fees and rent are reasonably low

It is possible to find events that charge as low as £25 per day. Alternatively, if you choose to trade at the roadside, you will only have to pay for your street trading licence.

Opportunities for private work

It is becoming increasingly popular to hire street food vendors for private events, such as weddings, parties and business events. This could be a great way of boosting your income and keeps the type of work you do varied and interesting.

Flexibility

You can choose how little or often you work to fit your business around your lifestyle and determine your own working hours. Choose to only cater for specific events or run your street food business daily. You can choose whether to work weekdays and weekends, whether to operate seasonally or year-round or whether to work during the day, evening or night.

Potential for high profit

Food ingredients can be purchased at a low cost, especially if you order in bulk. You can expect to charge a high markup cost for your food, especially if you cater for events, festivals and fairs. The popularity of street food also increases the number of customers you are likely to serve and puts you in high demand.

Many of the UK’s eating hang-outs are street food markets

Street food markets have soared in popularity thanks to the excellent food, the culinary variation, attractive prices, and the potential for socialising. These markets offer customers the opportunity to eat delicious yet affordable food with family and friends in an environment that has been designed with a great experience in mind.

Negatives of owning a street food business

Negatives of Owning a Street Food Business

However, there are some negative aspects that you should first consider before setting up a street food business.

It is a lot of work and effort

Running a street food business can be physically and mentally demanding. Not only will you have a large number of responsibilities, but you may also be working long hours on your feet. A street food business requires hard work and commitment – especially when you first begin trading.

Weather dependent

As most street food businesses trade outside, the success of your business could be dependent on the weather. As the UK is famed for its cold and rainy weather, be prepared for the potentially negative effect on your profits. Because of the unpredictability of the weather, especially in Autumn and Winter, many street food vendors choose to only operate in Spring and Summer, meaning your business may only run seasonally.

Initial profits may be low

Developing your menu, building up your customer base, finding the perfect pitches and events and learning patterns in the amount of business you make can, mean the initial profits are low. Unless you have a financial cushion and the commitment to persevere through this initial stage, it may be difficult for your business to succeed.

Competitive

As street food has become more popular, the number of street food businesses has grown. This can result in a long waiting list for pitches. You also need to consider your local competition when choosing the type of street food you will sell. Not only are you competing with other street food businesses, but you are also competing with restaurants, cafés and fast-food establishments.

Limit to the amount of stock you can store

Depending on the type of street food business you run, you may be limited to the amount of stock you can store in your vehicle or stall. If a product on your menu proves particularly popular at an event, it may run out of stock quickly. You also may not be able to offer a menu that is as extensive as you envisioned.

Planning Your Street Food Business

Creating a business plan should be the first step you take when setting up a street food business. There are many factors to consider when planning your business and some important steps you should follow.

Finalise your menu

Decide what type of cuisine you will serve and exactly what will be on your menu. Consider whether you will offer sides and what beverages you will serve.

Determine the cost of your food products

How much is each item going to sell for? Will you adapt your pricing based on the event you are catering for? Consider the cost of your ingredients before determining your pricing.

Decide your target market

This can help you to plan your business more effectively. Your target market can help determine how you will run your business, the locations and events you will trade at, and your business brand.

Consider where your business will operate

Are you going to trade at organised events, such as festivals and food fairs? Will you cater for private events, such as weddings? Are you going to trade at a market or operate as a street trader?

Plan your equipment requirements

Look at our list of equipment above to help you plan the equipment you require for your street food business. Once you have determined your requirements, you can begin to source and purchase your equipment. Consider the pros and cons of renting vs buying and new equipment vs used equipment.

Calculate start-up and running costs

Calculating your initial investment requirements can help you see how long it will be until you start turning a profit. Can you fund the start-up costs yourself or do you need to apply for a loan or investment? Being aware of running costs helps you to see how much net profit you need to make each month.

Develop your business plan

A business plan can help you to establish costs, potential profits, your product range and your trading plan. Take a look at our business plan template to help you effectively plan your street food business.

Ensure you have followed all legal requirements

This helps you to avoid any fines or delays in opening your business. Consult our list of legal requirements above to check you have complied with all requirements.

Download our business plan

Food hygiene for catering units slide

Food Safety and Hygiene for Catering Level 2

Allergen Awareness Unit page

Allergen Awareness

Food Safety for Catering Level 3 Unit page

Food Safety for Catering Level 3

Food Safety for Retail Unit page

Food Safety and Hygiene for Retail Level 2

Celebrating our clients and partners.

Greggs

Chaat ka Chaska

Benefits of street food business

Opening your own street food venture or setting up a stall is a great idea because nowadays people like to visit such places due to their busy routine. Nowadays street food ventures are also known as quick-service restaurants, where customers do not have to wait after placing their order, instead, they get their food ready by ordering immediately. In today’s busy routine, this type of venture is very popular.

But in today’s time, it is not so easy to start a street food venture and succeed in it. Here I am going to give you some tips related to this venture through our blog, which will help you at the beginning of your new journey.

How to start the street food business?</h2

● First of all, you have to prepare a good business plan for yourself. A good business plan will include many things like how your business will start, total expenses, profits and estimating your customers etc. Apart from this, you will also have to take care of other things like necessary licenses, permits from the government, etc.

● Apart from this, you also have to get a license related to the food department. For this, you will first have to go to the food office in your area and get the relevant information and get your documents. Before you get this license, your goods and place will be tested by the Food Department.

● To establish your good image in the market, you should serve good quality and tasty food from your restaurant, so that it attracts other customers too.

● You have to keep in mind that people like to eat outside, but they do not compromise on their health for this at all. So make sure to keep this in mind when choosing menus and other options for your restaurant.

● As the owner of a restaurant, you have to take responsibility for other things besides taking orders and delivering. Because customers do not accept compromise in anything.

Benefits Of Running Street Food Ventures

Street food ventures are popular all over India; The success of many ventures has demonstrated their impact on the consumer market. With the increasing range of fast food options, you can be absolutely sure that your customers are ready and waiting to buy your products. Here are some of the benefits or risks of street food:

1. It is easy to market

Street food ventures profit from the consumer’s desire for convenience. With increasing disposable income, consumers with busy lifestyles are likely to work longer hours to eat at fast-food restaurants or order takeaways than cooking for themselves.

2. They can be run cheaply

Street food ventures make a profit on cheaply priced food, which means that the ingredients are also inexpensive to source. With so many options in the market, opening a fast-food franchise allows you to sell fast food at a competitive price, making a profit

You can also get workers cheaply while running a street food venture, although you will need a few experienced cooks, most of your workforce will be made up of temporary, part-time servers with significantly lower salaries.

3. Not limited to the outlet

While street food ventures are quick-service restaurants that quickly prepare and serve food to consumers on the go, many street food enterprises also use user-friendly delivery apps to deliver their goods to their customers.

4. You can cater to a wide variety of tastes

Fast food no longer means junk food, its reputation for being unhealthy is disappearing as street food ventures are meeting the growing demand for healthier alternatives and varieties. The more health-conscious public is increasingly turning away from the health hazards of takeaway food cans. Major street food enterprises are responding to consumer demand for low-fat, low-sugar and low-salt food options by adding healthy, light options to the menu.

The scope of possibility is immense when opening a street food venture. Nowadays fast food comes in the form of quick answers to cuisines around the world, baked goods like pizzas, pastries and sandwiches, and healthy food and beverage options riding the environmental awareness wave.

5. Make it sustainable

Plastic cutlery is all commonly found in street food ventures instead of plastic cutlery most of the street food ventures are now start using wooden cutlery. However, consumers are increasingly turning against goods that harm the environment.

By making a point of staying in touch with customer concern and providing compostable knives and forks, recyclable trays and paper straws, you are likely to attract consumers who are turning away from less environmentally friendly competitors. If you want to invest in a street food franchise, then there is no better place than Chaat Ka Chaska .

Next Post Multi-Cuisines Delicious Foods to Try While Travelling in India

Leave a reply cancel reply.

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

Please enter an answer in digits: fourteen + eighteen =

  • Franchise by City
  • Privacy Policy

Address:  Wynn Plaza, C-2, Acharya Niketan, Mayur Vihar, New Delhi, Delhi 110091 Mob: +91 7838938556 Toll-Free: 1800 11 9499 Email: [email protected]

  • Our Presence

WhatsApp us

IMAGES

  1. Top Tips For Starting Profitable Roadside Food Stall Business in India

    street food stall business plan in india

  2. How To Start Pani-Puri Business In India? Pani Puri Stall Cost

    street food stall business plan in india

  3. indian street food stall

    street food stall business plan in india

  4. Street Stalls in Pune: Best Street Foods to Eat

    street food stall business plan in india

  5. Some elements of food stall setup

    street food stall business plan in india

  6. Eat the streets: discovering Mumbai’s best street food

    street food stall business plan in india

COMMENTS

  1. How to Start Street Food Business in India

    India is home to a variety of cultures and has a thriving street food scene. With a booming food industry, starting a street food business can be a lucrative and fulfilling venture. Below we learn about a detailed guide on how to start a street food business in India, covering aspects such as choosing the right location, obtaining licenses, setting up the stall, marketing, and more.

  2. Profitable Street Food Business Ideas with Low Investment

    Profitable Street Food Business Ideas with Low Investment Introduction to profitable street food business ideas with low investment: India's street food market is growing rapidly. We have compiled a list of the top street food business ideas that are suitable for any city. These businesses also require very low startup costs.

  3. Top 10 Profitable Street Food Business Ideas

    Apart from the above list of street food business ideas, you can open any type of street food stall with products that have local demand. A street food stall in the right location has the ability to generate sufficient profit.

  4. How To Start Food Cart Business in India

    Starting a food cart business in India requires careful planning, dedication, and hard work. By following these steps and staying adaptable to changing market conditions, you can turn your culinary passion into a successful and profitable venture. So, roll up your sleeves, get cooking, and embark on the exciting journey of entrepreneurship in ...

  5. How to Start a Small Street Food Outlet in India

    Street food business in India is a booming one with plenty of lip-smacking street foods sold by hawkers and vendors in a portable stall. If you are considering starting a street food outlet in India, here are some top tips for starting a fast food joint in an Indian city.

  6. Top Tips For Starting Profitable Roadside Food Stall Business in India

    A food cart business is more manageable regarding costs and resources than starting a traditional restaurant. Starting a roadside food stall business in India offers several advantages, such as low startup costs, flexibility, and high demand for street food in the country.

  7. How to Start a Street Food Cart Business

    Thinking about starting a street food cart business? From idea to planning and implementation, here is everything you need to know to succed.

  8. SoulGappa, a Food Startup Revolutionizing the Billion-dollar Indian

    Retail India - SoulGappa has been built on extensive research and a commitment to providing safe and hygienic street food options.

  9. How to Start a Food Truck Business in India

    Complete Guide to start a food truck business in India. Learn how to Choose the right vehicle, find the perfect location, secure permits, manage staff and more.

  10. Effective Ways to Increase Earnings from Street Food in India

    Starting an Indian Street Food business involves considerations from initial investment to ongoing operational costs. The cost of starting a street food stall can vary widely, but initial setup typically includes expenses for purchasing a food truck or cart, acquiring permits, and sourcing ingredients. The average cost for setting up can range from $50,000 to $100,000 depending on location and ...

  11. How to write a business plan for a street food stall?

    When writing the strategy section of a business plan for your street food stall, it is essential to include information about your competitive edge, pricing strategy, sales & marketing plan, milestones, and risks and mitigants. The competitive edge subsection should explain what sets your company apart from its competitors.

  12. 10 Easy Food Stall Ideas in 2024 (Indian)

    Explore best indian food stall ideas that celebrate the diverse flavors of India. From street eats to innovative fusions.

  13. Can I invest start a food business with or without a shop?

    Guide to a list of popular snacks and regional delicacies tried tested and successful across India. The cost Plan and effort required to start a food Business

  14. How to start a small fast food business in India

    Indians are crazyyy over food. We are always ever ready to explore new cuisines and flavours in town. In fact, the Indian food market is the fastest growing industry globally with a CAGR of 9%, expecting to reach 6 lac crores by the financial year 2022-23. So, why not think of how to start a small fast food business in India.

  15. Best Cities To Start Food Business In India [Top Locations]

    1. Fast Food Business Plan Since the last decade, demand for fast food in India has increased massively. If you like to cook or want to start your own business with low risk, then you can start your own fast food business in India. Opening your fast food restaurant or setting up a street food stall is a good idea because nowadays people love to visit such places because of their busy lifestyles.

  16. Top 5 Profitable Roadside Food Business Idea in India

    Top 5 Profitable Roadside Business Idea in India. 1. Idli, Dosa, Vada Food Stall. You must have eaten at an Udupi food stall where the vendor quickly prepares extremely delicious dosas & vadas and serves them with spicy coconut chutney.

  17. Top 10 Profitable Food Business Ideas In India

    Content. [ hide] Profitable Food Business Ideas In India. Profitable food business ideas. 1.Food truck business. 2.Catering service business. 3.Homemade meal business. 4.Fast food cafés and street and stall based business. Suggestions.

  18. Analysis of street food franchise sector in India

    For example roadside stall owner offer 6 to 7 panipuri at Rs. 10 and still they are earning around INR 500 to 1000 a day. In street food business profit margin is high as compared to rest of foodservice segments. What attracts investors in India? Cheap manpower: When it comes to cheap manpower, India is the only nation.

  19. What Equipment Do I Need For A Food Stall?

    What Equipment Do I Need For A Food Stall? A checklist of all the equipment you need to easily start a food stall business Starting out in the street food business can be daunting and you will probably have a thousand questions you need answering. From what food to sell to where to sell it from.

  20. Setting up a Street Food Business

    Learn how to set up a successful street food business. Explore the positives and negatives, set up costs and earnings from street food.

  21. Benefits of street food business

    Here are some of the benefits or risks of street food: 1. It is easy to market. Street food ventures profit from the consumer's desire for convenience. With increasing disposable income, consumers with busy lifestyles are likely to work longer hours to eat at fast-food restaurants or order takeaways than cooking for themselves. 2.

  22. Business Plan Pani Puri

    2023 stall in india executive summary pani puri is popular street food in india, and we propose to open stall specializing in this dish. our stall will be based

  23. Festival worker jailed for child abuse phone photos

    A festival worker was found with indecent images of children on his phone after he offered drugs to a plain-clothed security guard. Adam Bell, 19, was working on a food stall at the In It Together ...

  24. On iconic Pakistani food street, favorite Ramadan snacks trace origins

    Stretching through the heart of the old city in the Saddar Town area, the famous food street appeared in urban plans in the late 19th century, but only gained fame after 1947, when British India ...